MOBILE HARBOUR CRANE

VOLUME 1

TYPE

LHM 100

ORDER − NO.
140 309

Subject to alteration !
1st Edition: 10.12.2002 / JM

LIEBHERR−WERK−NENZING GMBH, P.O.Box 10, A−6710 Nenzing / Austria / Europe

Phone (05525) 606−0, Telex 052141 lwn a, Telefax (05525) 606−200
 FOREWORD

This DOCUMENTATION has been prepared to allow the safe operation of the LIEB

HERR crane while utilizing the crane’s full range of operating possibilities. In addition,
the manual emphasizes the daily routine maintenance and informs the operator of the
operating principles of important assemblies and systems.

VOLUME 1 − INSTRUCTION / MAINTENANCE MANUAL

VOLUME 2 − TECHNICAL INFORMATION

VOLUME 3 − SPARE PARTS LIST

The DOCUMENTATION is prepared for extended service−, repair− and maintenance

work as well as ordering spare parts. This manual shall be used by trained Service−per

sonnel only.

This LIEBHERR crane shall be operated and serviced by from LIEBHERR−WERK NEN

ZING trained or authorized personnel only.

The procedures described in the DOCUMENTATION and general safety precautions

shall be observed at all times.

NON−OBSERVANCE OF THESE RULES CAN RESULT

IN PERSONAL INJURY AND STRUCTURAL DAMAGE.
Special attention shall be given to the safety devices built−in to the crane. They shall
be tested at regular intervals for good condition and proper operation. Crane operation
is prohibited if the safety devices are not working properly.

"S A F E T Y A L W A Y S C O M E S F I R S T"
must be the way of thinking and behaviour before, during and after crane operation.

If you receive any further information for the crane, such as technical modifications or
changes concerning operation, maintenance, or spare parts − please attach them to
provided volumes.
 INDEX

INDEX − VOLUME 1
1. PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
1.1. TO THE OWNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
1.2. GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
1.3. CRANE APPLICATION AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
1.4. CONVERSION TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
1.5. STANDARD HAND SIGNALS FOR CONTROLLING
CRANE OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
1.6. GENERAL HINTS AND ADVICE FOR CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
1.7. EXPLANATION OF SAFETY SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
1.8. LIEBHERR WORLD−WIDE SERVICE ORGANIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23

2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3

2.1. SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3

2.2. TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
2.3. LOAD DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
2.4. ARRANGEMENT OF MAIN PARTS ON THE CRANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
2.5. DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN PARTS OF THE CRANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12

3. CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3

3.1. LAYOUT OF THE OPERATOR’S CABIN ON THE TOWER

(UPPER CABIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
3.2. EXPLANATION OF THE CONTROL ELEMENTS ON THE
CONTROL STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
3.3. LITRONIC − LIEBHERR ELECTRONIC CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
3.4. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
3.5. PA−SYSTEM / AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43
3.6. TELEPHONE−SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45
3.7. USER’S GUIDE FOR OPERATOR’S SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46

4. CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3

4.1. DANGEROUS AREA AND SPECIAL SAFETY REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . 4.3

4.2. PREPARATIONS FOR CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
4.3. CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
4.4. DATA RECORDER SYSTEM − SECTOR TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28
4.5. TRAVEL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.35
4.6. STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.39

5. FAULT FINDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3

5.1. FAULT FINDING LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3

6. EMERGENCY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3

6.1. FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3

−0.5− L284
INDEX

6.2. OPERATION HOW TO LOWER THE LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3

6.3. LOADING OF PRESSURE ACCUMULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.4. OPENING OF SLEWING BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
6.5. LAYOUT OF EMERGENCY HAND PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
6.6. ILLUSTRATIONS OF COMPONENTS FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION 6.5

7. MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7

7.1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7

7.2. SPECIAL SAFETY REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
7.3. HYDRAULIC OIL FILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
7.4. zlDIESEL OIL TANK AND FILLING UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
7.5. LUBRICANTS AND OILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
7.6. OPERATION AT LOW OUTSIDE TEMPERATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
7.7. DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
7.8. THE DRY AIR−FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31
7.9. INSTRUCTIONS FOR STARTER BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.32
7.10. MAINTENANCE OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.36
7.11. LIEBHERR CONDITION MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.38
7.12. PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.46
7.13. GEARBOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.47
7.14. MULTIPLE DISC BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.52
7.15. NAF − AXLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.53
7.16. PUMPING UP THE TYRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.64
7.17. CENTRALIZED LUBRICATION SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.65
7.18. THREE−ROW−ROLLER SLEWING RING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.74
7.19. INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF CRANE ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.77
7.20. REPLACEMENT OF ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.81
7.21. DIRECTIONS FOR USE OF QUICK RELEASE LINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.83
7.22. ROPE PULLEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.85
7.23. STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88
7.24. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88
7.25. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR SLIP RING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.90
7.26. MAINTENANCE OF THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92
7.27. WELDING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.94
7.28. CORROSION PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.99
7.29. MAINTENANCE LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103
7.30. SERVICE SPARE−PARTS AND STANDARD TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.187
TABLE OF LUBRICANTS
L284

L284 −0.6−
 PREFACE

INDEX

1. PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3

1.1. TO THE OWNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3

1.2. GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3

1.2.1. CRANE SERIAL NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3

1.2.2. SPARE PARTS, REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
1.2.3. PRESERVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
1.2.4. WELDING OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4

1.3. CRANE APPLICATION AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4

1.3.1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4

1.3.2. APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
1.3.3. USE OF MOBILE HARBOUR CRANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4

1.4. CONVERSION TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6

1.5. STANDARD HAND SIGNALS FOR CONTROLLING

CRANE OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7

1.6. GENERAL HINTS AND ADVICE FOR CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . 1.8

1.6.1. GENERAL SAFETY RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9

1.6.2. WARNING NOTES AND SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR LEAD ACID BATTERIES . . . . . 1.13
1.6.3. SAFETY INFORMATION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13

1.7. EXPLANATION OF SAFETY SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16

1.7.1. PROHIBITION SIGNS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16

1.7.2. WARNING SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
1.7.3. MANDATORY SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17
1.7.4. RESCUE SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
1.7.5. IMPORTANT SAFETY SIGNS AND WARNING PLATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19

1.8. LIEBHERR WORLD−WIDE SERVICE ORGANIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23

−1.1− L284
PREFACE

L284 −1.2−
 PREFACE

1. PREFACE

1.1. TO THE OWNER

Any questions concerning to the care and upkeep of this crane which have not been covered in this book
should be directed to your nearest LIEBHERR service station.
LIEBHERR reserves the right to make alterations or modifications to this equipment at any time, which in
their opinion may improve the performance or efficiency of the crane.

DANGER",
WARNING",
ATTENTION",
IMPORTANT" and
NOTE are used throughout this manual to
emphasize critical instructions. In this manual these special instructions are used as follows:

DANGER !
Denotes an extreme intrinsic hazard, which could result in a high prob
ability of death or serious injury, if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING !
Denotes a hazard, which could result in injury or death, if proper pre
cautions are not taken.

ATTENTION !
Denotes a reminder of safety pratices or directs attention to unsafe
practices, if proper precautions are not taken.

. IMPORTANT !
Denotes IMPORTANT operation and maintenance procedures, which could result in damage or
destruction of the machine or in any of its components, if not observed.

. NOTE !
NOTE describes operation and maintenance procedures, which should be followed to keep your
CRANE operational and insure long machine life and to facilitate certain procedures.

The safety rules included in this manual represents a minimum set of standards for safe crane operation.
Every operator should be familar with and follow these rules at all times. Written rules, however, cannot cover
all situations which might occur on the job.

1.2. GENERAL INFORMATION

1.2.1. CRANE SERIAL NUMBER

For easy identification each crane is marked with a serial number. This serial number is imprinted on a plate
fixed to the base frame of the slewing column.
All correspondence with Liebherr or one of our branch offices should include the respective serial number
of the crane.

1.2.2. SPARE PARTS, REPAIRS

In case that crane components or service products have to be replaced, resp. added, only original equip

ment from the manufacturer and service products which are identical (design and function ) to the original
exchanged parts resp. products must be used.

−1.3− L284
PREFACE
If spare parts or service products other than those authorized by the original equipment manufacturer, LIEB

HERR cannot be held responsible for any malfunction or damage to persons or property.
Repairs or modifications on the crane software package are only allowed to be made by service engineers
from LIEBHERR or LIEBHERR authorized personnel.

1.2.3. PRESERVATION

The crane has to be preserved if not in operation for more than 3 months.
Preservation instructions are obtainable through our service department.

1.2.4. WELDING OPERATIONS

Welding operations on the crane to be executed by qualified welders only with approved welding material
and welding procedures, fully in accordance with the requirements of the relevant classification society.

1.3. CRANE APPLICATION AND OPERATION

1.3.1. GENERAL

This is probably the most important area relative to safety since it involves the greatest frequency of expo

sure to danger. The operator should be of sound mind and body and be able to understand and apply estab

lished operating rules. He should be able to exercise good judgment in dealing with the many situations
which cannot be anticipated and covered herein.
Since the manufacturer has no direct control over the crane application and operation, the user is fully
responsible for good safety practice.

1.3.2. APPLICATION

In general, established operating safety rules should be observed when performing operating functions.
Operating safety rules are found in codes of the following organization:
−DOE (Department of Energy)
−ILO (International Labour Organization)
and in the Occupational Safety and Health Act, as well as in Local or National Codes.
It is obvious that written rules cannot cover all situations that might be encountered on the job. To meet such
unexpected situations the operator must be able to supplement the rules mentioned above with his own
ones based on good judgment.

1.3.3. USE OF MOBILE HARBOUR CRANE

Intended Operation
The LIEBHERR MOBILE HARBOUR CRANE is designed only for crane operation and only lifting appliances
which have been approved by the crane manufacturer are to be used. The crane may only be used for loads
which lie within the limits of the appropriate load curve.
It is to be assumed that the exterior conditions for the travel and working range of the crane meet the working
requirements, so that the technical details stated in the Technical Data"
regarding angles, inclines, axle and propping pressure can be maintained without risk.
When working, the crane is designed for hook and rotator operation. This also applies when the correspond

ing hoist accessories used by the customer meet the regulations of the crane type. In case of doubt this
should be explicitly clarified with the crane manufacturer.

DANGER !
Observe without fail the capacities for the individual operating situations.
You will find these in the Technical Data as well as in the capacity charts in
the Operation Manual.

L284 −1.4−
 PREFACE
It is permissible to lower the jib for maintenance work.
Please note without fail, that these details are machine specific; this means, that machines with the same
type designation could have different characteristics.

Use of professional personnel

The operation, service, maintenance and repairs may only be carried out by personnel trained by the
manufacturer. The use of trained personnel ensures the use of corresponding specialized knowledge and
provides a resource that can address all questions relating to safety and accident prevention regulations.

Environmental Conditions
For the safe operation of the crane it is absolutely necessary to ensure that the environmental conditions,
under which the machine will be operated, are according to regulations.
Hereby special attention is to be paid to the ground pressure of the tires and stabilizers. The ground must
be sound and level ; deep pot−holes and severe road unevenness endanger the stability of the crane. Criti

cally check without fail also the area of the stabilizers to ensure that the propping plates are totally rested
on the ground; the collapsing of a stabilizer on unstable ground can have devastating effects.
If the crane should be travelled, the designated travel route is to be previously checked. In addition pay atten

tion also to clearance width, especially by cornering. The minimum clearance width to immovable objects
and crane parts shall be 1m (3,28 ft).
Special attention shall be paid to clearance in height when travelling the crane to prevent damages on the
crane or objects e.g. electric power cables etc.

Other examples of crane misuse:

−lifting loads which lie outside of the prescribed limits in the load curve
−lifting loads without using the propping plates
−offlead / sidelead or dragging loads
−use the crane as a towing vehicle
−transporting of people or personnel
−travelling with loads outside of the prescribed limits
are strictly forbidden!

−1.5− L284
PREFACE

1.4. CONVERSION TABLE

Conversion factors for SI units : The current edition of the rules are in dual units presented with the MKS
units first followed by the U.S. Customary units in parentheses. A third system of units now being used in

ternationally is the system Internation d’Unites (SI). For the convenience of the purchasers of this book who
use SI units, the following conversion table has been included. This table only provides conversion factors
for those U.S. Customary units and MKS units that differ from SI units, that are used in the rules and guides
of the American Bureau of Shipping. Proper use of significant figures and rounding−off techniques should
be given due consideration when using the conversion table.

Quantity U.S. Customary Multiply by To obtain SI units

or MKS Unit

Area ft2 9.290 304 (10−2)* m2

in2 6.451 600 (102)* mm2

Bending, Torque lb−in 1.129 848 (10−1) Nm

kg−m 9.806 650* Nm

Density lb/in3 2.767 990 (104) kg/m 3

Electrical ft−lb 1.355 818 J

in−lb 1.129 848 (10−1) J
kcal 4.186 800 (103)* J
kg−m 9.806 650* J

Force lb 4.448 222 N

ton (long) 9.964 017 (103) N
kg 9.806 650* N
ton (metric) 9.806 650 (103)* N

Length fathom 1.828 800 m

ft 3.048 (10−1)* m
in 2.540 (101)* mm

Mass lb 4.535 924 (10−1) kg

ton (long) 1.016 047 (103) kg
ton (metric) 1.000 (103) kg

Plan angle degree p/180 rad

Power hp 7.456 999 (102) W

hp (metric) 7.354 99 (102) W

Pressure, Stress psi 6.894 757 (103) N/m2 (or Pa)

6.894 757 (10−3) N/mm2
6894 757 (10−2) bar (or 105N/m2)
ton (long) in2 1.544 426 (107) N/m2 (or Pa)
1.544 426 (101) N/mm2
kg/cm 2 9.806 650 (104)* N/m2 (or Pa)
9.806 650 (10−1) bar (or 103 N/m2)
kg/mm 2 9.806 650 (106)* N/m2 (or Pa)

Temperature °F (°F − 32) / 1.8* °C

Velocity knot (kn) 0.514 444 m/sec.
Volume ft3 2.831 685(10−2) m3
gallon (liquid) 3.785 412 (10−3) m3
3.785 412 I
in3 1.638 706 (104) mm3

* Exact value ABS January 1980

L284 −1.6−
 PREFACE

1.5. STANDARD HAND SIGNALS FOR CONTROLLING CRANE OPERATIONS

HOIST LOWER USE MAIN HOIST

USE WHIP LINE RAISE BOOM LOWER BOOM

MOVE SLOWLY RAISE BOOM AND LOWER BOOM AND

LOWER THE LOAD RAISE THE LOAD

SWING STOP EMERGENCY STOP

TRAVEL STOP ALL

MOVEMENTS

−1.7− L284
PREFACE

1.6. GENERAL HINTS AND ADVICE FOR CRANE OPERATION

This machine is used primarily for hoisting, lowering and positioning of loads. To operate with maximum
safety certain procedures must be followed.
One capacity chart label (load diagram) is supplied with this crane. It is placed in the driver’s cabin. The load
diagram shows the max. permissible load which is allowed to be lifted in correspondence to the actual ra

dius. The actual load and radius are indicated on display in the cabin.
The following is a suggested procedure for making a typical lift:
a) Determine the weight to be lifted. Be sure to add the weight of loadblock, slings, spreader bars, chains
and any other gear used. The weight should be marked on the load − if not, consult someone who
knows it. Do not attempt lifting any load of unknown weight.

b) Consult the machine capacity chart for the maximum radius (min. boom angle) to safely handle the load.
The following facts about the capacity chart should be noted at all times:

1) The capacities listed in the chart are based on strength of materials. Exceeding these capacities will
overload the machine and could result in attachment or rope failure, or damage to machine.

2) All capacities are for 360° rotation.

c) Position the jib and hook block over the load.

d) Lower the hook block directly over the load. If the jib angle is lower than the capacity chart showing for
the weight involved the load must be positioned closer to machine or broken down into smaller pack

ages.

. IMPORTANT !

Do not attempt to drag the load closer to machine with the attachment.

e) Secure the load to hook block. The following points should be noted when picking a load:

1) The jib head must be positioned directly above the load and within the maximum chart radius.
The attachment is designed to lift and should never be used to drag a load sideways, inward or
outward.

2) Never exceed the capacities listed on either capacity chart.

3) When lifting loads near max. machine− or rope capacity, care must be taken to avoid sudden
loading and unloading of the hoist line. Ease into the load.

f) Hoist the load to the desired height. Raise or lower the attachment to position the load for lowering. Be
careful when booming down or swinging with the load, outswing caused by centrifugal force will in

crease the load radius resulting in a decreased load capacity. When lowering the jib, with load, do not
exceed the maximum radius listed in the capacity chart for the weight being handled.

THINK SAFETY
You, the operator are in charge of an important piece of equipment. It is very important that you know what
it can do.
It is also very important that you know what it should not do. No set of instructions can anticipate all of the
situations you will come across. The rules given here cover general usage and some of more specific cases.
If conditions arise not covered by these rules, consult the manufacturer. The cost of a phone call may save
someone’s life.

. IMPORTANT !

Only operators trained by the manufacturer authorized personnel are allowed to operate the
crane.

L284 −1.8−
 PREFACE
1.6.1. GENERAL SAFETY RULES

1) Read this operators manual and heed it. The manual contains valuable information.
2) Whenever an operator leaves the crane for any reason, the following must be done:
a) Lower the load to firm supporting surface.
b) Shut down engine.
c) Never depend upon the winch brake to suspend a load, unless the operator is at the controls and
ready to handle the load. Brake slippage, vandals, mechanical malfunctions could cause the load
to drop if left in the air unattended.
d) In order to prevent unauthorized persons entering the switch cabinet room, the switch cabinet
room shall be locked up.
3) The operator must not eat, read, or otherwise engage his attention, while operating the crane. Remem

ber, operating is a full time job.
4) Don’t allow crane loads to pass over people, or endanger their safety. Remove all loose objects. All
non−operating personnel should leave the extended working area when the crane is operating.
5) Be sure your work area is clear. Make sure you have proper clearance for crane, jib and load. Don’t
swing, hoist or lower the load, raise or lower jib without first making sure no one is in the way. If your
vision is obscured, locate a signal man so you can see him and he can see all areas you can’t. Follow
his signals. Be sure you and the signal man understand each others signals. The crane operation shall
be stopped if the visibility or contact to the signal man is not possible.
6) Inspect the crane daily. Don’t operate a damaged or poorly maintained crane. Pay particular attention
to the attachment and wire ropes. If a component is worn or damaged, it must be replaced before oper

ating. Remember, parts are cheaper than people. OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Act) regula

tions state "a through inspection of all ropes shall be made once a month and a full, written, dated and
signed report of rope condition kept on file where readily available". Replace any worn or damaged
rope. Check end connections (pins, sockets, wedges, etc.) for wear and damage.
7) Don’t let the load hit the jib. Don’t let the jib hit against other objects. If the damage is severe the jib
may collapse. If a lattice or diagonal bracing member is broken or cracked, replace it. If bent, straighten
it. Important detailed information on jib repair is available from the manufacturer. Some of the steel used
in jibs is a special type which can be ruined by improper repair procedures. If a chord is bent or dam

aged, even a small amount, don’t use it. don’t try to repair it. Chords are so vital to the strength of the
jib that it is not practical to attempt repairs.
If the jib is struck or damaged by anything − stop. The loading on a jib increases as the jib is lowered;
a damaged jib or jib suspension system may collapse during lowering. Use a helper crane to assist
in lowering a damaged jib.
8) Before starting crane operation all limit switches and cut−off devices must be checked. The crane
must be taken out of operation if one or more limits do not function properly.
9) Never get on or off the crane in motion. Use both hands when climbing onto the crane. A ladder is pro

vided − use it.
10) Keep your crane clean, in good repair and in proper adjustment, oil or grease on the decks may cause
falls. Improper adjustments can lead to crane damage, load dropping or other malfunctions.
11) Keep a dry chemical or carbon dioxide fire extinguisher in the cab or immediate vicinity of the crane
at all times. Instruct all operating and maintenance personnel in the use of the extinguisher. Check peri

odically to make sure it is charged properly and is in work order.
12) Never tamper with safety devices. Keep them in good repair and proper adjusted. They were put on
the machine for your protection.
13) Don’t smoke when fueling or fuel the crane near an open flame. Keep the nozzle in contact with the
filler neck to prevent static electric sparks. Shut down the engine when fueling.
14) Before performing repairs or adjustments, place load hook on ground, shut down engine and electric
power supply. Post a warning sign in cab so no one will try to start the engine.
15) Always replace protective guards and panels before operating machine. Never wear loose clothing
which may be caught in machinery. Always wear hard hats, safety glasses, steel toe shoes and any
other safety equipment required by local or job regulations when entering the engine room or super

structure.

−1.9− L284
PREFACE
16) Always shut the crane engine down before "servicing" any part of the hydraulic system.
17) Keep fingers, feet and clothing away from sheaves, drums and ropes unless the crane is shut down
and everyone knows what you are doing. Never place a hand on wires with crane in operation. A sud

den movement may pull them into the drum or sheaves. When changing or maintaining ropes perfora

tion free protective gloves shall be used !
18) Use extreme caution when removing radiator caps, drain plugs, grease fittings, hydraulic pressure
caps, etc. They may blow off and hit you or you may be burned by hot oil, water or steam.
19) Authorized personnel carrying out tests or maintenance works in the engine room or on the superstruc

ture must be aware of hot components!
Use caution when climbing to the expansion tank!
Protective gloves must be worn ! Repair and maintenance works are only allowed to be done if the
components have cooled down.
Cleaning should be done only with non−inflammable liquids or materials.
For setting the correct temperature in the cabin refer to description of the heating/cooling system in
this manual.
The rigger must be provided with his personal protective cloths.
In addition there is a danger of bumping against obstacles in the machinery room.
20) Always wear safety glasses when drilling, grinding or hammering on metal. You may get chips in your
eye.
The operator, supervisor or person in charge must see to the following:
a) Loads must be well secured before lifting. Be sure that the rigging can’t slip off or pull away from
the load or get out of position on the load. Be sure load is rigged so it won’t fall over.
b) Chains and slings must be of adequate size, in good condition and not twisted around each other.
A test certificate must be on file for each item of lifting equipment.
c) The load must not catch on an obstruction when lifting or swinging. Be sure load, fall lines or any
other part of machine doesn’t snag or strike any obstruction.
d) Avoid sudden starts and stops. Lift carefully, swing gently, lower and set loads carefully. Jerking
the load, swinging the crane roughly and lowering the load rapidly will put shock loadings and pos

sible side loadings on the jib. Rough treatment can also break a machine. Unnecessary abuse la

bels the operator as a beginner. Be a professional.
e) Never wrap the hoist line around the load. Never use discharged, worn or damaged rope for slings.
It may break and drop the load.
21) The hoist line must be vertical when starting to lift, if not the load will swing in, out or sideways when
lifted from the ground.
When picking a heavy load, the crane will lean towards the jib. This is caused by elasticity of the crane
and the jib. The lean will increase operating radius so the load will swing outward when it clears the
ground. This outswing is dangerous to anything in the path of the load and because of the increase
in the load radius may overload the crane. To overcome this outswing, jib up as the load is lifted so fall
lines remain vertical. When setting the load on the ground, lower the jib after load touches down to
avoid hook block swing when it is unhooked from load.
22) One workman should be designated as a signal man, and the operator should obey signals from him
only. A signal to stop should be obeyed no matter who gives it. See hand signals chart earlier in this
section. The crane operation shall be stopped if the visibility or contact to the signal man is not possible.
23) Know your load. Don’t try to guess or estimate the load. Use a scale weight or certified weight, a hook
scale or load indicating system. Remember − the weight you are lifting includes the weight of any lifting
slings or gear, the hook block and any overhaul weights. The total weight must never exceed the rated
capacity of the machine, as listed on the capacity chart, for the position, jib length, load radius, no. of
lines and conditions of operation being used. Remember − capacity chart ratings are based on ideal
conditions:
a) Calm wind
b) No side loads or outswing of load
c) Good visibility

L284 −1.10−
 PREFACE
d) Machinery in perfect condition and equipped as when leaving the factory.
When such conditions cannot be attained, loads being handled must be reduced to compensate. The
amount loads are reduced depends upon how good or how poor the actual operating conditions are.
It is a matter of judgment and experience.
Some factors which may require reduction of loads below listed ratings are:
a) Wind
b) Hazardous surroundings
c) Inexperienced personnel
d) Poor visibility
e) Fragile loads
f) Machine in poor condition
When in doubt, don’t take a risk. Reduce ratings more than you think you need to.
Avoid working the crane in high winds. If you must work in a wind, reduce capacities considerably be

low those shown on the capacity chart. Wind blowing against the load and the jib produces a side load
on the jib and reduces its capacity.
For protection of persons and electrical / electronics components at a thunderstorm, we recommend
to stop crane operation (switch off el. power).
When lifting large loads such as building panels in a wind, the movement of the load may pose a danger
to workmen or building structures. Out swing of load will increase load radius and may overload the
machine. This could lead to jib machine damage.
24) Don’t operate at radii and jib lengths where the capacity chart lists no capacity. Don’t use longer jibs
or tip extensions than listed on the chart. Either of the above can cause jib and/or extension failure.
25) Keep the load lines as short as possible to prevent excessive swinging.
26) Watch out for centrifugal force when swinging a load. Swing gently. Centrifugal force tends to increase
load radius. This increase in radius could overload the crane and cause crane damage. When stopping
the swing overswing of the load can side load the attachment.
27) Know the load radius. Don’t guess it. Determine radius by using the indication on the monitor or mea

sure it with a steel tape. Remember, radius is the horizontal distance from the centreline of rotation of
the crane to the center of gravity of the load is hanging free.
28) Know the jib length. Don’t guess it. Use of an incorrect jib length can cause an accident.
29) Use at least the number of parts of hoist line specified in the reeving plan to handle the load.
30) Test the winch brakes by raising the load off the ground and holding. It should hold easily.
31) Don’t pull sideways on the jib, not even a little bit. Lift straight up on every load. Moving anything by
pulling sideways with the hoist line is liable to buckle the jib. It may also damage the swing mechanism.
32) Don’t alter any part of the machine. Additions to or changes in any part of the equipment can create
loadings which the crane was not designed for. Such changes may seriously affect the usable capaci

ties and make the entire capacity chart invalid. Such changes can dangerously overload or weaken
critical parts and may cause disastrous failure.
33) Whenever entering the engine room or superstructure ear protection must be worn at a noise level
higher than 85 dBA.
Maximum noise level in the upper and in the lower cabin is lower than 85 dBA.
34) Don’t lift more than one separately rigged load at a time even if both loads combined don’t exceed the
cranes capacity. Your full attention cannot be given to both loads, creating a dangerous situation.
35) Use caution when booming up to minimum radius. Be prepared to stop jib travel. If the jib limit device
malfunctions, the jib and backstops may be damaged or someone may be hurt.
36) When operating near minimum radius, be ready to jib down as you set the load down, to compensate
for the tendency of the jib to move back against the backstops when the load released. This action
occurs because of elasticity in the jib hoist system.
Never fully depend on "so called" safety devices. Nothing replaces the good judgment and safety con

sciousness of the crane operator.
37) Block under the jib top section (front and rear) before disconnecting from extensions. Since the top
section is tapered, it will fall to the ground when unpinned. This could result in an accident.

−1.11− L284
PREFACE
38) When operating the crane equipped with any form of load indicating mechanism, overload warning
system or any automatic safety device, remember that such devices cannot replace the skill and judg

ment of a good operator. Such devices cannot, for instance, tell when too few parts of line are being
used to hoist a load, or correct for the effects of wind, or warn that the device may be improperly ad

justed, or correct for side pulls on the jib, or for many conditions which may occur and which may create
hazards. It requires all the skill, experience, judgment and safety consciousness that a good operator
can develop to attain a safe operation. Many safety devices can assist the operator in performing his
duties, but he should not depend on them to keep him out of trouble.
39) After a slack rope operation, make sure the rope is properly seated in sheaves and on drums before
continuing to operate. Use a stick or mallet to set the rope, not your hands.
40) Make sure machine is equipped with an adequate length of wire rope. Check wire rope length by lower

ing hook block to lowest level and observing rope left on drum. Never allow less than 3 full wraps of
rope on any drum.
If all the rope is run off a drum, the load will jerk, possibly causing damage to rope, attachment or ma

chine.
41) Make sure there is a latch on the hook, and that, it works properly. Without a latch, it is possible for
slings or chains to come off the hook and allow the load to fall.
42) When lifting submerged loads. Don’t pull sideways − or jib may collapse. If possible, rig the load so
it is lifted from one end. Don’t yank or jerk on the load. When a submerged load reaches the surface,
don’t attempt to lift it out of the water all at once. It may be saturated with water and will weigh many
times what you expect. Allow it to drain as you raise the load slowly. Be patient, as draining may take
a long time. A load, when removed from the water, even when fully drained, will have a greater effective
weight than it will when submerged because of buoyancy.
43) When using magnetic grab be aware that the load is only suspended appr. 20 min. after loosing the
electric power. Never turn load over people. When operating the crane with magnetic grab or normal
grab the working and slewing area of the crane shall be secured !
44) During crane operation broadcasting per radio telephone is only allowed if the limits of interference do
not exceed, as described in standards EN 50 082 / Part 2. These limits of interference are in accordance
with the area class 2 of IEC 801−3:
radio telephone power 6W: distance more than 2 m (6,56 ft) from:
− cabins, switch cabinets undercarriage/slewing
platform
radio telephone power 2W: distance more than 1 m (3,28 ft) from:
− cabins, switch cabinets undercarriage/slewing
platform
45) In case of an emergency situation it is possible to leave the tower cabin by using the BORNACK RES

CUE DEVICE.
46) The lighting has to be switched on if the visibility is not sufficient !
47) When operating the crane access to the crane is prohibited. If crane access is necessary following
items shall be noticed:
a) the crane operator shall be informed before entering the working area of the crane
b) the crane should be in standstill when entering the working area
c) communication with the crane operator shall be performed via the telephon situated on the under

carriage
d) the telephon shall be stored back on the provided place after use
48) Be aware of slipping or falling from pedestals during inclement e.g. rainy, icy etc. ! Good footwear shall
be worn !

L284 −1.12−
 PREFACE
1.6.2. WARNING NOTES AND SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR LEAD ACID BATTERIES

ATTENTION !
F Follow information on the battery, the instructions for use, and instructions for operating the ve

hicle.
F Wear eye protection.
F Keep children away from acid and batteries.
F Explosion hazard:
A highly−explosive oxygen / hydrogen gas mixture occurs when charging batteries, therefore:
F Fires, sparks, exposed lights and smoking are prohibited:
−Avoid causing sparks when dealing with cables and electrical equipment.
−Avoid short−circuits.
F Corrosive hazard:
−Battery acid is highly corrosive, therefore
−Wear protective gloves and eye protection
−Do not tilt battery, acid can escape from the degassing openings or vents.
F First aid:
−Rinse off acid splashed in the eyes immediately for several minutes with clean water. Then con

sult a doctor immediately.
−Neutralize acid splash on skin or clothes immediately with acid neutralizer (soda) or soap suds
and rinse with plenty of water.
−If acid is consumed, consult a doctor immediately.
F Warning note:
−Do not place batteries in direct daylight without protection.
−Discharged batteries can freeze, store in an area protected from freezing.

1.6.3. SAFETY INFORMATION FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS

1.6.3.1. GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION

F For any work on the coolant circuit, all ACCIDENT PREVENTION GUIDELINES (pertaining to the
use of fluorine hydro−carbons, refrigerants) must be observed.
F Any required maintenance and / or repairs may only be performed by specially trained person

nel.

1.6.3.2. HANDLING COOLANTS

F When coolant circuits are opened, the contents may escape in liquid or vapour form. The higher
the pressure in the circuit, the more violently this will happen.
Wear safety goggles
F Wear safety goggles. These prevent coolant from getting into your eyes, which may cause se

vere frostbite damage.
Wear protective gloves
F Coolants are good solvents of greases and oils. They therefore remove the protective film of
grease on contact with skin.
Degreased skin is sensitive to cold and disease causing bacteria, however.
Suitable protective gloves are an effective way of avoiding exposure to the skin.
Do not expose the skin to liquid coolant !
F A coolants is designed for cooling. For this purpose, it needs to evaporate. The coolant extracts
the heat for evaporation from its environment, even if this is the skin, and very low temperatures
are reached in the process. This leads to local freezing (frostbite).
Do not breathe in coolant vapours in high concentrations !

−1.13− L284
PREFACE
F All coolants − even those which are liquid at room temperature − evaporate when the circuit
is opened. The vapours mingle with the ambient air.
In case of all types of coolant except for R 11 and R113 the main risk that they will displace
the oxygen in the air which is necessary for breathing (risk of suffocation).
Ensure good ventilation!
F In order to prevent occurring of higher concentrations, work places must be well ventilated. The
maximum working concentration must be observed.
Exhaust system!
F Opening windows and doors may not be sufficient, that means, an exhaust system must be
installed at the point of exit if possible or close to the floor. This particularly important when work

ing with open liquid coolants such as R11 and R 113.
Do not smoke!
F Coolants can decompose in the heat of a cigarette. The substance thus produces are toxic and
should not be breathed in.
Warning against misuse!
F Due to narcotic effect and risk of oxygen displacement, the coolant vapours must not be
breathed in higher concentrations.
You are expressly warned against misusing coolants!

1.6.3.3. COOLING SYSTEMS

F In cooling systems, the coolant is present under pressure in liquid and vapour form. This fact
must be taken into account when carrying out repairs to cooling systems.
Repair leaks in cooling systems immediately!
F Leakages in cooling systems do not only impair the function of the equipment, but in the case
of large filling volumes, dangerously high coolant concentrations can occur in the ambient air,
possibly concentrated in one place.
Do not let coolants escape during filling or repair work, transfer to recycling containers!
F If coolants are allowed to escape in closed rooms, higher concentrations can arise, which poses
a risk to life due in narcotic effects or lack of oxygen.
Always transfer coolants from plants in need of repair into recycling containers for temporary
storage and, after the repair work, refill into the plant or return to the dealer.
Ensure good ventilation!
F In order to prevent occurring of higher concentrations, make sure that the work rooms are well
ventilated. In some cases opening windows and doors is not sufficient, that means, an exhaust
system must be fitted at the point of exit, or at least close to the floor.
If high coolant concentrations suddenly arise (e.g. due to ruptured pipelines), leave room
immediately and do not reenter until it has been sufficiently ventilated.
F In the case of all types of coolant except for R11 and R113, the main risk is that they will dis
place the oxygen in the air which is necessary for breathing (risk of suffocation).
If high concentrations of coolant are present in the air, use respiratory equipment which is
independent of the ambient atmosphere.
F Filter masks with breathing filter A (solvents) can only remove coolant vapours to a small extent.
They may only be used if the concentration does not exceed 05, % vol. (see respiratory equip

ment specifications). If the concentration is too high, there is a risk of suffocation particularly in
pits and shafts, since coolant vapours are heavier than air. In case of doubt, always use respirato

ry equipment which is independent of the ambient atmosphere.
Only carry out welding and soldering work on cooling systems in well ventilated rooms!
F Coolants decompose in the flame from soldering lamps or welding torches, as well as in electric
arcs. The decomposition products thus generated are toxic and must not be breathed in.
Before carrying out welding and soldering jobs on cooling systems, remove coolant from
the relevant section of the plant and eliminate residue by blowing through with air or nitro
gen!

L284 −1.14−
 PREFACE
F The decomposition products generated from the coolant are not only toxic but also have a
strongly corrosive effect, so that pipelines and parts of the plant may be attacked. In the case
of chlorine − containing coolants, these products are mainly hydrogen fluoride and elemental
chlorine. Phosgene may also be formed. HCFC’s can form hydrogen fluoride as a dangerous
decomposition product.
Pungent odour indicates decomposition of the coolant due to overheating:
F Leave room immediately, ventilate well or use filter mask with breathing filter B (acidic gases)!
F If a pungent odour occurs, the above mentioned decomposition products have already been
generated. These substances should not be breathed in under any circumstances, by the respi

ratory channels, lungs and other organs. A filter mask with breathing filter B (acidic gases) pro

vide an effective protection against these decomposition products.
Observe the instructions for use.

First aid!
1. In the event of contact with eyes or mucous membranes, rinse out immediately with plenty of
running water and consult an eye specialist.
2. In the event of contact with the skin, remove wet clothing immediately and rinse affected area
of skin with plenty of water.
3. If coolant vapours are breathed in higher concentrations, get the affected person in to the fresh
air immediately. Summon a doctor. Administer oxygen in the event of breathing problems. If
the air affected person can no longer breathe or cannot breathe properly, bend head to back
of the neck and resuscitate.
4. Information for doctors:
− higher concentrations of coolants can lead to a restriction or loss of consciousness.
Since coolants make the heart sensitive to catecholamine, no adrenomimetics should be
administered.

−1.15− L284
PREFACE

1.7. EXPLANATION OF SAFETY SIGNS

1.7.1. PROHIBITION SIGNS:

Fire, exposed flame and smoking prohibited Do not operate switch

No entrance for unauthorized personnel Prohibited for persons with pacemaker

1.7.2. WARNING SIGNS

Warning of hanging load Warning of electro−magnetic field

Warning of high voltage Danger of falling

L284 −1.16−
 PREFACE

Warning of danger through batteries Danger of slipping Danger through hot surface

Warning of Drawing−in Warning of Drawing−in

−winches, −sheaves −gears

1.7.3. MANDATORY SIGNS

Wear eye protection Wear safety gloves Wear safety protection

Wear safety helmet Wear safety boots Wear ear protection

−1.17− L284
PREFACE

Follow information on the Switch off power supply Use safety device
component, in the in
structions for use and in
structions for operating
the vehicle

1.7.4. RESCUE SIGNS

First aid Fire extinguisher

Doctor

L284 −1.18−
 PREFACE

1.8. LIEBHERR WORLD−WIDE SERVICE ORGANIZATION

Edition: 06.03.02

− AUSTRIA −
LIEBHERR−WERK NENZING GMBH Tel. No. +43 5525 606−0
P.O. Box 10 Fax. No. +43 5525 606−20
Tschalenga 3 Tlx. No. 52549 LWNET A
A−6710 NENZING
Service manager ship crane:
Mr. Harald Fröhlich Tel. No. +43 5525 606−387
Fax. No. +43 5525 606−54
Tlx. No. 52549 LWNET A
E−mail: harald.froehlich@lwn.liebherr.com
Service manager offshore crane:
Mr. Harald Mühlhauser Tel. No. +43 5525 606−308
Mr. Andreas Kopf Fax. No. +43 5525 606−625
Tlx. No. 52549 LWNET A
E−mail: harald.muehlhauser@lwn.liebherr.com
E−mail: andreas.kopf@lwn.liebherr.com
Service manager harbour mobile crane:
Mr. Günter Leonhartsberger Tel. No. +43 5525 606−242
Fax. No. +43 5525 606−622
Tlx. No. 52549 LWNET A
E−mail: guenter.leonhartsberger@lwn.liebherr.com
LIEBHERR−SERVICE CONTRACTORS IN:

− GERMANY −
LIEBHERR−NENZING−SERVICE Tel. No. +49 40 76702 200
Am Neuländer Baggerteich 1 Fax. No. +49 40 7658779
D−21079 HAMBURG 90 Tlx. No. 213540 LHSKS D
Contact: Mr. G. Mellmann
E−mail: gerhard.mellmann@lns.liebherr.com

− GREAT BRITAIN −
LIEBHERR−SUNDERLAND WORKS Tel. No. +44 191 567 9977
Ayres Quay Fax. No. +44 191 567 2723
Deptford Terrace Tlx. No. 53445 LIEBHSW G
SUNDERLAND SR4 6DD Contact: Mr. Uwe Kari
E−mail: uwe.kari@lsw.liebherr.com

− NETHERLANDS −
LIEBHERR MARITIME BENELUX B.V. Tel. No. +31 30 280 6060
Kanaalweg 29 B Fax. No. +31 30 638 4737
3526 KM UTRECHT Contact: Mr. Chris Kats
E−mail: chris.kats@lmx.liebherr.com

− NORWAY −
BJORGE OFFSHORE AS Tel. No. +47 51943800
Hammaren 13 Fax. No. +47 51943810
N−4056 Tananger Contact: Mr. E.O. Holstad
NORWAY E−mail: e.holstad@bjorge−offshore.no

−1.19− L284
PREFACE
− ARGENTINIA −
INGENIERA DE EQUIPOS S.A. Tel. No. +54 11 4 8157784
I.D.E.S.A. Fax. No. +54 11 4 8157405
Avda. del Libertador 774
Piso 12 oficina C" Contact: Mr. L. Palacios Ashton
(1001) BUENOS AIRES E−mail: idesalhwb@redlink.net

− AUSTRALIA −
MORROW EQUIPMENT CO. (AUST.) Tel. No. +61 2 9525 7741
A39 − 1 Endeavour Rd Fax. No. +61 2 9525 0278
P. O. Box 533
CARINGBAH NSW 2229 Contact: Mr. Bill Jones
AUSTRALIA
− BRASIL −
LIEBHERR−BRASIL Tel. No. +55 125 32 4233
GUINDASTES E OPERATRIZES LTDA. Fax. No. +55 125 32 4366
Rodovia Presidente Dutra Km 59 Tlx. No. 125 540 LBGM BR
Caixa postal 204
12500 GUARANTINGUETA S. P. Contact: Mr. Karl Riess
− CANADA −
KEY MARINE INDUSTRIES LTD. Tel. No. +001 604 251 4010
1407 E. Georgia Street Fax. No. +001 604 251 4020
VANCOUVER, B.C. Website: http://www.keymarine.com
V5L 2A9 Contact: Mr. Phil Houston
E−mail: info@keymarine.com
− COSTA RICA −
SERVICIOS INTERCONTINENTALES S.A. Tel. No. +506 798 4387
LIEBHERR NENZING CRANE SERVICE Fax. No. +506 758 3800
Casa Amarilla
Frente Parquesito Asis Esna Contact: Mr. Peter Jordan
Apdo 187 PORT LIMON, C.R. E−mail: liebhlin@sol.racsa.co.cr
− CHILE −
H. TESSINI Ltda. Tel. No. +56 32 826243
Pacific Coast, Representationes & Fax. No. +56 32 826471
Technical Assistence
Avda. Almte. Gráu 2541 Contact: Mr. H. Tessini
Coop. Tte. Serrano
QUILPUE − VALPARAISO
− CHINA −
LIEBHERR (HKG) LIMITED Tel. No. +86 21 64152148
Shanghai Representative Office +86 21 64152149
Suite 709 Fax. No. +86 21 64736786
7/F. Jin Zhong Building
680 Zhao Jia Bang Road Contact: Mr. Andreas Ganahl
SHANGHAI, CHINA 200031 E−mail: liebherr@public3.sta.net.cn
− HONG KONG −
LIEBHERR (HKG) LIMITED Tel. No. +852 3142 3142
Servicecenter Fax.No. +852 3142 3119
86 Ping Che Road
Fanling, N. T. Contact: Mr. Stephen Siu
HONG KONG E−mail: stephen.siu@lhk.liebherr.com

L284 −1.20−
 PREFACE
− JAPAN −
MARINE ENTERPRISE CO., LTD. Tel. No. +81 78 3020171
1−1, 5−Chome Fax. No. +81 78 3020177
Minatoshima Nakamachi Tlx. No. 5622789 MARICO J
CHUO−KU, KOBE Contact: Mr. Shigeo Hirayama
− NEW ZEALAND −
MORROW EQUIPMENT CO. (NZ) Tel. No. +64 4 589 4924
Unit 13, Parkhead Court Fax. No. +64 4 589 3195
Western Hutt Road, Petone
P. O. Box 31−168 Contact: Mr. Bill Houlker
Lower Hutt WELLINGTON
− SINGAPORE −
LIEBHERR−SINGAPORE PTE. LTD. Tel. No. +65 6265 2305
No. 8 Pandan Avenue Fax. No. +65 6261 6485
SINGAPORE 609384 Tlx. No. 35053 LSBSIN
Contact: Mr. Oliver Hepp
E−mail: hepp.oliver@lsi.liebherr.com
− SOUTH AFRICA −
LIEBHERR−AFRICA PTY. LTD. Tel. No. +27 11 365 2000
Vlakfontein Road Fax. No. +27 11 817 3884
Fulcrum Ind. Township
P.O.Box 841 Contact: Mr. Chris Vorster
Springs / Transvaal 1560
− TAIWAN −
SWITCH MEANS INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD. Tel. No. +886 22 698 4558
Suite 6, 7/F. Sec. 1, Shin−Tai Wu Road Fax. No. +886 22 698 4556
Hsi−Chih Town, Taipei Hsien,
Taiwan, R.O.C. Contact: Mr. Kenny Kung
− THAILAND −
Mr. Gisbert Lunda Tel. No. +66 2 331 9972
C/O MEC Crane Corporation Co., Ltd. Fax. No. +66 2 331 9972
854 Soi 101, Sukhumvit Road, Mobile: +66 1 831 7518
Prakanong
Bangkok 10250 Contact: Mr. Gisbert Lunda
THAILAND E−mail: lundagisi@yahoo.co.uk
− USA −
LIEBHERR NENZING CRANE CO. Tel. No. +001 305 889−0176
10050 NW 116th Way, Suite #9 Fax. No. +001 305 889−0655
Medley
Florida 33178 Contact: Mr. Elmar Wolfgang
U.S.A E−mail: elmar.wolfgang@lnc.liebherr.com
− UNITED ARAB EMIRATES −
LIEBHERR−CRANE−SERVICE Tel. No. +971−4 34 10 30
FRONTLINE SHIPREPAIRING LCC Fax. No. +971−4 34 10 46
162, Al Jadaf
P.O. Box 50053 Contact: Mr. Kay Wittenberg
DUBAI E−mail: cranedxb@emirates.net.ae
U.A.E.

−1.21− L284
PREFACE

L284 −1.22−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

INDEX

2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3

2.1. SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3

2.1.1. HYDRAULIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3

2.1.2. ELECTRIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
2.1.3. OTHER SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
2.1.4. EMERGENCY DESCENT FROM THE CRANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6

2.2. TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8

2.2.1. GENERAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8

2.2.2. OPERATION MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
2.2.3. WIND SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
2.2.4. INCLINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
2.2.5. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
2.2.6. DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
2.2.7. GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
2.2.8. ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9

2.3. LOAD DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10

2.4. ARRANGEMENT OF MAIN PARTS ON THE CRANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11

2.5. DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN PARTS OF THE CRANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12

2.5.1. THE UNDERCARRIAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12

2.5.2. THE SLEWING PLATFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
2.5.3. MACHINERY HOUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
2.5.4. POWER PACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
2.5.5. CONTROLS ON THE SWITCH CABINETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
2.5.6. TOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
2.5.7. JIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
2.5.8. CRANE MOTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25

−2.1− L284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

L284 −2.2−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2.1. SAFETY DEVICES

2.1.1. HYDRAULIC

All brakes on the hoist and slew motion are spring loaded multi disc brakes, which are permanently ap

plied due to spring force and only released by means of a hydraulic pressure via the corresponding brake
solenoid valve.
The brakes are automatically applied, if a electric or hydraulic power failure occurs.
In case of a hose fracture or a similar fault, the pressure in the hydraulic circuit drops, the feed pressure
switch in the high pressure circuit signalizes "low pressure" and the multi disc brakes are depressurized.
Due to the brake system the brakes are automatically self adjusting, that means the brakes need not to
be readjusted.
Pressure cutting valves located on the hydraulic pumps of each hydraulic circuit restrict the maximum
pressure to 110% of maximum load.
High pressure relief valves (fix adjusted to 430 bar, 6236 psi) limit the pressure in the main hydraulic cir

cuits.
A slewing bypass safety valve is installed in order to protect the slewing pinions from too much wearing
in case of a sudden slewing movement stop out of full speed (e.g. by pressing an emergency stop button).
A float and temperature switch monitores the hydraulic oil level and temperature in the hydraulic oil tank.
The distribution gearbox temperature is monitored by a temperature switch.
Pressure sensors prevent damage to the crane by insuring the pull" in the hoisting lines does not exceed
a pre−set limit.

−2.3− L284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.1.2. ELECTRIC

In case the electric power supply should fail, all solenoid valves, which are used to release the brakes, are
de−energized. The multi disc brakes for each movement are applied immediately. Additionally all pump
control solenoids are de−energized and stop the crane movement.
All electric circuits are protected by adequate circuit breakers or motor protection units.
Limit switches:
Limit switches and sensors are installed on the crane to monitor the actual position and status of the crane,
to exclude any in the actual position not allowed operation.
The hoist motion is limited via gear cam limit switches on each hoisting winch. Before the final limit is
reached, the speed of the hook is automatically reduced ("SLOWLY").
The jib motion is limited via angle sensors. Before the final limit of the jib is reached, the speed of the jib is
automatically reduced ("SLOWLY").
Additionally all the different crane positions are monitored through limit switches. Thus to make sure that
the crane is in the correct position for the required operation (e. g. outrigger position, platform position acc.
to the undercarriage, support pressure, etc.)
Load moment limitation device:
The load moment limitation device of the electronic control stops and prohibits the hoist and jib motions in
case of an overload, so that the crane is not overloaded.
Lighting:
Parts of the access lights are installed as emergency lights which are buffered through batteries inside the
housing of the lamps.
The diesel engine is monitored for:
− overspeed
− lube oil pressure
− cooling water level and temperature
− fuel tank level
− overvoltage protection of the alternator
The generator is monitored for:
− overspeed
− frequency
− voltage
− maximum allowed power output
− phase coincidence
− temperature

Emergency stop" push buttons:
The diesel engine stops and all brakes apply immediately, if this button is pressed.
Locations of Emergency stop" buttons:
− Tower cabin on the control panel
− Aggregate room on the right side
− Switch cabint room
− Winch room on X61
− Switch cabinet X5 (undercarrige)
− remote control

L284 −2.4−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.1.3. OTHER SAFETY DEVICES

The travel motion is signalized by audible− and visual warnings.

The outrigger and crane jacking motions are signalized by audible and visual warnings.
All platforms are made of anti−slip material and are galvanized. The stairs and platforms are equipped with
hand rails.
A wind warning device gives a visible and audible alarm in case the maximum for crane operation allowed
wind speed is exceeded.
A lifting height indication enables the crane operator to position the load quicker and safer.
"Slackrope" detectors are installed at the hoisting winch to ensure a long life time of the crane’s ropes.
In case of fire there are three fire−extinguishers installed at the crane:
− in the engine room
− in the switch cabinet room
− in the upper cabin
A pair of wedges is supplied in order to secure the crane from rolling away if the crane is parked on a gradi

ent.

−2.5− L284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.1.4. EMERGENCY DESCENT FROM THE CRANE

In case of fire an emergency descent outside the crane is possible.

2.1.4.1. EMERGENCY DESCENT FROM THE UPPER CABIN

Procedure of descent:
1. Leave the tower cabin through the door

2. Pull out the complete re
4. Take the harness at the D− 5. Pull over the shoulder−
scue−device from the rings, lift the harness up to straps.
box, hang up at special the shoulders and latch
hook and throw the rope the D−rings in the carabi

outside. ner.
3. Stand with straddled legs
over the harness

STOP: Keep the incoming

rope tight and / or release
the brake lever !

ATTENTION
Don’t use damaged or incom

plete equipment !

6. Sitting in the harness, 7. Incoming rope in one

climb out of the window
hand, brake lever in other
hand. Open the brake ca

refully and regulate the
speed with the incoming
rope.

WARNING !
The procedure of roping down shall be trained before an emergency case!
There is a detailed operating and maintenance manual of the manufac

tuarer supplied with the rescue−device !

L284 −2.6−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
MAINTENANCE
−Don’t twist the safety rope in order to avoid damges on the rope !
−Brush out dirty rope or clean it with tepid water or fine washing agent (Rinse clear afterwards) !
−A visual inspection has to be done after eyery use of the rescue device !

ATTENTION !
The rescue equipment must be inspected by a competent person once
a year according to the check−list supplied with the rescue−device !

2.1.4.2. EMERGENCY DESCENT FROM THE SLEWING PLATFORM

There are two emergency ladders stored in the slewing platform. One is located in the switch cabinet room
(1) and the second is stored in the retaining capacity in front of the tank (2).

1)
a
a
a

2)
(3)

emergency escape ladder

length: 5m (16,4 ft)
loading capacity: 300kg (661
pounds)

(4)

Operation:

. NOTE !
− The ladder should only be used for escape from the slewing platform
− The ladder should only be fastened on the above marked points |a|.
Take the ladder and mount ist with the fastening element to the upper bar of the side railing.
Open the lashing strap (4) and the ladder falls down.

The emergenzy ladder is maintenance free.

−2.7− L284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2.2. TECHNICAL DATA

2.2.1. GENERAL DATA

PERMISSIBLE CAPACITIES:
Hook operation: 36,0 tonnes capacity SWL
SCOPE OF LWN SUPPLY:
Traverse operation: 36,0 tonnes capacity SWL
Four−rope−grab type VSG 16.7−0.96−6000
WORKING RANGE:
Minimum radius: 6,5 m (21 ft)
Maximum radius: 30 m (98 ft)
Maximum lifting height at min. working radius 34 m (111 ft)
Maximum lifting height at max. working radius 17 m (55 ft)
WORKING SPEEDS:
− Hoisting gear:
Infinitely variable speed: 0 t (0 lbs) 70 m/min (229 ft/min)
Infinitely variable speed: 36 t (97400 lbs) 25 m/min (82 ft/min)
− Slewing gear:
Infinitely variable speed: 1,6 rev/min (37,5 sec/rev)
Circular speed (at max. radius) 180 m/min (590 ft/min)
− Luffing gear:
Infinitely variable speed: 39 sec
− Travelling gear:
Infinitely variable speed: 5,4 km/h(at two driven wheel sets)

2.2.2. OPERATION MODES

Following operation modes can be performed:

F hook operation
F four rope grab operation
F travel operation
F side travel operation
2.2.3. WIND SPEED

Maximum allowed wind speed during travelling operation: 14 m/s (27 kn)
Maximum allowed wind speed during crane operation: 20 m/s (39 kn)
Wind speed to rest the jib on the ground: 42 m/s (81 kn)

L284 −2.8−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.2.4. INCLINATION

During travelling maximum allowed inclination is in

F transversal direction 2%
F longitudinal direction 5%
During crane operation the crane must be levelled.

2.2.5. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

2.2.5.1. DIMENSIONS
F Length of undercarriage: 14,10 m (46,3 ft)
F Width of crane with folded outrigers: 4,9 m (16,1)
F Height of crane with erected tower: approx. 18,9 m (62 ft)
F Outrigger support area (without propping plates): 9 m x 9 m (29 ft x 29 ft)

2.2.5.2. WEIGHTS
to to
F undercarriage 34,8 (76720,9 lbs)
F slewing platform 22,3 (49163,1 lbs)
F tower 19,7 (43431,1 lbs)
F cabin tower 2,0 (4409,2 lbs)
F counter weight complete 15,2 (33510,3 lbs)
F jib 11,2 (24691,8 lbs)
F winch frame complete 5,2 (11464,0 lbs)
F propping plates 4 x 0,9 3,6 (7936,6 lbs)
F loose gear (ropes, ...) 5,0 (11023,1 lbs)
F traverse 1,3 (2866,0 lbs)
−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
weight of crane (fully rigged with rotator) ∑ approx. 120,3 (265216,1 lbs)

2.2.6. DIESEL ENGINE

Type: D9408 TI−E

Model designation: LIEBHERR
Number of cylinders: 8
Power output: 400 kW at 1900 rpm according ISO 9249
Average fuel consumption: 215 g/kWh

2.2.7. GENERATOR

Type: DSG 29 L1−4

Model designation: AVK
Output: 35 kVA

2.2.8. ROPES

Type: Q 812 F
QS 816 V
PC−Turboplast
rotating, rope galvanized, 2 x lefthanded,
2 x righthanded
Min. breaking load: 572,5 kN
Diameter: 26 mm (1,0236 inch)
Length: 145,5 m (4773,6 ft)

−2.9− L284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2.3. LOAD DIAGRAM

L284 −2.10−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2.4. ARRANGEMENT OF MAIN PARTS ON THE CRANE

1
2
13

12

4 11
6

8
10

1 Hoisting ropes (4 ropes) 2 Cable reel for power supply of the electro−
hydraulic lifting devices (optional)
3 Cargo rotator 4 Jib
5 Tower cabin 6 Luffing cylinder
7 Access stairway for tower cabin 8 Access stairway for undercarriage
9 Slewing platform cabin (optional) 10 Slewing platform
11 Access stairway for undercarriage 12 Tower
13 Tower head rope pulleys

−2.11− L284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2.5. DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN PARTS OF THE CRANE

The crane consists of main constructional groups:

−undercarriage (chassis) with star−shaped propping system
−slewing platform (machinery house)
−tower structure with counterweight and winches
−jib

2.5.1. THE UNDERCARRIAGE

The undercarriage is a multi−axle mobile harbour crane chassis whereby all axle sets are steerable to en

sure lesser wear and tear of tyres.
A special feature is the very solid propping system with four outriggers forming a cruciform propping config

uration. Stresses and strains occuring during handling operation are thereby transmitted via shortest route
through the centre of the chassis onto the support arms and further to the ground.
This reduces torsional strain in the undercarriage to a minimum and consequently enhances the lifetime of
the slewing bearing and optimizes vertical stability in operation.

2.5.1.1. LAYOUT OF THE UNDERCARRIAGE

6 7

1 Hydraulic rotary connector and slip 2 Swing arm

rings for electric connections
3 Propping cylinders 4 Propping plate
5 Safety rail 6 Crane access
7 Axle set

L284 −2.12−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.5.1.2. STEEL STRUCTURE

The undercarriage is built as a strong, torsionally rigid structure, which is welded from high grade steel with
certification. It features the centrally arranged reinforced circular pedestal construction with the seating
flange ring for the bolted connection with the slewing bearing perfectly machined to meet the specified toler

ances for this interface. Two outriggers are anchored around the centre on each side of the undercarriage.

2.5.1.3. ACCESS TO CRANE

One independent ladder at the front provides unobstructed access to the undercarriage.

2.5.1.4. THE PROPPING SYSTEM

The four hinged outriggers (1) form the main body of the
cruciform propping configuration together with hydraulical

ly operated control cylinders and propping cylinders (2).
The horizontal and the vertical movements are activated
through solenoids either individually or in pairs. 1
The propping system can be commanded alternatively 2
from the tower cabin or the slewing platform cabin (option

al). Adjacent to the commanding switches a level gauge 4
3
enables the operator to set the crane to horizontal.
Various sizes of propping plates (3) enable a certain adap

tion of different ground conditions to ensure an even dis

tribution of the loadings.
Each of the four outtrigers is equipped with an anti−twist
protection (4) in order to keep the propping plates parallel
to the undercarriage (at the full extend of the outriggers).

2.5.1.5. THE PROPPING PLATES

Under normal conditions the crane is operated with single plates gimbal mounted on each of the four jack−
up rams.
When travelling, in case of narrow passage ways, the plates may be dismounted altogether by simply taking
off the safety pins; the outriggers can then be aligned over the twin wheels.

2.5.1.6. TRAVELLING GEAR

Two of the axle sets are driven. These axle sets are powered by hydraulic motors (7) which are directly
flanged onto it. The power source is the central power pack with the transmission arranged through a rotary
transmitter mounted within the central pedestal.

2.5.1.7. AXLE SETS

The axle sets are steerable and each one is fitted with a pair
of twin tyres (8). The driven axle sets feature differential
equalizers and epicyclic gears (6) located within the wheel
hubs.

2.5.1.8. AXLE SET SUSPENSION 6

5

The suspension is hydraulically with a cylinder (5). Axle

sets are connected together hydraulically. Connected axle
sets always have the same axle load, at max. 26 t. Through 7
more axle sets the axle load can be reduced.
8
2.5.1.9. STEERING

Wear of tyres is greatly reduced as all axle sets are steer

able. The steering ensues with hydraulic motors.

−2.13− L284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.5.1.10. TRAVELLING

To move from one quay section to another, all controls can be operated from the tower cabin. Travelling can
be done in both directions whereby a smooth start and stepless acceleration are ensured. The travelling
ensues with a joystick. The joystick signal is two−stage progressive. The hill−climbing ability can be
changed through variation of driven and non−driven axle sets.

2.5.1.11. BRAKES

All driven axle sets are equipped with a hydraulic multiple disc brake. The brakes apply as soon as the
joystick lever is released to neutral position.

2.5.1.12. ARRANGEMENT OF THE AXLES

4 6 8

3 5 7

Driven axle sets: no. 3, 8

Non−driven axle sets: no. 4, 5, 6, 7

2.5.1.13. BALL SLEWING RING

1 The ball slewing ring (2) connects the undercarriage with
the slewing platform and asorbs all axial and vertical forces
due to crane operation. The slewing ring is fastened with
high tensile expansion bolts (1). Dimensions and initial pre

load force see section ball slewing ring".
2

L284 −2.14−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.5.2. THE SLEWING PLATFORM

The slewing platform is essentially conceived to accommodate the diesel−hydraulic power pack, together
with driving gears, the switch and control department and the base of the tower. The slewing platform is built
as a framework.
The middle part of the slewing platform accommodates the heel section of the tower and the slewing gears.

2.5.2.1. LAYOUT OF THE SLEWING PLATFORM

8 7

6
4
5

1 Air escape hood 2 Hand rail

3 Adjustable mirror 4 Front tower pivot point
5 Cabin (optional) 6 Access to switch cabinet room and engine room
7 Air intake hood 8 Pedestrial

2.5.2.2. STEEL CONSTRUCTION

It is a torsionally rigid welded construction made of high grade steel with certification.

−2.15− L284
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.5.3. MACHINERY HOUSE

21 20 19

1
18
2

3
17

5 16

15
8

14

10 11 12 13

L284 −2.16−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1 Noise absorbing insulation

2 Hydraulic oil tank
3 Hydraulic oil suction pipe
4 Airfilter diesel engine
5 Air inlet for airfilter
6 Exhaust silencer
7 Exhaust pipe
8 Counterweight
9 Powerpack
10 Generator motor
11 Generator
12 Battery main switch
13 Batteries
14 Emergency handpump
15 Filterplate
16 Fire extinguisher
17 Access to engine room
18 Pump of centraliced greasing system
19 Engine room light
20 Hydraulic oil return line
21 Suction shut off valve

ATTENTION !
KEEP SUCTION SHUT OFF VALVE ALWAYS OPEN !
CLOSE ONLY FOR SERVICE WORK !

−2.17− L284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.5.4. POWER PACK

2 3 4 5

9 8 7 6

10 11 12 13 14

15

16

18 17

L284 −2.18−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1 Diesel engine make LIEBHERR type D 9408 TI−E

2 Diesel air breather
3 Drive shaft
4 Steering pumps
5 Gear box cooler with fan
6 Distribution gearbox
7 Forward: Variable pitch pump for the luffing gear
Backward: Variable pitch pump for the generator
8 Diesel starter motor
9 24 V generator
10 Diesel fuel injection pump
11 Protection cover for the drive shaft
12 Gear type pump for the feed pressure
13 Gear type pump for the oilcooler fan
14 Variable pitch pump for hoisting and travelling
15 Variable pitch pump for the slewing gear
16 Variable pitch pump for hoisting and travelling
17 Variable pitch pump for the watercooler fan
18 Gear type pump for the feed pressure

−2.19− L284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.5.5. CONTROLS ON THE SWITCH CABINETS

2.5.5.1. SWITCH CABINETS ON THE SLEWING PLATFORM

X1 X2

1 Socket 400 V AC / 16 A

2 Air inlet with filter

. NOTE !
Clean or exchange filter approx. every 3000 h.

3 Air outlet with filter and fan

. NOTE !
Clean or exchange filter approx. every 3000 h.

L284 −2.20−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

LAYOUT OF THE SIDE−WALLS:

Side wall X1 left side Side wall X2 right side

4
5
8
6
1
7

1 Socket 400 V AC / 16 A (optional)

2 Air inlet with filter

. NOTE !
Clean or exchange filter approx. every 3000 h.
3 Air outlet with filter and fan

. NOTE !
Clean or exchange filter approx. every 3000 h.
4 Telephone outlet / jack
5 Operation hours counter of diesel engine
The operation’s hours of the diesel engine are used to determine the crane’s maintenance intervals. Refer
to section
maintenance".
6 not used
7 Switch
auxiliary supply / generator supply"
Pos.
0": No supply for lighting, heating and battery chargers (only switch off for maintenance pur−
pose)
Pos.
I": The lighting and heating system as well as the battery charger are working on the auxiliary
supply, which has to be hooked up to a seperate plug on the undercarriage (see section
Operation of selector switch aux. supply / generator supply").
Pos.
II": The crane’s generator supplies lighting, heating and battery charger.
8 Switch
preselection load capacity"
With this key switch the 66% tipping curve or the 75% tipping curve can be preselected. Shut down the crane
prior selecting tipping curve !

−2.21− L284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.5.5.2. SWITCH CABINET ON THE UNDERCARRIAGE

X5

1 SOCKET 24 V DC

2 Red push button
Emergency stop"

The diesel engine stops and all brakes apply immediately, if this button is pressed. The Emergenzy stop"
button is lockable to avoid unauthorized use.

. NOTE !
Use only in emergencies − to reset, turn button to the right and release !

L284 −2.22−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.5.6. TOWER

2.5.6.1. LAYOUT OF THE TOWER

It is a seal welded framework construction of

1
torsionally rigid design. Lighted stairs at the
2 tower to the tower cabin with handrail, toe

boards, and landing with railing at cabin level.
The jib and and cylinder fulcrum is accessible
to maintenance through ascent platforms.
The tower is bolted to the superstructure. On
the backside of the tower the hoisting winch
is located. A slack rope prevention device is
mounted on the winch frame. The hoisting
ropes operate in single layers with three safety
windings when fully paid out.

1 Wind speed sensor

2 Hoisting rope sheaves
3
3 Access lights
4 Cabin
4 5 Jib pivot point
6 Luffing cylinder
7 Access stairway to tower / cabin
8 Forward tower hinge point
9 Backward tower hinge point
10 Hoisting winch

5 11 Hoisting winch motors

(on the backside)
6 12 Slack rope protection
12
11
10

12
11
10
7

9 8

−2.23− L284
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.5.6.2. OPERATOR’S CABIN ON THE TOWER

The tower cabin is installed laterally to the tower. Access is provided via stairs arranged at the tower. The
cab is equipped with all−round safety glazing. Front and roof screen are with adjustable colored sun−visor,
parts of the side windows are top−hinged. Ergonomic driver’s seat, screen wipers and washer and fan allow
the operator to work in all climatic enviroments.
The control desk with instruments as well as the hand−levers are ergonomically arranged. All crane motions
can be operated from this cabin. In addition, all other movements, i. e. travelling, steering, and outrigger
operation can be performed from this cabin.

2.5.7. JIB

The jib is made of lattice construction featuring four main chords and consisting of two sections (fulcrum
section, jib head). The top of the jib can be laid down on the ground. During luffing in/out the hook/load
moves virtually along a horizontal path. The jib is adjusted via a double acting hydraulic cylinder. With the
jib in maximum radius position the piston rod is nearly fully retracted, thus protected from the effects of clima

tic conditions and salt laden atmosphere.

Detail A
1

1 2 4 5

Detail A

1 Connections to the hinge sections on the tower

2 Luffing cylinder connection pin
3 Connection points for jib sections
4 Flood lights jib head
5 Cable reel for rotator
6 Jib rest support
7 Hoisting rope sheaves on the jib head 6

8 7

L284 −2.24−
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.5.8. CRANE MOTIONS

2.5.8.1. HOIST MOTION

The holding winch system consists of two variable displacement pumps (HA, HB), one variable displace

ment hydraulic motor (HU) and the necessary electric and hydraulic control equipment. The hydraulic motor
is flanged to the planetary gear of the twin rope drum. The spring loaded multi disc brakes, which are hydrau

lically released, are assembled between the planetary gearbox and each hydraulic motor. All bearings of
the winch gear are sealed against water.
The closing winch system consists of two variable displacement pumps (HA, HB), one variable displace

ment hydraulic motor (HW) and the necessary electric and hydraulic control equipment. The hydraulic mo

tor is flanged to the planetary gear of the twin rope drum. The spring loaded multi disc brakes, which are
hydraulically released, are assembled between the planetary gearbox and each hydraulic motor. All bear

ings of the winch gear are sealed against water.

2.5.8.2. LUFF MOTION

The luffing system consists of one variable displacement pump, the necessary electric and hydraulic con

trols and a hydraulic cylinder to move the jib. The jib motion is limited via angle sensors. When the jib is
displaced, the hook/load moves virtually along a horizontal path.

2.5.8.3. SLEW MOTION

The slewing system consists of one variable displacement pump, the slewing safety bypass block, all con

trols needed and two hydraulic motors, which drive a slewing pinion through a planetary gear each. Each
planetary gear is equipped with a multi disc brake.

2.5.8.4. TRAVEL MOTION

The travel gear consists of four variable displacement pumps (two for steering, two for driving), two driven
axles, four non−driven axles and the necessary hydraulic and electric control. The driven axles consist of
one hydraulic motor flanged on the planetary gear of the 3st and 8th for driving, two hydraulic motors for
steering and one hydraulic cylinder for axle set suspension. The non−driven axles consist of two hydraulic
motors for steering and one hydraulic cylinder for axle set suspension. The travelling speed and steering
is controlled by the joysticks if travelling is preselected. The travel motion is stopped by releasing the left
joystick to its neutral position.

−2.25− L284
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

L284 −2.26−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
INDEX

3. CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3

3.1. LAYOUT OF THE OPERATOR’S CABIN ON THE TOWER

(UPPER CABIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3

3.2. EXPLANATION OF THE CONTROL ELEMENTS ON THE

CONTROL STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4

3.2.1. JOY−STICK CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4

3.2.2. CONTROL PANEL I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
3.2.3. CONTROL PANEL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10

3.3. LITRONIC − LIEBHERR ELECTRONIC CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15

3.3.1. MAJOR COMPONENTS IN THE CABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15

3.3.2. THE LITRONIC IS "STARTING UP" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
3.3.3. THE CRANE OPERATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
3.3.4. CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
3.3.5. TRAVEL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
3.3.6. INFORMATION PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
3.3.7. ERROR INDICATION PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30
3.3.8. OPERATION HOUR COUNTER PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
3.3.9. SYNCHRONIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
3.3.10. DESCRIPTION OF LITRONIC LOAD LIMITING DEVICE (LML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36

3.4. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42

3.4.1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM IN THE UPPER CABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42

3.5. PA−SYSTEM / AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43

3.5.1. LAYOUT OF THE AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43

3.5.2. EXPLANATION OF THE CONTROLS AT THE FRONT PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43
3.5.3. CONNECTIONS AT THE REAR OF THE AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44
3.5.4. FUSE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44
3.5.5. OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44

3.6. TELEPHONE−SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45

3.7. USER’S GUIDE FOR OPERATOR’S SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46

−3.1− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS

L284 −3.2−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3. CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS

3.1. LAYOUT OF THE OPERATOR’S CABIN ON THE TOWER (UPPER CABIN)

18

5 6 7
19
20
21
22

23
2

3
9
8 10 11
4

13 14 15 16 17
12

1 Monitor for the camera on the jib 2 First−aid kit

3 BORNACK" emergency descent device 4 Fire extinguisher
5 Joy stick Luff / slew motion" 6 Swanneck microphone
7 Joy stick Hoist motion" 8 Folding seat for additional personnel
9 Operator’s seat 10 Radio recorder
Below: Cabin heater
11 Amplifier for PA−system 12 Entrance
13 Switch for cabin lighting 14 Cleaning device for windows
15 Control panel IV for air condition 16 Air condition
17 Water tank for windscreen washer 18 Monitor for LITRONIC control system
19 Clinometer 20 Control panel I
21 Control panel for camera jib head 22 Control panel II
23 Service panel for LITRONIC control system

−3.3− L284
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.2. EXPLANATION OF THE CONTROL ELEMENTS ON THE CONTROL STAND

3.2.1. JOY−STICK CONTROLS

The joy−sticks are spring centred and will automatically return to neutral position, when they are released.
Both movements can be carried out simultaneously. The speed of the motions can be controlled stepless
from zero to max. speed.

3.2.1.1. SPEED CHECK (e. g. jib motion)

−Move the control lever to min. position (just feel a click in the handle) and check the speed. The jib should
not move.
−Move the control lever slowly to its full extend and check the speed again. The speed increases now, just
before the full extend position of the lever, the jib must move with maximum speed.

3.2.1.2. JOY−STICK LUFF / SLEW MOTION" (LEFT SIDE)

1 Push button Turn cargo rotator anticlockwise"

top view: (optional)

2 Push button Turn cargo rotator clockwise"

2 b (optional)
1 3
3 Push button Horn"
6 4
4 I) At preselection Spreader operation":
d c ⇒ Balance of weight to white flipper" (optional)
5
5 I) At preselection Spreader operation":
⇒ Balance of weight to black flipper" (optional)
a
6 I) At preselection Spreader operation":
⇒ Spreader to lower when plungers are
pressed" (optional)

front view: 7 not used

8 I) At preselection Cargo rotator operation with−

7 out free−turn preselected":
8 ⇒ Cargo rotator free−turn (optional)
9 II) At preselection Cargo rotator operation with
free−turn preselected":
⇒ Cargo rotator free−turn blocked (optional)

9 Dead man" button

EXPLANATION OF THE DIRECTIONS:

−Direction
a":
F Jib lifting"
F At preselection Travelling": Travelling backward
−Direction
b":
F Jib lowering"
F At preselection Travelling": Travelling forward
−Direction
c": Slewing right
−Direction
d": Slewing left

L284 −3.4−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.2.1.3. JOY STICK HOIST MOTION" (RIGHT SIDE)

top view: 1 I) At preselection Four−rope grab operation"

⇒ Grab to lift while closing"
II) At preselection Spreader operation"
b 1 ⇒ Red flipper down" (optional)
6 2 2 I) At preselection Four−rope−grab operation":
5 ⇒ Stop function Grab to lower while closing"
3
II) At preselection Spreader operation"
d c ⇒ White flipper down" (optional)

4 3 I) At preselection Spreader operation"

⇒ All flippers up" (optional)
a
4 I) At preselection Spreader operation"
⇒ Green flipper down" (optional)

5 I) At preselection Spreader operation"

front view: ⇒ Black flipper down" (optional)

6 Push button Loudspeaker on" (only in tower cabin)

8 7 7 not used
9
8 not used

9 Dead man" button

EXPLANATION OF THE DIRECTIONS:

−Direction
a":
F Hoist motion lifting"
−Direction
b":
F Hoist motion lowering"
−Direction
c":
F At preselection Travelling": Steering right
F At preselection Four−rope−grab or motor grab": Grab to open
F At preselection Spreader": Twistlocks to open (optional)

−Direction
d":
F At preselection Travelling": Steering left
F At preselection Four−rope−grab or motor grab": Grab to close
F At preselection Spreader": Twistlocks to close (optional)

−3.5− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.2.2. CONTROL PANEL I

front window

dormer window

ALL CONTROL AND INDICATION ELEMENTS ARE EXPLAINED ON THE NEXT PAGES !

L284 −3.6−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS

−3.7− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
All push buttons are equipped with a LED that illuminates when the selection of
LED the corresponding unit or operation mode has been performed. Two LED are addi

tionally installed for illumination of the push button. The intensity is controlled by
a photo transistor.

Push button
Preselection outrigger arms left side"

Push button
Preselection outrigger arms right side"

Push button
Preselected outrigger arms to move in"

Push button
Preselected outrigger arms to move out"

Push button
Preselected outrigger support cylinders up"

Push button
Preselected outrigger support cylinders down"

Push button
Screen wiper interval operation"

Push button
Screen wiper continous operation"

Push button
Pump for screen wiper operation"

Push button
Slow speed slewing gear"

L284 −3.8−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
Push button
Print out last completed load cycle"

Push button
Print out actual opened load cycle"

Push button
Print out load cycles backwards"

Push button
Record start / stop datarecorder"

Push button
Pause record datarecorder"

Push button
Travelling lights undercarriage"

. NOTE !
For operating these lights travel operation has to be preselected.

−3.9− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.2.3. CONTROL PANEL II

ALL CONTROL AND INDICATION ELEMENTS ARE EXPLAINED ON THE NEXT PAGES !

L284 −3.10−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS

−3.11− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
Red push button
Emergency stop"

The diesel engine stops, all brakes apply immediately and the crane
control system is shut down, if this button is pressed.

. NOTE !
Use only in emergencies − to reset, turn button to the right and
release !

. IMPORTANT !
If using this button during operation with full load, the multiple disc
brakes of the hoist winch(es) must be inspected and checked for proper
function !
All push buttons are equipped with a LED that illuminates when the selection of
LED the corresponding unit or operation mode has been performed. Two LED are addi

tionally installed for illumination of the push button. The intensity is controlled by
a photo transistor.

Key switch
Ignition on"

Position 0: Ignition off
Position I: Ignition on; The crane control system is started up and the specific
cabin is preselected.
Push button
Start / stop diesel engine"
The LED illuminates if the speed of the diesel engine is over 1000 rpm.

. IMPORTANT !
Don’t stop the diesel engine, when running full speed, except in a dan

gerous situation.
Key switch
Preselection winches for service operation"
Position 0: Neutral popsition
Position I: Closing winch is working seperately
Position II: Holding winch is working seperately
Push button
Service operation"
Keep this push button pressed as long as holding or closing winch should be op

erated seperately. The LED illuminates if holding or closing winch is separately
preselected.

WARNING !
When operating the winches single with load hanging, watch move
ment of ropes during operation to avoid unbalanced load distribution
on the ropes !

. IMPORTANT !
As there are no limit switches working, acts the crane driver on his own
responsability. Slack rope will be indicated on the monitor but no auto

matic stop of the winch movement is executed!
Ropes must be watched by additional personal !
Preselection of one winch is only possible if any crane operation is pre

selected.

L284 −3.12−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS

Key switch
Preselection bypass slackrope"

Position 0: Slack rope protection is in operation
Position I: Slack rope protection is bypassed, if built−in push button is pressed

Push button
Bypass slackrope"

Keep this push button pressed as long as slackrope protection should be by

passed. The LED illuminates if key switch position I" is preselected.

. IMPORTANT !
Slack rope will be indicated on the monitor but no automatic stop of the
winch movement is executed! When bypassing, watch the ropes on the
winch(es) to avoid any damages !

Key switch
Preselection bypass LML (load moment limitation)"

Position 0: LML device is in operation
Position I: Lifting" cutout is bypassed (if overload occured), if built−in push
button is pressed

Push button
Bypass LML"

Keep this push button pressed as long as the LML device should be bypassed.
The LED illuminates if key switch position I" is preselected.

DANGER !
The bypass key switch shall only be operated in exceptional cases to
reduce the actual load or working radius if an overload situation hap
pened. ("Jib down" can’t be bypassed!).
Use of the overload limit bypass is upon the responsibility of the opera
tor!

Push button
Hook operation"

Push button
Synchronize"

Push button
Four−rope−grab operation"

−3.13− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
Push button
Travel operation"

WARNING !
Travel operation has to be supervised by additional personnel. Use
mirrors when travelling backwards to avoid any damages or injuries of
persons.

Push button
Side travel operation"

WARNING !
Travel operation has to be supervised by additional personnel. Use
mirrors when travelling backwards to avoid any damages or injuries of
persons.

Push button
Minimum / maximum engine speed"

for selection of engine speed between idle and nominal speed.

. NOTE !
Push this button before starting up crane operation.

Push button
Access lighting"

Push button
Flood light tower cabin"

Push button
Flood lights jib"

L284 −3.14−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3. LITRONIC − LIEBHERR ELECTRONIC CONTROL

The LITRONIC is used for: − Crane control and load moment limitation
− Status and fault indication
− Electric instrumentation
− Hydraulic instrumentation
− Diesel instrumentation

3.3.1. MAJOR COMPONENTS IN THE CABIN

7 8 9
1
4 5 6

1 2 3

0 . P

ENTER

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

5 4 6 7

1 ... Alphanumeric keys

2 ... Program keys
3 ... The "ENTER" − key (confirmation of functions)
4 ... Function keys
5 ... The screen
6 ... Red LED (not used)
7 ... Green LED (indicates that the +24VDC supply voltage for the monitor is ok)

3.3.2. THE LITRONIC IS "STARTING UP"

When the crane control system is switched on (ignition on), the screen in the operator’s cabin is started up
and the electronic control does several system checks. If everything is alright, the crane operation picture
is coming up.

. IMPORTANT !
If the crane control system is not started up correctly (no functions available), make a master reset
by switching off the ignition and switching it on after approximately 5 seconds again.

−3.15− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3.3. THE CRANE OPERATION MODE

Layout of the crane operation mode (without any crane operation preselected):

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 4

1 Status line

indicates actual preselected crane operation and limits of motions.

2 Actual crane indications

3 Function keys layout

4 Function keys

L284 −3.16−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS

"Crane operation picture with function keys layout changed"

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

Function
Hook position reset"

This function is used to set the indication of the relative hook position of the hoist

ing winch to zero. Press the function key (F3) below the symbol to execute this
function.

Function
Hook taring"

This function is used to set the indication of the actual load on the ropes to zero.
Press the function key below (F4) to execute this function

Function
Synchronisation"
This function is used to change to the synchronisation page. Press the function
key (F5) below the symbol to execute this function.

−3.17− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3.4. CRANE OPERATION

The crane operation modes differ in the status line only. Therefore just the status lines are explained for the
other crane operation modes (except hook operation).

3.3.4.1. LAYOUT OF THE CRANE OPERATION PICTURE PAGE 1 (E. G. HOOK OPERATION)

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

Explanation of monitor symbols:

a) a) Indication of
Actual jib angle"

c) b) Indication of
Tare load on the ropes"

c) Indication of
Maximum permissible load on the ropes"

d) b)
e)
g) d) Indication of
Utilization"

f) e) Indication of
Actual load on the ropes"

h) f) Indication of
Actual hook radius"

g) Indication of
Direction of jib movement"

h) Indication of
Relative hook position"

L284 −3.18−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS

a) Indication of "Actual jib angle",

shows the actual jib angle in degrees.
b) Indication of "Tare load on the ropes",
shows the tare load on the ropes.

c) Indication of "Maximum permissible load on the ropes",

shows the maximum allowed load on the ropes according to the actual radius and selected operation
mode.

d) Indication of "Utilization",
shows the actual load of the crane according to the max. allowed load in percent.
ACTUAL LOAD (tonnes)
−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−− x 100% = utilization
MAX. ALLOWED LOAD (tonnes)

e) Indication of "Actual load on the ropes",

shows the actual load on the ropes. When the SWITCH OFF VALUE is exceeded (110 % of max. allowed
load), the buzzer and the horn sounds, the "STOP" − symbol flashes, the movements "hoisting up" and
"jib lowering" are blocked.

f) Indication of "Actual hook radius",

shows the actual hook radius in meters.

g) Indication of "Direction of jib movement",

shows the actual direction of the jib movement.

h) Indication of "Relative hook position",

shows the relative position of the hoist winch in meters.

Indication of
winch hoisting"

The arrow in the symbol flashes, if the winch moves in direction hoisting.

Indication of
winch standstill"

If the winch does not move, no arrow is indicated.

Indication of
winch lowering"

The arrow in the symbol flashes, if the winch moves in direction lowering.

−3.19− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
Indication of "Overload prewarning".
This symbol flashes and the buzzer sounds, when the utilization of the crane is
97,5 % or higher. If the utilization decrases below 97,5 % the indication is reset au

tomatically.

Indication of "Overload"
This symbol flashes and the buzzer and the horn sounds, if the utilization of the
crane is 110 % or higher. The motions "jib lowering" and "hoist up" are inhibited.
If the utilization decrases below 110 % the indication is reset automatically.

DANGER !
The bypass key switch shall only be operated in exceptional cases to
reduce the actual load or working radius if an overload situation hap
pened. ("Jib down" can’t be bypassed!).
Use of the overload limit bypass is upon the responsibility of the opera
tor!

Indication of "Tipping curve".

This symbol shows the actual used load capacity. The adjustment is indicated
in %

Indication of "Actual wind speed",

shows the actual wind speed in knots. At the max. wind speed of 39 kn the indica

tion flashes and the buzzer sounds after a delay of 10 sec. The optic alarm will be
stored until the wind speed drops below 11 kn for more than 30 seconds.

DANGER !
At an actual wind speed of more than 39 kn crane operation must be
stopped!
At actual wind speed of more than 81 kn the jib top must be rested on
the ground and crane operation must be stopped!

Indication of
Engine speed",

shows the actual speed run by the diesel engine. At a max. speed of 2200 r.p.m
the indicating bar is flashing. Three call signs are shown and the buzzer sounds!
The diesel engine shuts down automatically after all movements have stopped.

. IMPORTANT !
Check for reason of engine overspeed!

Indication of
Fuel tank content",

shows the actual fuel tank content by an indicating bar. When the content is below
5 %, the bar and the call sign flashes.

. NOTE !
Refill the fuel tank!

L284 −3.20−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
Indication of "Engine cool water temperature",
shows the actual cool water temperature of the diesel engine. At excess tempera

ture the indicating bar starts flashing, a message is displayed on the error page
and the buzzer sounds.

. IMPORTANT !
Rest load on the ground, stop engine immediately and check for
reason !

Indication of "Position superstructure and slewing speed",

shows the position between the superstructure and the undercarriage in degrees.
0° is indicated when looking forward and the position of the superstructure is par

allel to the undercarriage. The indication for the slewing angle is flashing, if the
slewing platform is not exactly parallel to the undercarriage (0°±1°) or approximity
switch front does not correspond with slewing angle 0°. The digit between the ar

rows indicates the current slewing speed.

Indication "Pressure loss in propping cylinder",

flashes, if one of the propping cylinders is released. If no operation mode is prese

lected only luffing in and hook lowering is possible. Crane operation is possible
without limitation if an operation mode is preselected. Preselection of an opera

tion mode is blocked if more than one propping cylinder is released and no opera

tion mode is preselected. Check if the crane is supported completely on all prop

ping plates.

Indication "Slackrope",
flashes, if slackrope on the hoisting wire occurs.
Slackrope is sensed by:
− LML−system
− approximity switch 4H−S12 / 4Z−S12 at the winch
The number inside the symbol indicates the corresponding winch:
1: slackrope on holding winch
2: slackrope on closing winch (at two winch system only)
1+2: slackrope on holding and closing winch
no number indicated:
Slackrope is sensed by the LML−system

Indication "Winches not synchron",

flashes, if the holding and closing winch are not synchron.

Indication "Hook in upper limit".

This symbol indicates, if
− the top limit switch or
− the limit switch of the cable reel jib head or
− the gear cam limit switch on the winch has tripped or
− overload crane or
− error Twistlock" during spreader operation occurs or
− max. pressure at holding or closing winch is exceeded.
The movement stops automatically. Only the opposite movement can be carried
out.

−3.21− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
Indication "Hook in lower limit"
This symbol indicates, if
− the limit switch of the cable reel jib head or
− the gear cam limit switch on the winch has tripped or
− spreader in position" or
− slackrope is sensed by the LML−system or
− slackrope is sensed by the approximity switch(es) at the winch(es)
The movement stops automatically. Only the opposite movement can be carried
out.

Indication "Hook in upper / lower limit"

This symbol indicates, if
− the electric cable for load lifting device is plugged in and cable reel jib head is
not preselected.
The movement stops automatically.

Indication "Jib in upper limit".

This symbol indicates, if
− the luffing system reaches its max. position or
− the limit switch of the cable reel jib head has tripped.
The movement stops automatically. Only the opposite movement can be carried
out.

Indication "Jib in lower limit"

This symbol indicates, if
− the luffing system reaches its max. position or
− overload crane occurs or
− the limit switch of the cable reel jib head or
− the gear cam limit switch on the winch has tripped or
− if the jib head touches the ground in jib down operation mode.
The movement stops automatically. Only the opposite movement can be carried
out.

Indication "Jib in upper / lower limit".

This symbol indicates, if
− the electric cable for load lifting device is plugged in and cable reel jib head is
not preselected.
The movement stops automatically.

F
Hook operation normal duty"

Indication of
hook operation".

This symbol indicates whenever "hook operation" is selected by the push button
on panel II in the cabin.

L284 −3.22−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
F
Four rope grab operation"

Indication of "four rope grab operation".

This symbol indicates whenever "four rope grab operation" is selected by push
button on panel II in the cabin.

This symbol is flashing during "closing" the grab. The symbol stops flashing and
changes to a steady indication if the grab is in closed position.

This symbol indicates "Bulky goods" if the push button "Receipt for bulky goods"
on the left hand joystick is pressed.

This symbol is flashing during "opening" the grab. The symbol stops flashing and
changes to a steady indication if the grab is in opened position.

F
Jib down operation"

Indication of "jib down" operation.

This symbol indicates whenever "jib down" operation is selected by the push but

ton on panel II in the cabin.

−3.23− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3.5. TRAVEL OPERATION

3.3.5.1. LAYOUT OF THE TRAVEL OPERATION PICTURE PAGE 1

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

Explanation of monitor symbols:

Indication of "travel operation".

This symbol indicates whenever "travel operation" is selected by the push button
on panel II in the cabin.

Indication of "side travel operation" (appears instead
travel operation").

This symbol indicates whenever "side travel operation" is selected by the push
button on panel II in the cabin.

Indication of "load limit for travelling".

This indication bar shows the optimal jib position comparing to the load on the
hook.
For travelling with restricted load the bar should be positioned in the middle of the
indications value (1) and value (2).

I II I

I admissible area of travelling window

II prefered area of travelling window
III at this position the crane is in the optimal point of the
travelling window
(1) III (2)

L284 −3.24−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
Indication "Left outrigger arm driven out".
This symbol indicates whenever the left outrigger arm is driven out.
The symbol is flashing as long as the outrigger arm is moving.

Indication "Second strut basis" (optional).

This symbol indicates whenever the left front outrigger arm is driven out to the sec

ond strut basis. The symbol is flashing as long as the outrigger arm is moving.

Indication "Second strut basis" (optional).

This symbol indicates whenever the left rear outrigger arm is driven out to the sec

ond strut basis. The symbol is flashing as long as the outrigger arm is moving.

Indication "Left outrigger arm driven in"(appears instead of
Left outrigger

arm driven out").
This symbol indicates whenever the left outrigger arm is driven in. The symbol is
flashing as long as the outrigger arm is moving.

WARNING !
Before crane operation is started the correct position of all outriggers must
be checked by the responsible person! They must be fully driven out.

Indication "Right outrigger arm driven out".

This symbol indicates whenever the right outrigger arm is driven out.
The symbol is flashing as long as the outrigger arm is moving.

Indication "Second strut basis" (optional).

This symbol indicates whenever the right front outrigger arm is driven out to the
second strut basis. The symbol is flashing as long as the outrigger arm is moving.

Indication "Second strut basis" (optional).

This symbol indicates whenever the right rear outrigger arm is driven out to the
second strut basis. The symbol is flashing as long as the outrigger arm is moving.

Indication "Right outrigger arm driven in" (appears instead of
Right outrigger
arm driven out").
This symbol indicates whenever the right outrigger arm is driven in. The symbol
is flashing as long as the outrigger arm is moving.

WARNING !
Before crane operation is started the correct position of all outriggers must
be checked by the responsible person! They must be fully driven out.

Indication of "steering direction"

The arrow in the symbol indicates in which direction the crane is moving during
side travel operation when the control lever is moved in direction travelling for

ward. The symbol is flashing if the axle set is in its slewing limit.

Indication
Wheels parallel to undercarriage at preselection travel or side

travel operation"
The symbol illuminates if the wheels are parallel to the undercarriage at preselec

tion travel" or side travel" operation. The symbol flashes if the wheels are not par

allel. Travel" and side travel" operation will be blocked. For synchronisation of
the wheels refer to description Travel operation".

−3.25− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3.5.2. LAYOUT OF THE TRAVEL OPERATION PICTURE PAGE 2

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

Explanation of monitor symbols:

Indication of "wheel−set" position."

1
This symbol shows the wheel−set deviation (1) from the actual wheel position to
2 the calculated position flashes, if the deviation gets greater max. position and trav

elling operation stops.
The actual axle no. (2) is shown as well.

DANGER !
Stop crane operation and support crane until fault has been investigated!

L284 −3.26−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3.6. INFORMATION PAGE

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

Indication of "Luboil pressure",

shows the actual luboil pressure of the diesel engine. At a luboil pressure loss the
indicating bar is flashing and the buzzer sounds.

Indication of "Air−pressure of turbo−charger",

shows the actual air pressure of the turbo−charger during operation of the diesel
engine.

−3.27− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS

Indication of "Generator values",

shows the actual values for
generator voltage
generator current
generator frequency
At a deviation of +/− 5 Hz for more than two seconds or +/− 10 Hz for more than
one second, the generator is shut down and the indications are flashing and the
buzzer sounds.

Indication of "Hydraulic oil tank content",

shows the level of the hydraulic oil tank from shut−down level to maximum level
by an indicating bar.

Indication of "Pressure holding winch system / travelling system",

shows the actual pressure in the holding winch system / travelling system

Indication of "Pressure slewing left",

shows the actual pressure in the slewing system when slewing left.

Indication of "Pressure slewing right",

shows the actual pressure in the slewing system when slewing right

Indication of "Pressure luffing gear",

shows the actual pressure in the luffing system.

Indication of "Battery voltage",

shows the actual value of the battery / control voltage. The indication starts to flash
if the battery voltage drops below 11V.

L284 −3.28−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
Indication of "Actual hydr. oil temperature",
shows the actual temperature of the hydr. oil in °C. At a temperature of 85 °C the
indication flashes and the buzzer sounds.

. IMPORTANT !
Rest load on the ground. Stop the crane operation and check for reason
of overtemperature !

Indication of "Environment temperature" .

This symbol indicates the temperature outside the crane. If the temperature is
colder than °, th eengine can not be started and the buzzer will sound.

−3.29− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3.7. ERROR INDICATION PAGE

Error indication at monitor

If an error at one of the analog sensors or transmitter occurs, the symbol of the error indication page starts
to flash.
The buzzer can only be receipted if the operator selects the error indication page on the monitor, on which
the trouble of the specific sensor or transmitter is shown.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

L284 −3.30−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS

Explanation of monitor symbols

Function "Previous fault"

This function is used to skip to the previous indicated fault.

Function "Next fault"

This function is used to skip to the next indicated fault.

Function "Previous page"

This function is used to change to the previous page.
The symbol is flashing if an unconfirmed error is indicated on the page before.

Function "Next page"

This function is used to change to the next page.
The symbol is flashing if an unconfirmed error is indicated on the next page.

Function "Fault confirmation"

This function is used to confirm a fault indication and to silence the buzzer after
a fault has been indicated

. NOTE !
This function doesn’t clear a fault !

−3.31− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3.8. OPERATION HOUR COUNTER PAGE

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

Explanation of monitor symbols:

1 2

1 this symbol is flashing if the counter is active

2 indication of operation hours

Operation hours counter of diesel engine

Operation hours counter of holding winch normal duty

Operation hours counter of closing winch normal duty

L284 −3.32−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
Operation hours counter of luffing gear

Operation hours counter of slewing gear

Operation hours counter of travelling gear

−3.33− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3.9. SYNCHRONIZATION

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

Explanation of monitor symbols:

Indication of rope difference holding rope / closing rope.

This symbol indicates the rope difference between holding winch and closing
winch in meters.
This value can be reset by pressing function key F5.

. IMPORTANT !
Use function key F5 only after assembling or changing the ropes !

Indication of rope difference "hook operation".

This symbol indicates the rope difference between holding winch and closing
winch at hook synchron position.
This value can be set by pressing function key F6.

L284 −3.34−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
Indication of rope difference "grab open".
This symbol indicates the rope difference between holding winch and closing
winch at open grab position (in metres).
This value can be set by pressing function key F7.

Indication of rope difference "grab closed".

This symbol indicates the rope difference between holding winch and closing
winch at closed grab position (in metres).
This value can be set by pressing function key F8.

Indication of "lifting / lowering speed
during closing the grab.

This symbol indicates the lifting / lowering speed of the holding winch during clos

ing movement of the grab (in percent).
This value can be set by pressing function key F4.

Indication of "Actual load on the ropes",

This symbol indicates the actual load at the holding and closing winch. If the grab
is in closed position, the indicated values are equal.

Function key "Speed selection".

The lifting / lowering speed can be set by pressing the function key F4.
The indication starts from 10% to 50% in steps to 10%.
The set value is stored even if the crane is shut down.

Function key "reset".

Function keys F5 to F8 are used to reset the difference values shown above the
corresponding function key.

−3.35− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3.10. DESCRIPTION OF LITRONIC LOAD LIMITING DEVICE (LML)

The DECENTRAL ELECTRONIC CONTROLLING SYSTEM OF LIEBHERR−WERK NENZING is a multipro

cessor controller which has been developed and manufactured by LIEBHERR. The LITRONIC control with
integrated LOAD MOMENT LIMITING DEVICE is designed to withstand temperature extremes and the many
heavy−duty operation tasks for which this crane has been designed for. The complete machine operating
data are displayed on a high resolution monitor screen.

3.3.10.1. LOCATION OF COMPONENTS 2

control panel II (upper cabin)
upper cabin

1 3
force transmitter
(actual load)

4
angle transmitter
(working radius)
7
CPU
slewing−
platform

control panel II
(lower cabin)
5

1 monitor 2 control panel II

6 3 force transmitter 4 angle sensor radius

lower cabin 5 control panel II 6 monitor

7 CPU in X1

L284 −3.36−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3.10.2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF LML−SYSTEM

The LOAD MOMENT LIMITING DEVICE (LML) is an integrated system of the LITRONIC. It comprises the
following main parts

− force transmitter (to measure the actual load on the ropes)

− angle transmitter (to measure the actual angle / position of the jib)
− function keys (to learn the preselected operation mode by the crane operator)
− Central Processing Unit (CPU) to calculate the load moment, storage of fixed crane parameters.
− display units (screen monitor in the upper− and lower cabin)

The LML measures the actual load (forces acting to the ropes) and actual radius (centre line of the hook
or auxiliary equipment operated) and indicates to the operator safe or hazardous conditions and prevents
overload to some main components (i.e. slewing bearing, slewing gear boxes, hoisting winches, etc.).

The force transmitter provides an electrical signal which is proportional to the developed forces in the hoist

ing ropes and moment systems of the crane. The angle transmitter provides the actual jib angle information
which is then used for calculating the actual operating radius.

During operation of the crane (hook−, grab−, spreader− or magnet operation) the actual load lifted by
the crane and the developed load moments are now automatically compared with the corresponding crane
datas − related to the maximum permitted crane loads (load diagram). The maximum load to be picked up
(at a certain radius), the actual load on the hook together with the current utilization (load moment) to the
crane are displayed on the screen monitors. If the utilization (displayed as percentage) should exceed a
preset value − a visual and audible alarm is released, i.e.

− at 97,5% utilization PREWARNING"

− at 110% utilization OVERLOAD"

Additional safety functions are activated − The LML interfaces with the crane and prohibits some crane
functions under dangerous conditions, i.e.

− Hoisting motion is stopped

− Jib lowering is stopped.

SET−UP OPERATION: During the first function tests at the manufacturers side (LWN teststand)
certified test−weights are operated. In order to learn the CPU the
required crane parameters and to calibrate the complete LML−system a
portable computer is connected to the LITRONIC.

ALARMS: The visual and audible alarms warn the operator of approaching danger.
The symbol
PREWARNING" will flash when the load on the hook reaches
the preset warning limit and the buzzer in the cabin sounds. During Normal
duty operation" the symbol PREWARNING" will flash. The indication is reset
automatically if the utilization decrases below the warning limit.

The symbol
OVERLOAD" will flash when the load on the hook is beyond 110%
of the SWL (Safe Working Load) and the buzzer sounds. Additionally the horn
outside the crane sounds. In this case the additional safety functions come into
operation too.
Both alarms are on, as long as the hazardous conditions are given. In any case
the alarms have to be acknowledged. During Normal duty operation" the
symbol OVERLOAD" will flash, the additional safety functions are activated
and the buzzer in the cabin sounds once. The indication is reset automatically
if the utilization decrases below the warning limit.

. IMPORTANT !
ALWAYS KNOW THE LOAD TO BE LIFTED AND WATCH THE INDICATIONS ON THE SCREEN.
BE AWARE − THE LOAD MOMENT LIMITING DEVICE (LML) IS NOT A WEIGHING SYSTEM !
IF AN OVERLOAD ALARM IS GIVEN, AVOID SUDDEN MOVEMENTS, DECREASE THE
WORKING RADIUS OR LOWER THE LOAD GENTLY TO GROUND IMMEDIATELY !
BE AWARE − THE OPERATOR IS ALWAYS RESPONSIBLE FOR HIS ACTIONS !

−3.37− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS

KEY SWITCH: For safety reasons during operation of the crane and to allow an easy
set−up of the LML−system to perform an overload test or during the first
function tests at the manufacturers side (LWN teststand) certified test−
weights are operated and in order to learn the CPU the required crane
parameters and to calibrate the complete LML−system a portable computer
is connected to the LITRONIC.

CONTROL PANEL II

Key switch
Preselection bypass LML (load moment limitation)"

Position 0: LML device is in operation
Position I: Lifting" cutout is bypassed (if overload occured),
as long as the push button is pressed

Push button
Bypass LML"

Keep this push button pressed as long as the LML device should be
bypassed. The LED illuminates if key switch position I" is preselec

ted.

DANGER !
The bypass key switch shall only be operated in exceptional cases to
reduce the actual load or working radius if an overload situation hap
pened. ("Jib down" can’t be bypassed!).
Use of the overload limit bypass is upon the responsibility of the opera
tor!

OVERLOAD TEST: Please be aware that an overload test requires an individual set−up to the
complete crane system (i.e. adjustment to limit switches, hydraulic
safety system, LML, etc.). For safety reasons we must advice, that such
adjustments / calibrations may only be performed by trained and authorized
LIEBHERR SERVICE PERSONNEL.

ATTENTION !
IF NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE REQUIRED SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND
ADJUSTMENT / CALIBRATION PROCEDURES − CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL LIEBHERR CUSTOMER SERVICE AND ASK FOR ASSISTANCE
AND / OR ADVICE !

For further information see also PART 3 of the INSTRUCTION / MAINTENANCE MANUAL, i.e. description
of all CONTROL ELEMENTS and LIEBHERR ELECTRONIC CONTROL.

L284 −3.38−
 MONITOR, CAN−BUS
CONTROL ELEMENTS

P feed
BRAKE
TTY−RS232 I/O
CPU DIESEL ENGINE WINCH
MODULES

GEARBOX
A4VG A6VM

GEAR BOX MONITORING HYDRAULIC

I start − I max for hoisting / lowering

START SIGNAL
DIRECTION SIGNAL n

SPEED SIGNAL
F
SERVO UNIT
I

JOY STICK HOISTING

−3.39−
HYDR. MONITORING (Content,
Filter, P feed, Pmax, , θ, etc.)
I SWL
P

HOISTING

LOWERING

a ACTUAL RADIUS ACTUAL LOAD SIGNAL

I INCREMENTAL SIGNALS A, B
3.3.10.3. FUNCTION DIAGRAM − BASIC PRINCIPLE CRANE CONTROL HOISTING WINCH"

LIMIT SWITCHES, WINCH MONITORING

BRAKE RELEASE SIGNAL

L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3.10.4. LML INFORMATION ON DISPLAY DURING CRANE OPERATION
To ensure clarity of the information on the display, different levels of data are shown in enlarged symbols
and lettering on the screen. Control and monitoring are also handled by the LITRONIC. Error indications
are automatically displayed on the monitor (optical alarm) and a buzzer starts to sound (acustic alarm).

1 2 3 4 5 6

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

1 Symbol
HOOK OPERATION" preselected

2 Symbol PREWARNING (reached 97,5% of utilization) or symbol OVERLOAD (110% utilization)
3 Analog indication of actual UTILIZATION ( 0 − 110 % ) of the crane
4 ACTUAL JIB ANGLE ( ° ... degree ) is displayed in digital figures.
5 MAXIMUM LOAD ( lbs ... pounds ) to be picked up at a certain radius is displayed in digital figures.
6 TARE LOAD ( lbs ... pounds ) on the hook is displayed in digital figures
7 ACTUAL LOAD ( lbs ... pounds ) on the hook is displayed in digital figures
8 ACTUAL WORKING RADIUS ( m ... meters ) is displayed in digital figures.

. IMPORTANT !
ALWAYS KNOW THE LOAD TO BE LIFTED AND WATCH THE INDICA

TIONS ON THE SCREEN. BE AWARE THE LML IS NOT A WEIGHING
SYSTEM !
Indication of "overload PREWARNING".
This symbol flashes and the buzzer sounds, when the utilization of the crane is
97,5 % or higher. If the utilization decrases below 97,5 % the indication is reset
automatically.

Indication of "OVERLOAD" (appears instead of the prewarning symbol).

This symbol flashes and the buzzer sounds, if the utilization of the crane is 110 %
or higher. The motions "jib lowering" and "hoist up" are inhibited. If the utilization
decrases below 110 % the indication is reset automatically.

L284 −3.40−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.3.10.5. LML INFORMATION ON DISPLAY DURING TRAVEL OPERATION

To ensure clarity of the information on the display, different levels of data are shown in enlarged symbols
and lettering on the screen. Control and monitoring are also handled by the LITRONIC. Error indications
are automatically displayed on the monitor (optical alarm) and a buzzer starts to sound (acustic alarm).

1 2 3 4 5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

7
1 Symbol
TRAVEL OPERATION" preselected.
2 Symbol PREWARNING or symbol OVERLOAD
3 ACTUAL JIB ANGLE ( ° ... degree ) is displayed in digital figures.
4 MAXIMUM LOAD ( lbs ...pounds ) to be picked up is displayed in digital figures.
5 ACTUAL LOAD ( lbs ... pounds ) on the hook is displayed in digital figures
6 ACTUAL RADIUS ( ft ... feet ) is displayed in digital figures.
7 Analog indication bar LOAD LIMIT FOR TRAVELLING (change of radius see pos 6)

. IMPORTANT !
PRIOR STARTING TRAVELLING WITH RESTZRICTED LOAD SET THE
JIB TO OPTIMIZED RADIUS. THE ANALOG INDICATION BAR SHOULD
BE IN THE CENTRE (POS 7) !
Indication of "LOAD LIMIT FOR TRAVELLING".
This analog indication bar shows the optimized jib position, considering
the actual load carrying on the hook.
(1) (2)
For travelling with restricted load the indication bar should be positioned
in the middle of the indications value (1) and value (2).
Indication of "overload PREWARNING" − flashes if during travel
operation an error occurs, which would disable the preselection of travel
operation.
Indication of
OVERLOAD" − flashes as long as the conditions for
preselection for travel operation are not fulfilled.

−3.41− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.4. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

3.4.1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM IN THE UPPER CABIN

1 3

Explanation of control panel IV:

1 Switch "fan / heating"

Switch in pos. "0": off

Switch in pos. "I": fan operation only
Switch in pos. "II": fan and heating I operation ("low heating")
Switch in pos. "III": fan and heating I + II operation ("high heating")

2 Pilot light "fan or heating in operation"

illuminates, if the fan or the heating is switched on.

3 Thermostat "cabin temperature"

For adjusting of the required cabin room temperature.

4 Pilot light "trouble heating system"

illuminates, if: − one of the safety thermostats in the heatings tripped
− the circuit breaker for the fan tripped
− a circuit breaker for the heatings tripped

. NOTE !
The circuit breakers, safety thermostats and heating controls are located in the side wall under
CONTROL PANEL IV.

L284 −3.42−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.5. PA−SYSTEM / AMPLIFIER

. IMPORTANT !

F Make sure that no objects or liquids get into the amplifier, as this may lead to malfunctions.
F If the amplifier should be overheated due to prolonged exposure to sunlight, let it cool before
using it.
F If the unit should emit any strange odours or smoke, switch it off immediately.
F To prevent stress on the final power stages, do not allow the amplifier to work in disortion for long
periods of time.
F Clean the front panel using a soft, dry cloth. Never use solvents, petrol or other chemical sub

stances that could ruin the surface finish.

3.5.1. LAYOUT OF THE AMPLIFIER

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 On / Off switch with inserted LED 2 XLR input for microphones

3 DIN input for microphones 4 Volume control for microphone inputs
5 Volume control for auxiliary inputs 6 Tone control
7 ATT." switch 8 MONO" switch
9 Stereo inputs for auxiliary source

3.5.2. EXPLANATION OF THE CONTROLS AT THE FRONT PLATE

1 On / Off switch with inserted LED

For switching on the unit, indicated by the LED on the key. Before switching the amplifier on, make sure that
the volume controls (4) and (5) are set to the minimum (knob turned all the way anti−clockwise).
2 XLR input for microphones
Like the DIN microphone input, this input enables the connection of dynamic microphones with balanced
or unbalanced output. When this input is used at the same time as the DIN input, the signals related to the
two microphones are transmitted
3 DIN input for microphones
Enables the connection of dynamic microphones with balanced or unbalanced microphones. When this
input is used at the same time as the XLR input, the signals related to the two microphones are transmitted
in mixed mode. Special terminals of the socket make it possible to manually control music attenuation (see
description ATT. switch") and to supply a LED for indicating that the microphone is on.
4 Volume control for microphone inputs
This knob adjusts the volume of the microphones connected to the
MIC" inputs (DIN and XLR). The volume
is increased by turning the knob clockwise.

−3.43− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
5 Volume control for auxiliary inputs
This knob adjusts the volume of the microphones connected to the
AUX IN" input. The volume is increased
by turning the knob clockwise.

6 Tone control
This knob adjusts the response to the low frequencies, which are emphasized or attenuated when the knob
is turned clockwise or anti−clockwise, respectively. With the knob in the middle position, the frequency is
not modified.

7
ATT." switch
When lowered, this switch activates the circuit for attenuating the auxiliary source. This function makes it
possible to give priority to microphone announcements, which are otherwise transmitted together with the
auxiliary source.

8
MONO" switch
In the lowered position, this switch provides monophonic playing of the auxiliary sources.

9 Stereo inputs for auxiliary sources

The DIN socket enables the connection of two stereo sources with signal output at 0 dB (car radio, CD−play

er, etc.). When the two inputs are driven simultaneously, the signals from the two sources are transmitted
in the mixed mode.

3.5.3. CONNECTIONS AT THE REAR OF THE AMPLIFIER

− power input": supply of the amplifier 12 / 24 V DC

− power output": supply for additional unit 12 V DC
− siren control": connection for siren control (not used)
− spk right": loudspeaker right side
− spk left": loudspeaker left side

3.5.4. FUSE REPLACEMENT

A fuse that is tripped when the amplifier absorbs excessive current is located on the RED (positive) conduc

tor of the
power input" cable. If the fuse blows, check the connection of the supply conductors and replace
the fuse with one of the same type and capacity as shown on the cable. If the fuse is tripped again, the
unit proably has a fault.

. IMPORTANT !
Using fuses of higher capacity than that indicated can cause serious damage.

3.5.5. OPERATION

Before using for the first time, set volume controls Pos. 4
and 5 to their minimum positions. Switch on power supply,
verifying that the inserted LED Pos. 1 works. Press the but
6
ton 6 on the right joy−stick to activate the microphone. The
speaker is recommended to speak close to the micro

phone in order to avoid amplification of background noise,
and to adjust the volume to avoid feedback.

L284 −3.44−
 CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.6. TELEPHONE−SYSTEM

. IMPORTANT !
F Avoid prolonged exposure of components to sunlight or excessive temperature.
F Keep components from rain and splash away.

Layout of the telephone system

Headphone in the tower cabin Portable telephone

6
1
7
2

3 8

1 Headphones 5 Receiver
2 Dynamic microphone 6 Call push button
3 Preselection switch 7 Talk push button
4 Control box 8 Plug
Operation:
First call other party by setting preselection First call other party by pressing the call push but

switch (3) to call" position. Afterwards set the ton. Afterwards press the talk push button to have
preselection switch (3) to talk" position to have conversation with the other party as long as requi

conversation with the other party. When finished, red.
switch control box off to receive call signals from
the other party.

Location of telephone sockets:

− in the switch cabinet room − at the switch cabinet on the undercarriage
− in the engine room − at the winches
− in the lower cabin − at the tower
− in the upper cabin − at the jib

−3.45− L284
CONTROL AND OPERATION ELEMENTS
3.7. USER’S GUIDE FOR OPERATOR’S SEAT

. IMPORTANT !

F Each driver should read the user’s guide before driving first.
F For security reasons adjust the seat only when vehicle doesn’t move.
F The seat should only be mounted or repaired by trained workers. Alterations can lead to lapse
of operation−permission.
F The seat is maintenance free. Check fixations twice a year.
F For use of seatbelts pay attention to applicable laws.

2
3

4 1

1 Horizontal adjustment

Lift the lever and move the seat.

2 Height and inclination adjustment

By lifting up the lever the front part of the seat can be moved up and down. By pressing down the
lever the rear part of the seat can be moved up and down.

3 Backrest adjustment

Lift the lever and move the backrest by pressing your body against it.

4 Weight adjustment

Turn the wheel clockwise for a higher weight. Turn the wheel anti−clockwise for a lower weight. The
number shown in the red window should be similiar to the user’s weight in kilograms.

5 Armrests

The inclination can be adjusted by turning the yellow wheel.

L284 −3.46−
 CRANE OPERATION

INDEX

4. CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3

4.1. DANGEROUS AREA AND SPECIAL SAFETY REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . 4.3

4.1.1. DANGEROUS AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3

4.1.2. SPECIAL SAFETY REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4

4.2. PREPARATIONS FOR CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6

4.2.1. STARTING UP FOR CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6

4.2.2. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO BE OBSERVED BEFORE THE ACTUAL
CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
4.2.3. STOPPING CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
4.2.4. START / STOP DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
4.2.5. WARM UP PROCEDURES BEFORE CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
4.2.6. MANUAL JACK UP OF THE CRANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
4.2.7. OPERATION OF SELECTOR SWITCH AUX. SUPPLY / GENERATOR SUPPLY" . . . . . 4.16

4.3. CRANE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18

4.3.1. HOOK OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18

4.3.2. CHANGING FROM FOUR−ROPE−GRAB TO HOOK TRAVERSE (ROTATOR) . . . . . . 4.20
4.3.3. CHANGING FROM HOOK TRAVERSE (ROTATOR) TO FOUR−ROPE−GRAB . . . . . . 4.21
4.3.4. FOUR−ROPE−GRAB OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24
4.3.5. JIB DOWN / RAISING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26

4.4. DATA RECORDER SYSTEM − SECTOR TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28

4.4.1. THE DATA RECORDER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28

4.4.2. OPERATION OF THE DATA RECORDER: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29
4.4.3. EXAMPLE FOR A VALID LOAD CYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.34

4.5. TRAVEL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.35

4.5.1. NORMAL TRAVEL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.35

4.5.2. SIDE TRAVEL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.38

4.6. STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.39

4.6.1. SYNCHRONIZATION OF STEERING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.39

4.6.2. EXAMPLES FOR STEERING PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.41

−4.1− L284
CRANE OPERATION

L284 −4.2−
 CRANE OPERATION

4. CRANE OPERATION

4.1. DANGEROUS AREA AND SPECIAL SAFETY REGULATIONS

4.1.1. DANGEROUS AREA

6,0 m (20 ft)

Ι
32,0 m (105 ft)

ΙΙ

ΙΙΙ 42,0 m (138 ft)

... warning plates

DANGER ! CRANE AT WORK !

No unauthorized ascent!
Authorized personnel must inform
crane driver of intended ascent !

Ι Working area minimum working radius = 6 m (20 ft)

ΙΙ Working area maximum working radius = 32 m (105 ft)
ΙΙΙ Extended maximum safety radius due to swing of load = 42 m (138 ft)

WARNING !
Unauthorized persons being within the maximum extended safety ra
dius or under a suspended load is strictly forbidden !

. IMPORTANT !
Check regularly all warning plates for completeness and legibility !

−4.3− L284
CRANE OPERATION
4.1.2. SPECIAL SAFETY REGULATIONS

4.1.2.1. MACHINE START−UP SAFETY

−Before starting up the crane perform a thorough walk around inspection

−Visually inspect the crane. Look for loose bolts, cracks, wear, leakages and evidence of vandalism.
−Never start or operate an unsafe crane
−Be certain no one is working on or under the crane and the area surrounding the crane is free of other
personnel
−Secure all covers in locked position
−Check and read safety / warning plates periodically
−After entering the crane, clean all cabin windows and secure doors and windows, adjust the operator’s
seat and controls and adjust side mirrors.
−Alert nearby personnel that the crane is being started.
−Know the location of the fire extinguishers and be familiar with their operation.
−Know contacts to your safety office, fire department, ambulance

4.1.2.2. ENGINE START−UP SAFETY

−Place all controls in neutral position before starting the engine

−Follow the start−up instructions
−Check all lights, indicators, instruments and controls for their proper function.
−Start engine and check indicators, warning devices and controls for their proper indication
−Warm up engine and hydraulic system to operating temperatures
−Check that all additional equipment (grab, spreader, rotator, etc) are properly operating.
−Check all functions (hoisting, slewing, luffing, travelling, etc.) for their proper function

4.1.2.3. CRANE OPERATING SAFETY

−Make sure you are aware of all federal, state and local safety requirements. Familiarize yourself with the
jobsite before starting working with the crane.
−Never allow other personnel to stay on the crane, superstructure or undercarriage
Exception:
After eye contact with the operator outside:
The crane working radius communication is required by the telephone at the undercarriage. Before that
the crane movements must be stopped.
Rest phone in the provided box when finished.
−Report problems or needed repairs to your foreman or supervisor immediately
−Be certain that no one is endangered by moving the crane
−Check the crane safety system (limit switches, load limiting device, etc.)
−Only authorized personnel is allowed to enter the engine room for test purpose
−Never leave the crane while the diesel engine is running
−Keep a safe distance from buildings, walls and unstable ground
−Always adapt your travel speed to working conditions
−Adapt the working speed if changing visibility and weather conditions
−Be aware of underground cables, gas and water lines. Keep safe distance to high voltage electrical lines
−Take hand signals only from one authorized person
−Never work underneath a raised attachment

L284 −4.4−
 CRANE OPERATION
−Switch on crane lights if working area is not illuminated enough
−When loading onto vehicles, request the vehicle driver to leave the vehicle
−Loads must always be slung carefully and in accordance with all regulations. Before slinging the load,
ensure that there are no obstacles in its path when hoisted
−No movements of the crane resp. loads without having eye contact or communication with the authorized
crane rigger
−The load must never exceed the values specified in the load chart
−Know the weight of the load to be hoisted
−Note that the specified load capacities include the weight of the lifting device (hook, grab, spreader, rotator,
etc.)

4.1.2.4. CRANE PARKING SAFETY

−Park the crane on firm and level ground

−If parking on level ground is not possible, secure the wheels by the provided wedges.
−Never block access to entrances, exits, ramps, fire hydrants, etc., when parking the crane
−Always lower attachments to ground
−When stopping the diesel engine, always follow the procedures outlined in this manual
−Switch ignition off, remove all keys, lock the driver’s cabin and machine house, connect the cable to the
socket on the undercarriage and switch over to aux. power supply (standstill heating, etc.) and secure
the crane against vandalism and unauthorized use

−4.5− L284
CRANE OPERATION

4.2. PREPARATIONS FOR CRANE OPERATION

4.2.1. STARTING UP FOR CRANE OPERATION

Prepare crane in following sequence:

−Remove electric cable for auxiliary supply, if connected and switch over main switch external supply / gen

erator supply at switch cabinet X2 to generator supply
−Check, if battery main switch is switched on
−Start up diesel engine

General conditions for crane operation

−Jib in working range, radius can be seen on monitor

−Outriggers fully extended, check position on monitor

−Crane supported on all propping plates and horizontally positioned, check posi

tion on monitor

WARNING !
If crane is only supported on three of four propping plates, the crane
operation is limited by only allowing movements "hoisting lowering" or
"jib up". To get the full crane operation first rest the load on the ground
and after support the crane on all propping plates!
Before starting up crane operation, check visually without fail if all out
riggers are fully extended and the crane is supported on all propping
plates ! The wheels must be lifted off from ground !

−Check if crane is levelled horizontally at provided water level indicator in the cab

in; if not, correct the position by operating the propping cylinders
−Engine full speed preselected by the push button on control panel ll

−Check engine speed at monitor indication (approx. 2000 rpm)

L284 −4.6−
 CRANE OPERATION
If all these conditions are fulfilled the following crane operations can be preselected:
−Hook operation
−Four rope grab operation
−Travel operation
−Jib down" operation

DANGER !
Crane operation is only allowed when the crane is jacked−up safely
and
−all outriggers are fully extended
−all propping plates are on safe / solid ground
−the crane is lifted up into a horizontal level
−the wheels are completely unloaded and lifted from the ground

4.2.2. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO BE OBSERVED BEFORE THE ACTUAL CRANE OPERATION

Before the crane is taken into operation, the following safety devices must be checked every time:
a) Load−moment−limitation
The electronic load moment limiter stops automatically movements "hoisting" and "jib lowering" if the
max. load moment is exceeded. The proper function of the switch off according to the load chart must
be checked at least every 200 working hours or every two months.
b) The angle sensor to stop the boom motion at min. and max. radius.
c) The top limit switch at the jib head will stop the crane movements "hoisting up" and "jib down".
d) The gear cam limit switches to stop the hoisting motion
The crane is ready for operation
For detailed description of the operating controls refer to the operator’s cabin description
Crane operation with the suspended load − crane supports in use:
−Never expose the crane to a load in excess of the stated capacity limit.
−The crane operator must be familiar with the weight of the load before it is moved with the crane
−The lashing ropes and tackle used to secure loads must meet strength requirements.
−All crane movements must be performed with a minimum of jerking. Select speeds, which do not endan

ger the crane stability for the load weight and jib length in use.
−There is a risk of the crane overturning, if:
a) the crane movements are not carefully controlled to prevent the load from swinging
b) permitted load and radius values are exceeded
c) the propping plates are provided with inadequate underlay for specific surface conditions.
d) the crane is not properly supported on all four hydraulic outrigger jacks and accurately levelled.

WARNING !
If crane is only supported on three of four propping plates, the crane
operation is limited by only allowing movements "hoisting lowering" or
"jib up". To get the full crane operation first rest the load on the ground
and after support the crane on all propping plates!

−A code of signals must be agreed between personnel handling or attaching loads and the crane operator.
If the operator’s view is obstructed, a second person must relay the signals to him or a radio links must
be installed.
Influence of wind

−4.7− L284
CRANE OPERATION
The crane may be operated in winds up to a speed of 20 m/sec. (= 72 kmh, 38,8 knots, beaufort grade 8)
At wind speeds over 42 m/sec (= 151 kmh, 81,6 knots, beaufort grade 12) the jib head must be rested on
the ground and the crane jacked up with fully extended outriggers.

4.2.3. STOPPING CRANE OPERATION

Stop crane in following sequence:

−Rest the load on the ground

−Turn crane until the superstructure is parallel to the undercarriage, position is

indicated on monitor

−Stop all crane movements (all joysticks are in neutral position)

−Select min. engine speed by pressing push button "minimum / maximum en

gine speed" on control panel II

−Verify the engine speed at appr. 1250 rpm on the monitor, allow the engine to
idle at this speed for a few minutes.

. IMPORTANT !
If the engine is shut down at max. rpm, the turbo charger may be dam

aged !

−Shut down the engine by pressing push button "start/stop diesel engine".

−Usually connect the auxiliary power supply to the crane (see operation of selec

tor switch Aux. supply / generator supply")
−If the crane is left on a gradient, secure the wheels to prevent the crane from roll

ing away by provided wedges.

. NOTE !
In case of faults or if conditions require the engine can be switched off immediately at any time
by pressing one of the emergency stop buttons.

WARNING !
Do never leave any load suspended with a stopped crane !

L284 −4.8−
 CRANE OPERATION
4.2.4. START / STOP DIESEL ENGINE

Function:
The turbo charged and intercooled LIEBHERR diesel engine type D 9408 TI−E drives through the flexible
coupling the distribution gearbox on which all hydr. pumps for the various movements and aux. pumps are
mounted.
Safety instruction:

WARNING !
Before starting the engine make sure no one is in the dangerous area.
Be aware that service personnel may be tending to the machine out of
immediate view !

. NOTE !
Before starting the engine verify that the fuel shut off valve at the fuel tank is in open position.

Operation from cabin:

The following checks should be carried out before starting the diesel engine:
−Lube oil level at the motor with dip stick
−Gear oil level at distribution gear box with dipstick
−Hydraulic oil level at the inspection glass
−Suction shut off valve at the hydraulic tank suction line in open position
−Fuel shut off valve in open position at the fuel tank
−Fuel capacity at the monitor
Diesel engine start conditions: −Ignition on
−No faults indicated at the monitor of the electronic control

Start procedure: Press push button start /stop diesel engine" on control panel
II. The LED flushes, if the diesel engine has to be preglowed
(at lower outside temperatures). During the preglowing time
the diesel engine cannot be started. Wait until flushing of the
LED has stopped (LED is not illuminated). Press push button
Start / stop diesel engine" within 30 sec. to start the diesel
engine otherwise the safety switch−off of the preglowing unit
is activated. To reset the preglowing unit switch ignition off and
on. The built−in LED illuminates at engine speed over
1000 rpm.

Stop procedure: Press the same push button for stopping the engine

. NOTE !
Do not stop engine while running at full speed. Before stopping engine
select idle speed by the push button and allow engine to idle for a short
time. Stop all movements before stopping engine on control panel II.

−4.9− L284
CRANE OPERATION
4.2.5. WARM UP PROCEDURES BEFORE CRANE OPERATION
Following procedures shall be performed at temperatures colder than −10 °C when the crane is started up
after a longer standstill (e.g. more than 6 hours) :
− start up diesel engine and let it idle for approx. 15 min without performing any crane
motions
− afterwords the motions hoisting, luffing and slewing shall be performed with reduced
speed and without any working load for approximately 5 min.
As a standard in our factory, all mechanical gearboxes such as
− hoisting winches,
− slewing gears,
− travelling gears,
− distribution gearboxes
are prefilled with gear oil type SAE 90.
With this type of oil it is possible to operate the crane until an outside temperature of −20 °C. At tempera

tures warmer than −20 °C there is no limitation for use with this type of oil.
At outside temperatures until −25 °C, the above mentioned gearboxes shall be filled with a multi−grade
oil like − SAE 80W − 90 or
− SAE 80W − 140.

. NOTE !
These oils must have a pourpoint of min. −30 °C !
At temperatures warmer than −25 °C there is no limitation for use of these types of oil.

. IMPORTANT !
Please contact your next LIEBHERR service station if the crane shall be operated at outside tem

peratures colder than −30 °C !

L284 −4.10−
 CRANE OPERATION
4.2.6. MANUAL JACK UP OF THE CRANE
Function:
Before starting any crane operation the crane must be fully supported by the four hinged outrigger arms
and mounted propping plates.
The outrigger arms must be fully extended first and then the crane must be lifted up into a horizontal level.
This job can be carried out from either cabin, by use of the built−in control elements.
For levelling the crane into horizontal position use water level in the cabins.
Safety instruction:

DANGER !
Crane operation is only allowed when the crane is jacked−up safely
and
−all outriggers are fully extended
−all propping plates are on safe / solid ground
−the crane is lifted up into a horizontal level
−the wheels are completely unloaded and lifted from the ground

ATTENTION !
The outrigger arms may only be retracted and the propping plates only
raised up to a windspeed of 20 m/s.

. NOTE !
The outrigger arms and the propping cylinders can be operated from either the lower or the upper
cabin.

4.2.6.1. OPERATION OF OUTRIGGER ARMS"

Release condition for outrigger arms control:
−Diesel engine / electric motors running
−Travel operation preselected
Exception: Operation of outriggers to move out can be done without any preselection !

Operation of outrigger arms extending":

−Select the two outrigger arms on the left side by pressing the two push buttons
−Press push button for movement "outrigger arms extending" and remain press

ing

WARNING !
Watch movement of outriggers through the side mirror, only operate
outriggers under supervision by additional personnel.

REMARK: For extending the two outrigger arms on the right side select the out

riggers by pressing the two push buttons on the right side and follow
the same procedure for the left sides.

−4.11− L284
CRANE OPERATION

−Max. extended positions of outriggers are indicated on the monitor

. NOTE !
Physical location of outrigger arms is as indicated on the monitor

. IMPORTANT !
The max. possible extended position of all outrigger arms must be
checked physically before starting crane operation!

Operation of "outrigger arms retracting"

−Select the two outrigger arms on the left side by pressing the two push buttons
−Press push button for movement "outrigger arms retracting" and remain press

ing

WARNING !
Watch movement of outriggers through the side mirror, only operate
outriggers under supervision by additional personnel.

REMARK: For retracting the two outrigger arms on the right side select the out

riggers by pressing the two push buttons on the right side and follow
the same procedure.

−For each outrigger the indication changes on the monitor to "retracted position"
as soon as the outrigger arm is moving away from the end position
−Continue operation "outrigger arm retracting" until outrigger arms are fully re

tracted

4.2.6.2. OPERATION OF "PROPPING CYLINDERS"

Release conditions for "propping cylinder" control:

−Diesel engine running
−Travel operation preselected
Exception: Operation of propping cylinders to move down can be done without any preselection !

L284 −4.12−
 CRANE OPERATION
Operation of outrigger propping cylinder down:

−Select all four "propping cylinders" by pressing the four push buttons
−Press push button for movement "propping cylinder down" and remain press

ing
All four cylinders are moving down.

−During movement of all "propping cylinders" the four indications on the monitor
are flashing

−Stop movement "propping cylinder down" after all four indications stop flashing
and change to a steady indication on the monitor
−Now all four propping plates are touching the ground, means pressure has
built−up in the cylinders

DANGER !
Critically check without fail the area of the stabilizers; the collapsing
of a stabilizer on unstable ground can have devastating effects !

. IMPORTANT !
The actual supporting of the crane should be done by operating the
two front propping cylinders first and then the two rear propping cylin

ders.

−Select the two front "propping cylinders"

−Press push button "propping cylinder down" and keep button pressed until the
front tyres are completely unloaded

−Select the two rear propping cylinders

−Press push button "propping cylinder down" and keep button pressed until the
rear tyres are completely unloaded

−Balance the crane level position by selecting and operating the different "prop

ping cylinders" two by two.

−Check level position at water level gauge inside the cabin. The air bubble must
beinthecentreofthewaterlevelgaugeifthecraneisjacked−uphorizontally.

Ç
DANGER !
Ç
Crane operation is only allowed when the crane is jacked−up safely
and
−all outriggers are fully extended
−all propping plates are on safe / solid ground
−the crane is lifted up into a horizontal level
−the wheels are completely unloaded and lifted from the ground

−4.13− L284
CRANE OPERATION

Operation of outrigger propping cylinder up:

−Select all four "propping cylinders" by pressing the four push buttons
−Press push button for movement "propping cylinder up" and remain pressing.
All four cylinders are moving up.

−During movement of all "propping cylinders" the four indications on the monitor
are flashing

−The propping cylinders are relieved after all four indications at the monitor stop
flashing and change to a steady indication on the monitor.

. NOTE !
The propping plates are still touching the ground. Keep push button
propping cylinder up" pressed until the propping plates lifted up from
the ground (approx. 150 mm).

WARNING !
Check if the propping plates are lifted from the ground (approx. 150
mm) before starting travel operation !

L284 −4.14−
 CRANE OPERATION
4.2.6.3. ASSEMBLING / DISASSEMBLING OF SMALL PROPPING PLATES

Function:
In order to pass through narrow passages, the propping plates can be disassembled.
Safety instruction:

DANGER !
The propping plates may only be raised if crane is in travel operation
position !
For safety reasons the propping plates should only be disassembled
if necessary !

Operation:
To disassemble the propping plates, the outrigger arms are, if possible, to be extended.

Procedure:
−Rest propping plate (2) on the ground in such a way, that
the knuckle point (3) is released.
−Remove both safety pins (6)
−Raise propping cylinder (1) and remove propping plate
(2) by lifting at the provided brackets (4)
1

4
ATTENTION ! 2
For safety reasons it is recommended not to
exceed 25% of maximum travelling speed during
travelling with disassembled propping plates.
3 5

1 propping cylinder
2 propping plate
3 knuckle point
4 brackets 3
5 propping plate fixing device
6 safety pins

−4.15− L284
CRANE OPERATION
4.2.7. OPERATION OF SELECTOR SWITCH
AUX. SUPPLY / GENERATOR SUPPLY"

Function:
All electrical and heating systems on the crane are supplied with power from the generator during crane
operation.
To keep the lighting and heating system in operation during a longer shut−down period of the crane the
auxiliary supply from the port must be connected to the crane.
Safety instruction:

ATTENTION !
The auxiliary supply from the port must meet following conditions:

− voltage: 380V (+/−10%),

− frequency: 50 or 60Hz (+/−5%),
− 3 phases + Neutral + Earth
LIEBHERR must be informed if the auxiliary supply does not meet
these conditions to adapt the crane to the existing auxiliary supply at
the port.

. IMPORTANT !
To avoid condensation in the electrical systems and switch cabinets, it is very important to keep
the standstill heating in operation during shut−down periods of the crane especially during the
winter period! For periods without auxiliar supply this crane is equipped with an additional circuit
breaker (2) for the cable reel supply on the undercarrige. The circuit breaker is lockable to avoid
unjustified access.

(1) Cable reel Switch cabinet X5

(2) Circuit breaker

AUX. SUPPLY" (lockable)

Switch cabinet

Operation:
−After shutting down the crane unreel the cable of the aux

iliary supply cable reel (1) and connect cable to a suitable
land supply.
−Check the position of the circuit breaker (2) on the under

carrige MAIN SWITCH
−Change the selector switch inside the switch cabinet X2
to position "aux. supply" (3) 0
−Before starting crane operation change selector switch I I
"aux. supply" (3) to position "generator" (4).
−Before starting crane operation change selector switch (3) G (4)
"aux. supply" (3) to position "generator" (4).
−Reel up cable from auxiliary supply cable reel (1) at un

dercarriage.

L284 −4.16−
 CRANE OPERATION
−Reel up cable from auxiliary supply cable reel (1) at un

dercarriage.

. IMPORTANT !
Raise the socket and plug safety covers and
withdraw the plug. Subsequently ensure that
the plug as well as the socket safety covers
are tightly closed as protection against dust
and contamination. In addition the auxiliary
power supply cable is to be duly coiled and
removed from the working area of the crane!

−4.17− L284
CRANE OPERATION

4.3. CRANE OPERATION

4.3.1. HOOK OPERATION

Function:
At hook operation the cargo rotator is not connected with the cable from the cable reel. This means swivel
operation of the cargo rotator is not possible.
Safety instructions:

DANGER !
−Before starting hook operation the crane must be in operational con
dition, meaning no trouble is indicated on the monitor!
−At a failure on the load moment limiting system crane operation may
not be started resp. operation must be stopped immediately.
−Do not lift heavier loads as indicated on the load diagram for this op
eration mode !
−Crane operation must be stopped at a windspeed more than 39 kn.

ATTENTION !
Each rope has to be pretensioned in direction of the rope lay with
100 − 200 Nm before mounting on the load lifting device !

. IMPORTANT !
The el. cable of cable reel must be stored in the upper limit position to protect from damage !
Operation:

−Start up the crane as described under item Starting up for crane operation".
−Store el. cable of cable reel in upper limit position.

−Select hook operation by pressing the push button on the control panel II, check
readiness at the built−in LED

−Indication for hook operation" is shown on the monitor

. NOTE !
During the crane operation the "dead man" button (9) on the joy stick
7 8
9
must be continuously pressed to release the control system.

L284 −4.18−
 CRANE OPERATION
4.3.1.1. HOOK LIFTING / LOWERING

−Lifting the hook can be controlled from the joy stick on the right side of the
control stand. The movement will be released after an operation mode is se

b
lected.

a direction hoist motion "lifting"

d c
b direction hoist motion "lowering"

4.3.1.2. SLEWING LEFT / RIGHT

−Turning the crane can be controlled from the joy stick on the left side of the b
control stand. The movement will be released after an operation mode is se

lected.

c direction slewing right" d c

d direction slewing left"
a

−The slewing speed can be changed by pressing push button on control

panel I. Pressing the push button several times reduces the slewing speed
from value 1 to 3 and starts from value 1 again.

−The digit between the arrows indicates the current slewing speed.

1 100% slewing speed

2 approx. 80% slewing speed
3 approx. 50% slewing speed

. NOTE !
The selected slewing speed is stored in the crane control system and
will be automatically selected at the next start up of the diesel engine.

4.3.1.3. JIB LIFTING / LOWERING

−Operation of the jib can be controlled from the joy stick on the left side of the b
control stand. The movement will be released after an operation mode is se

lected.

a direction jib lifting" d c

b direction jib lowering"
a

−4.19− L284
CRANE OPERATION
4.3.2. CHANGING FROM FOUR−ROPE−GRAB TO HOOK TRAVERSE (ROTATOR)
a) Start up the crane as described under item Starting up
for crane operation".
b) Rest the four−rope−grab approximately 4m (13,1 ft)
H from the edge of the undercarriage on the ground in
open" position near the hook.
C c) Slack off the hoist ropes by use of the hoisting joystick
S on the right hand side

ATTENTION !
Watch the ropes on the winches to avoid any dam
ages !
d) fix the hoisting rope (H, C) by using a fibre rope, so that
the hoisting rope can’t move away

. IMPORTANT !
Secure the rope elsewhere, before opening
the shackle to avoid any damage through
H slipped rope !
S
C e) open the shackle (S) and remove the hoisting rope (H,
C) from the four−rope−grab
f) mount the rope (H, C) to the hook by using the shackle
(S)

ATTENTION !
Each rope has to be pretensioned in direction of
the rope lay with 100 − 200 Nm before mounting
on the load lifting device !

. IMPORTANT !
Perform steps d) and f) for each rope separately! Ensure that the
hoisting ropes are connected in the right sequence (holding rope
(H)−closing ropes (C)−holding rope (H)) in order to avoid crossing
of the ropes. Otherwise the ropes will be damaged during operation!
g) Take out the slack of the hoisting ropes by using key switch and push button
"service operation" on control panel ll.
Function of key switch "Preselection winches for service operation"
Position 0: Holding and closing winch are working parallel
Position I: Closing winch is working separately
Position II: Holding winch is working separately
Function of push button "Service operation"
Keep this push button pressed as long as holding / closing winch should be
operated separately. The LED illuminates if holding or closing winch is sepa

rately preselected.

ATTENTION !
Watch the ropes on the winches to avoid any damages !
Do not attempt to release the fibre ropes until the hoisting ropes are
mounted on the hook !

h) Synchronize winches as described under item Synchronization"

The hook is ready for operation.

L284 −4.20−
 CRANE OPERATION
4.3.3. CHANGING FROM HOOK TRAVERSE (ROTATOR) TO FOUR−ROPE−GRAB

a) Start up the crane as described under item Starting up for crane

operation".
b) Rest the hook traverse approximately 4m from the edge of the undercar

riage on the ground near the four−rope−grab.
c) Slack off the hoist ropes by use of key switch and push button "Service
Operation" on control panel II.
Function of key switch "Preselection winches for service operation"
Position 0: Holding and closing winch are working parallel
Position I: Closing winch is working separately
Position II: Holding winch is working separately

Function of push button "Service operation"

Keep this push button pressed as long as holding / closing winch should be
operated separately. The LED illuminates if holding or closing winch is sepa

rately preselected.

. IMPORTANT !
As there are no limit switches working, the
crane operator assumes full responsibility for
H crane functions. Watch the ropes!
S Preselection of one winch is only possible if
C any crane operation is preselected.
d) fix the hoisting rope (H, C) by using a fibre rope, else

where so that the hoisting rope can’t move away.

. IMPORTANT !
Secure the rope elsewhere, before opening
the shackle to avoid any damage through
slipped rope !
e) open the shackle (S) and remove the hoisting rope (H,
C) from the hook.
f) mount the rope (H, C) to the grab by using the shackle
(S)

ATTENTION !
H Each rope has to be pretensioned in direction of
the rope lay with 100 − 200 Nm before mounting
C
on the load lifting device !
S

. IMPORTANT !
Perform steps d) and f) for each rope sepa

rately ! The left−handed closing rope of the
crane has to be connected to the left−handed
closing rope of the grab and the right−hand

ed closing rope of the crane has to be con

nected to the right−handed closing rope of
the grab. Verify that the hoisting ropes are
connected in the right sequence (holding
rope (H) − closing ropes (C) − holding rope
(H)) in order to avoid crossing of the ropes.
Otherwise the ropes are damaged during op

eration !

−4.21− L284
CRANE OPERATION

g) If the hoisting ropes are not paid out far enough, the winches can be moved
separately and without any limitations in operation by using key switch and
push button "service operation" as already described.

WARNING !
Watch the ropes on the winches to avoid any damages !
Do not attempt to release the fiber ropes until the hoisting ropes are
mounted on the grab !

h) After all ropes are mounted to the grab, preselect "Four−rope−grab opera

tion" by pressing the push button on control panel II and check readiness at
built−in LED.

i) Indication for four−rope−grab" operation is shown on the monitor

4.3.3.1. ADJUSTING OF THE GRAB

If the mounted grab type is used for the first time resp. changing of grab type, proceed with the following
steps listed below.

j) lift grab from ground in "service operation mode" to avoid slackrope on the
hoisting ropes.

k) press function key F6 first on the monitor to change the function key layout,
afterwords press F5 to change to the synchronisation page.

F5 F6 l) open grab slowly in service operation mode" with the closing winch as long
as mechanical stop of grab is not reached. Stop opening of grab short before
mechanical stop of grab in order to avoid slack rope and damaging of the grab.

m) press function key F7 below indicated symbol to store the position of the grab
as opened position.

n) close grab in service operation mode" with the closing winch until grab is
closed. The load indication of both winches must show the same value when
the empty grab is closed.

o) press function key F8 below indicated symbol to store the position of the grab
as closed position.

L284 −4.22−
 CRANE OPERATION
p) Switch off service operation mode" on control panel II (key switch in pos. 0")
and open slowly the grab. Check if the grab stops at the set position. Open the
grab and check if the grab stops at the set position.

The load indication of both winches must show the same value, when lifting
the closed and empty grab.
If the winches get out of synchronization, repeat procedure from step l) .

Press function key F1 to get back to the crane operation picture.

. IMPORTANT !
The only rope connections allowed are those shown on the above sketch. If using chains for con

nection of the closing ropes, it is strictly forbidden to drive into the jib head pulleys to avoid da−
mage !
The four−rope−grab is now ready for operation.

−4.23− L284
CRANE OPERATION
4.3.4. FOUR−ROPE−GRAB OPERATION

For this operation mode the hook traverse must be disconnected from the four wires and replaced by the
four−rope−grab. The cable from the cable reel is not needed as the grab is operated mech. by the holding
wires and closing wires.
The grab can be "lifted" or "lowered" during opening or closing procedure for more efficiency during grab
operation.
Safety instructions:

DANGER !
−Before starting four−rope−grab operation the crane must be in op
erational condition, meaning no trouble is indicated on the monitor!
−At a failure on the load moment limiting system crane operation may
not be started resp. operation must be stopped immediately.
−Do not lift heavier loads as indicated on the load diagram for this op
eration mode !
−Crane operation must be stopped at a windspeed more than 39 kn.

4.3.4.1. OPERATION OF FOUR−ROPE−GRAB

−Start up the crane as described under item Starting up for crane operation".
−Store el. cable of cable reel in upper limit position. For operation refer to item
Operation of cable reel".

−Select Four−rope−grab operation" by pressing the push button on the control

panel II, check readiness at the built−in LED

−Indication for Four−rope−grab operation" is shown on the monitor

Function "Grab closing":

b 1 −Move the right hand joy−stick to the left (direction d) and the grab closes as long
as the lever is in the specific position. The grab moves slowly with the set speed
6 2 into "lowering" direction and allows to take more material.
5 3 Additional function "lifting" or "lowering" the grab during closing
d c
Function "lifting":
4 −If the push button (1) is pressed on the right hand joy stick during "closing" the
grab, the grab moves with the set speed into "lifting" direction and avoids the
a grab from overfilling.
Function deactivate "lowering" :
−If the push button (2) is pressed on the right hand joy stick during "closing" the
grab, the grab does not move into "lowering" direction .
The lifting / lowering speed can be set by pressing function key F4 at the monitor
on the synchronization page from 10% to 50% in steps to 10%. The indication
starts from 10% again, if pressing function key F4 at an indication of 50%. The set
value is stored even if the crane is shut down.

Indication for Grab closing" is flashing on the monitor during closing the grab.
The symbol stops flashing and changes to a steady indication if the grab is in
closed position.

L284 −4.24−
 CRANE OPERATION

2 b −If the grab can’t be closed completely, because something got stuck between
the grab blades, press button Receipt for bulky goods" (6) on the left hand joy−
1 3
stick. The signal "Grab closed" is simulated and both winches start to lift the grab.
6 4 The hoisting speed is set according to the joy−stick position.

d c
5 . IMPORTANT !
Push button Receipt for bulky goods" (6) should be used only if re

a quired due to stuck material between the grab blades.

Indication for Bulky goods" is shown on the monitor. The indication goes out if
the joy−stick is moved in direction Grab opening".

. NOTE !
If the grab is closed, the winches are hydraulically connected to have
a load equalization, even if the grab was closed with the "Receipt at
bulky goods" signal.

Function "Grab opening":

−Move the right hand joy−stick to the right (direction c) and the grab opens as
long as the lever is in the specific position.

Indication for Grab opening" is flashing on the monitor during opening" the grab.
The symbol stops flashing and changes to a steady indication if the grab is in
opened position.

. NOTE !
The closing / opening speed of the grab is set according to the joy−
stick position.

Function "Grab lifting":

b −Move the right hand joy stick to the rear (direction a) and the grab is lifted as long
as the lever is in the specific position.

d c
. NOTE !
The grab is automatically lifted as soon as the grab is closed.

. NOTE !
The selected operation mode is stored in the crane control system and
will be automatically selected at the next start up of the diesel engine.

−4.25− L284
CRANE OPERATION
4.3.5. JIB DOWN / RAISING OPERATION

Function:
For maintenance and repair work at the jib head it is occasionally necessary to lower the jib to the ground.
Preconditions for jib down procedure:
−All conditions for crane operation as described in item "Preparations for crane operation".
Additionally requested:
F position of superstructure must be parallel to the undercarriage!

Check position on monitor:

0° looking forward
180° looking backward
F Remove electric cable from cargo rotator and store in upper limit position
For operation refer to description "operation of cable reel".
F Rest cargo rotator beside the crane centre line on the ground (at a radius of appr.
20 m, 65,6 ft).
Safety instructions:

DANGER !
−It is strictly forbidden for personnel to be within the lay−down area!
−Hoist winch must be watched by additional personnel when operat
ing the winch !
−During lay−down procedure operation of "travel system" and opera
tion of "propping cylinders" is strictly forbidden!
−Never lower the jib when crane is standing on a slope !
−There is an emergency push button installed in the cabin which shuts
down the crane in emergency cases!

4.3.5.1. JIB DOWN OPERATION

−Start up crane as described under item Starting up for crane operation"

−Select "jib down" operation by pressing the push button on control panel II,
check readiness at built−in LED.

−Indication for "jib down" operation is shown on the monitor.

−Lower jib by operating the left hand joystick in direction jib lowering  (direc− b
tion b)
−Give slack on hoist ropes by operating the hoist gear joystick in direction lower

ing" (b) to avoid tension on the wires
d c
. IMPORTANT !
Slack rope will be indicated on the monitor but no automatic stop of
the winch movement is executed! The hoist winch and the ropes must a
be watched by additional personnel when operating the winch!

L284 −4.26−
 CRANE OPERATION

−Lower the jib gently before reaching jib rest position

−Jib rest postion is indicated on monitor by symbol jib in
lower limit"
−Rest jib on jib rest support (1)

"Jib down" procedure has been completed.

4.3.5.2. JIB RAISING OPERATION

−Start up crane as described under item Starting up for crane operation"

−Select "jib down" operation by pressing the push button on control panel II,
check readiness at built−in LED.

−Indication for "jib down" operation is shown on the monitor.

b −Lift jib by operating the left hand joystick (direction a)

−Compensate slack on hoist ropes by operating the hoist gear joystick in direc

tion hoisting" (a).

d c
. IMPORTANT !
Slack rope will be indicated on the monitor but no automatic stop of
the winch movement is executed! The hoist winch and rope pulleys at
a jib head and tower must be watched by additional personnel when
compensation of slack rope is carried out.

−Lift jib until the cargo rotator is within the working range of the jib.

. NOTE !
To continue work select "rotator operation" by pressing the push but

ton on control panel II and check readiness at built−in LED.

. NOTE !
During crane operation the dead man" button on the joystick must
be continously pressed to release the control system.

−4.27− L284
CRANE OPERATION

4.4. DATA RECORDER SYSTEM − SECTOR TRIGGER

4.4.1. THE DATA RECORDER SYSTEM

The data recorder is a tool, that saves loadcycles on a memory card. The operation keys of the data recorder
and the printer are on control panel I and the keys for setting the trigger points are are the function keys
F7/F8 of the data recorder page on the monitor display (F7). It is possible to select one or two triggerpoints.

Preconditions for starting the data recorder system:

CALIBRATION OF THE DATA RECORDER SYSTEM WHEN SWITCHING ON THE CRANE

The tareing of the loadcycle recorder must to be carried out at each switching on of the data recorder sys

tem. Therefore the load lifting device (hook traverse, rotator, spreader, grab, etc.) has to be lifted from
ground. Press the function key Change function keys layout" (function key F6) on the monitor of the LI

TRONIC. On the LITRONIC monitor appears the symbol Hook tareing" (function key F4). By pressing func

tion key Hook tareing" the indication of the actual load on the ropes is set to zero (to eliminate the influence
of the load lifting device). The tareing is finished and the data recorder system is recording the correct values
of the load on the ropes. Press function key F6 once more to change to the original function key layout.
If the data recorder is not tared correctly the load turnover calculation does not correspond with the actual
turnover and recorded datas are wrong.

. IMPORTANT !
When switching on the crane tareing must be performed. The tareing must only be performed if
the load lifting device is lifted without load and remains in absolut standstill.

CALIBRATION OF THE DATA RECORDER SYSTEM WHEN CHANGING LOAD LIFTING DEVICES
Tareing must be performed at each changeout of the load lifting device. Therefore the load lifting device
( hook traverse, rotator, spreader, grab, etc.) has to be lifted from ground and it has to be waited until the
load lifting device is in absolut standstill. The load indication must not change, but should indicate a constant
value. Press the function key Change function keys layout" (function key F6) on the monitor of the LITRON

IC. On the LITRONIC monitor appears the symbol Hook tareing" (function key F4) . Press the function key
Hook tareing" (function key F4) . Tareing is now finished and the data recorder system is now recording
for each loadcycle considering in the calculations the correct weight of the new load lifting device. Press
function key F6 once more to change to the original function key layout.

. IMPORTANT !
At each change−out of the load lifting device and each change of the PCMCIA − program card,
tareing must be performed.The tareing must only be performed if the load lifting device is lifted
without load and remains in absolut standstill.

L284 −4.28−
 CRANE OPERATION
4.4.2. OPERATION OF THE DATA RECORDER:

4.4.2.1. FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL I:

front window

dormer window

−4.29− L284
CRANE OPERATION

All push buttons are equipped with a LED that illuminates when the selection of
LED the corresponding unit or operation mode has been performed. Two LED are addi

tionally installed for background illumination of the push button. The intensity is
controlled by a photo transistor.

Push button
Print out last completed load cycle"

The last recorded load cycle is printed.

print out example:

LOAD RECORDER LOAD0003

start date 19.11.1996
start time 09:36:43
stop date 19.11.1996
stop time 09:41:01
load cycles 2
sum load [t] 18.0

Push button
Print out actual opened load cycle"

The actual load cycle is printed.

print out example:

LOAD RECORDER LOAD0004

start date 19.11.1996
start time 09:41.02
print date 19.11.1996
print time 09:41:03
load cycles 0
sum load [t] 0.0

Push button
Print out load cycles backwards"

Prints out load cycles backward.
for e.g.:
There are three files on the memory card to print out on the printer:
LOAD0003, LOAD0002, LOAD0001
Before pressing push button Print out load cycles backwards" one print out must
be done before with push button Print out last completed load cycle".
By pressing the push button print out load cycles backwards" file ’LOAD0002’ is
printed. Each pressing push button again, file ’LOAD0001’ and so on is printed
until the last file on the memory card is printed out.

print out example:

LOAD RECORDER LOAD0002

start date 19.11.1996
start time 09:35:57
stop date 19.11.1996
print time 09:36:41
load cycles 1
sum load [t] 8.0

LOAD RECORDER LOAD0001

start date 19.11.1996
start time 09:35:29
stop date 19.11.1996
print time 09:35:55
load cycles 1
sum load [t] 8.0

L284 −4.30−
 CRANE OPERATION
Push button
Record start / stop data recorder system"
By pressing this push button the data recorder system is started and a new load
file is created on the memory card. The LED inserted in the push button begins
to flash slowly to indicate that the data recoder system is active. To stop the data
recorder system press push button again and the opened load file is closed.

Conditions for a valid load cycle:

− data recorder system active
− push button ’pause record data recorder system’ not active
− trigger point must be passed over
− load for min. 10 sec. more than e.g. 3 tons
− load must be lowered to ground. When lowering the load to ground the LED in
push button Record start / stop data recorder system" flashes for a short time
faster to indicate that the load cycle is written to the memory card.

NOTE: In the case that the crane is switched off during operating the data recorder system, the actual
load file stays opened as long as the load file is closed by pressing push button Record start /
stop data recorder system" even when the crane is switched on again.

Push button
Pause record data recorder system"

By pressing this push button the actual load cycle is not recorded. This means that
the data recorder stays active, but the system will not record the following load
cycles. By pressing the push button again, the next valid load cycles will be re

corded.

−4.31− L284
CRANE OPERATION
4.4.2.2. SETTING THE TRIGGER POINT:

Press F7 for the data recorder operation picture

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

Function keys for activating trigger points

a) Trigger point location 1 b) Trigger point location 2

c) Indication of activated d) Indication of activated

triggerpoint 1 triggerpoint 2

L284 −4.32−
 CRANE OPERATION
Function
Set trigger point"
Press function key F7 − for the first trigger point − and function key F8 − for the second trigger point −
to set the trigger points. The actual triggerpoint is indicated with a circlet at the declared point on the monitor
display above the function keys F7 / F8.

Indication of
Activated trigger point"

A circlet indicates that a trigger point is activated. It is possible to activate 2 trigger
points with the function keys F7 / F8 below.

Indication of
Trigger point location"

shows the activated trigger point in degree. The indication shows the position be

tween superstructure and undercarrige.
There are two indications for a trigger point location with two independently place

able trigger points.

Attention! Always the actual angel is set as trigger point.

for e.g.

Move slewing gear near the point from where the load shall be lifted. Stop slewing movement and press
function key Set trigger point" for approx. 3 sec. the circlet on the trigger point symbol illuminates.
If necessary repeat these steps to create a second trigger point.

−4.33− L284
CRANE OPERATION
4.4.3. EXAMPLE FOR A VALID LOAD CYCLE

NOTE: Before switching on the data recorder system tare the load lifting device !

− Lift load
− Move load over one of the set trigger points
− Lower load to ground
− Now the load cycle is written to the memory card

In the case that one of the emergency stop buttons should be pressed during a load cycle or the crane is
shut down with lifted load, the actual load cycle is not valid and will not be recorded to the data recorder
system.
After releasing the emergency stop button or starting up the crane following steps should be performed to
get a valid load cycle:
− Press push button  Pause record data recorder system"
− Move load to the place where it is lifted from and lower load.
− Press push button Pause record data recorder system" again
− Lift load and proceed as a normal load cycle

1 ship
2 trigger point 2
3 crane
4 trigger point 1

. NOTE !
The figure below shows the principle function of the data recorder system. The trigger points can
be set where it is needed depending on the situations on site !

2
1 4

L284 −4.34−
 CRANE OPERATION

4.5. TRAVEL OPERATION

Function:
Travel operation can be operated either from the cabin on the superstructure or tower cabin.
Travel drive is carried out by hydr. motors with multiple disc brakes which release by pressure whenever
the travelling joystick is operated.
During the travel operation an accustic warning signal sounds.
Side travel:
For special applications the crane can be travelled sidewards, means all wheels running parallel.

Safety instructions:

DANGER !
−Before travelling check if the ground is sound and level on the desig
nated travel route !
−All tyres must have a pressure of 10 bar (145 psi)!
−Deep pot−holes and severe road unevenness endanger the stability
of the crane !
−Obstacles to be passed (e.g. crane rails) are not allowed to be higher
or deeper than 100 mm from ground level!
−These kind of obstacles are only allowed to be crossed in longitudi
nal direction!
−If voice or sight contact to the banksman is interrupted travel must be
immediately stopped!
−Special caution is necessary when passing through narrow pas
sages − travel slowly !
−Travelling is only allowed up to a longitudinal inclination of maximum
5 % and transversal inclination of 2 % !
−Critically check without fail the area of the stabilizers; the collapsing
of a stabilizer on unstable ground can have devastating effects !
−Switch on travel lights when travelling in darkness !
−Always watch area around the crane, by use of side mirrors and fol
low instructions of banksman !
−Travelling with tower erected is only allowed up to a wind speed of
14 m/s (=Beaufort no. 6) !

4.5.1. NORMAL TRAVEL OPERATION

Preconditions for "normal travelling"

General conditions for travel operation:
−All conditions for crane operation as described in item Preparations for crane
operation"
−No load on the hook except load lifting device (e.g. cargo rotator)

Operation:
−Start up crane as described under item Starting up for crane operation"

−Preselect "travel operation picture" by pressing function key F2 on the monitor

F2

−4.35− L284
CRANE OPERATION

−Turn superstructure into position 0°(forward) or 180°

(backward) by operating the joy stick "slew motion";
position of superstructure is shown on the monitor

−Compare indicated "actual load" (2) with indicated "max.

load" (1) on the monitor and check if actual load is equal
or less than max. load

(1)
. NOTE !
Travel operation is only possible if the actual
(2) load is equal or less than max. load ! Rest load
on ground and compare again !

−Operate the jib by use of the left hand joy stick until the
bar is in the middle of the indication:
b
joy stick control:
direction a: jib lifting
direction b: jib lowering
d c Procedure of operation:
if bar is fully shown operate jib into direction "min. ra

dius"
a if bar is not visible operate jib into direction "max.
radius"
For travelling with restricted load the bar should be posi

I II I
tioned in the middle of the indications value (1) and value
(2).
I admissible area of travelling window
II prefered area of travelling window
III at this position the crane is in the optimal point of the
(1) III (2) travelling window

I II I

L284 −4.36−
 CRANE OPERATION

Preselection of "travel operation" is only possible if the indication "STOP" is not

flashing!

−Select "normal travel operation" by pressing the push button on control panel
II, check readiness at the built−in LED.

−Indication for normal travel operation" is shown on the monitor

−If indication "travelling synchron" is flashing, the wheels must be synchronized.

Refer to description "Synchronization of steering system" in this manual
−The wheel position must be checked on site and if necessary corrected until all
wheels are parallel to the undercarriage

WARNING !
Travel operation is only allowed to be started after all wheel sets are
parallel to the undercarriage !

−Move propping cylinders up and rest undercarriage on ground. For description

refer to item "Operation of propping cylinders" in this manual.

WARNING !
Check if the propping plates are lifted from the ground (approx. 150
mm (6") before starting travel operation!

−Basically the outrigger arms should be fully extended and the propping
plates plates parallel to the undercarriage (use anti−twist protection) at travel
operation
−If necessary the outrigger arms can be retracted up to a mechanical stop
(mounted on the outrigger arm cylinder); keep the propping plates parallel to
the undercarriage (to avoid damages to the tyres)
−In case of lack of space, the mechanical stops, the anti−twist protections as
well as the propping plates have to be removed. Then the outrigger arms
can be retracted as far as necessary. Pay attention to the fact that the balls of
the propping cylinders are approx. 200 mm (8") above ground.

ATTENTION !
For safety reasons it is recommended to retract the outrigger arms only
to the mechanical stop and to leave the propping plates mounted!

. IMPORTANT !
F Read safety instructions carefully before starting travel operation !
F During travel operation the position of the outrigger arms is not con

trolled !

−4.37− L284
CRANE OPERATION

b −Travel the crane by use of the left hand joystick control:

direction b: crane travelling forwards
direction a: crane travelling backwards
d c The travelling speed can be controlled by the position of the joy stick.

a . IMPORTANT !
Accelerate and decelerate the crane very slowly.

. NOTE !
The steering control is only released during travelling motion ! Steering
is blocked if crane is not moving.

4.5.2. SIDE TRAVEL OPERATION

Preconditions for "side travel"

All general conditions for crane operation as described for "normal travel".

DANGER !
For side travel operation it is absolutely necessary that the ground is
sound and level !

Preselection of "side travel"

−By pressing the push button on control panel II, check

readiness at the built−in LED

−Indication for side travel operation" is shown on the

monitor

7 8 . NOTE !
During the crane operation the "dead man" button (9) on the left hand
9 joystick must be continuously pressed to release the control system.

L284 −4.38−
 CRANE OPERATION

4.6. STEERING

Function:
The electro−hydraulic steering control system is acting independent on every wheel−set.
The steering can be operated either from the upper or lower cabin.
Safety instructions:

. IMPORTANT !
Steering is blocked if the crane is not supported on the propping plates and the crane is not driving.

Operation:
Two operation modes are prepared for steering release:
−Crane fully supported on all propping plates and "travel operation" preselected
−Crane on wheels, "travel operation" preselected and crane driving with more than approx. 0,5 kmh (0,3
miles/h).

Steering operation will be activated by the right hand joystick in the undercarriage cabin as well as from the
tower cabin.
The joystick motion corresponds to the desired direction of travel. This means −
steering left: move joystick to the left
steering right: move joystick to left right
The joystick returns automatically to "neutral" position when released. The steering angle remains in the
previous steered position. To travel in straight ahead direction again the joystick must be actuated in the
opposite position.

4.6.1. SYNCHRONIZATION OF STEERING SYSTEM

Function:
During steering operation all wheel sets are controlled individually from the electro−hydraulic steering con

trol system.
At every wheel set a angle sensor indicates the actual wheel position to the electronic control system.
When switching over from "normal travel" to "side travel" or after exchanging one of the angle sensors the
steering system must be synchronized.

. IMPORTANT !
As long as indication "steering system not synchron" is flashing on the monitor, the travel system
is blocked!

Operation:

"Steering system not synchron" indicates as flashing symbol on the monitor.

−Support crane by operating all propping cylinders − for description refer to item
"Supporting the crane".

−4.39− L284
CRANE OPERATION

b
−Operate right hand joystick and give control to left or right side until the flashing
symbol illuminates continuously.
Now the steering system is synchron.
d c

. NOTE !
The deviations of the different wheel sets are shown on page 2 in the
travel operation picture.

L284 −4.40−
 CRANE OPERATION
4.6.2. EXAMPLES FOR STEERING PERFORMANCE

longitudinally

"Normal travel" "Side travel"

curve of any radius diagonally

slew on the spot sideways

−4.41− L284
CRANE OPERATION

L284 −4.42−
 FAULT FINDING

INDEX

5. FAULT FINDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3

5.1. FAULT FINDING LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3

5.1.1. FAULT FINDING LIST − GENERAL CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3

5.1.2. FAULT FINDING LIST − HOOK OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
5.1.3. FAULT FINDING LIST − FOUR−ROPE−GRAB OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
5.1.4. FAULT FINDING LIST − JIB DOWN / RAISING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
5.1.5. FAULT FINDING LIST − STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7

−5.1− L284
FAULT FINDING

L284 −5.2−
 FAULT FINDING

5. FAULT FINDING

5.1. FAULT FINDING LIST

5.1.1. FAULT FINDING LIST − GENERAL CONTROL

Function group / −Operation Check at / location

operation mode * Required conditions

1. Control voltage Required conditions:

24 V DC for crane engine room
* battery main switch on DB+4A−S04
control present
* battery charging unit o.k. DB+X2−E03 switch cabinet X2
* battery charging unit o.k. DB+X1−E03 (optional) switch cabinet X1
* main circuit breaker on DB+X1−F01 switch cabinet X1
* fuse for start control voltage o.k. DB+X1−F04 check LED at block E06 in

side switch cabinet X1

2. Ignition on Operation:
−operate key switch S51 at control panel II (upper
cabin)

Required conditions:
* control voltage 24 V DC for crane control present function group 1.

3. Emergency stop Required conditions:

circuit
* ignition on function group 2.
* circuit breaker DB+X1−F22 o.k. switch cabinet X1
* emergency push button DB+4A−S01 released engine room
* emergency push button DB+4A−S02 released switch cabinet room
* emergency push button KB+2X25−S50 released control panel II upper cabin
* emergency push button UW+4A−S01 released ascent front undercarriage

4. Engine start up Operation:

−press push button S9 at control panel II (upper built in LED shows readi

or lower cabin) ness of engine at 1000 rpm

Required conditions:
* ignition on function group 2.
* all joysticks in neutral position cabin
* emergency stop circuit function group 3.
* manual operated fuel shut−off valve open fuel tank
* fuel capacity sufficient for operation fuel indicator on monitor

−5.3− L284
FAULT FINDING
5.1.2. FAULT FINDING LIST − HOOK OPERATION

Function group / −Operation Check at / location

operation mode * Required conditions

5. Hook operation Operation: Monitor:

−press the push button at control panel II (up

per or lower cabin)

Required conditions:
* tower erected
* jib in working range

* outriggers fully extended

* crane supported on all propping plates and

horizontally positioned

* engine full speed preselected by the push

button on control panel II

* no load lifting device connected jib head

* el. cable of cable reel stored in upper limit cable reel jib head
position

L284 −5.4−
 FAULT FINDING
5.1.3. FAULT FINDING LIST − FOUR−ROPE−GRAB OPERATION

Function group / −Operation Check at / location

operation mode * Required conditions

6. Four−rope− Operation: Monitor:

grab operation
−press the push button at control panel II (up

per or lower cabin)

Required conditions:
* tower erected
* jib in working range

* outriggers fully extended

* crane supported on all propping plates and

horizontally positioned

* engine full speed preselected by the push

button on control panel II

* el. cable of cable reel stored in upper limit cable reel jib head
position

−5.5− L284
FAULT FINDING
5.1.4. FAULT FINDING LIST − JIB DOWN / RAISING OPERATION

Function group / −Operation Check at / location

operation mode * Required conditions

7. Jib down / rais Operation: Monitor:

ing operation
−press the push button at control panel II (up

per or lower cabin)

Required conditions:
* tower erected

* jib in working range

* outriggers fully extended

* crane supported on all propping plates and

horizontally positioned

* engine full speed preselected by the push

button on control panel II

* position of superstructure must be parallel to

the undercarriage

0° looking forward
180° looking backward
* el. cable of cable reel stored in upper limit cable reel jib head
position

L284 −5.6−
 FAULT FINDING
5.1.5. FAULT FINDING LIST − STEERING

Function group / −Operation Check at / location

operation mode * Required conditions

8. Steering Operation:
−steering control with right hand joystick (low

er or upper cabin)

Monitor:
Required conditions:
* crane fully supported on all propping plates
and "travel operation" preselected (for syn

chronizing purpose)

or

* crane on wheels, "travel operation" prese

lected and crane driving with more than appr.
0.5 kmh

−5.7− L284
FAULT FINDING

L284 −5.8−
 EMERGENCY OPERATION

INDEX

6. EMERGENCY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3

6.1. FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3

6.2. OPERATION HOW TO LOWER THE LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3

6.3. LOADING OF PRESSURE ACCUMULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3

6.4. OPENING OF SLEWING BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4

6.5. LAYOUT OF EMERGENCY HAND PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4

6.6. ILLUSTRATIONS OF COMPONENTS FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION 6.5

−6.1− L284
EMERGENCY OPERATION

L284 −6.2−
 EMERGENCY OPERATION

6. EMERGENCY OPERATION

6.1. FUNCTION

With built−in pressure accumulator H73 it is possible to carry out following emergency movements or op

erations at a total standstill of the crane:
−To lower the hook
−To open the slewing brakes
The accumulator is maintained automatically to appr. 35 bar (507psi) by the feed pressure circuit.
As for the slewing system only the disc brakes can be released by the accumulator, the crane must be turned
by additional equipment (e. g. second crane).

Safety instructions:

WARNING !
In case an emergency operation is carried out, the crane movements
are not stopped by limit switches or other safety devices !
Only release winches when supervised by additional personnel !
Keep away from dangerous area !

6.2. OPERATION HOW TO LOWER THE LOAD

−Open bypass valves H62 and H62A fully

−Change over "three way valve" A60 to emergency position
−Open slowly three−way−valve" H60 in order to release the multi disc brakes H61U, H61W of the winch
brakes.
When complete the load will be lowered.

. IMPORTANT !
Before the load reaches the ground, stop hook motion by closing three−way valve H60 ! Rest
the load on the ground by opening / closing the three−way−valve H60. After the emergency low

ering operation is finished, close bypass valves H62, H62A and change three−way−valves H60
and A60 to operational position !

. NOTE !
In case there is no space for resting the load on the ground, the crane has to be turned to the side
first! For operation refer to description part 6.4.

6.3. LOADING OF PRESSURE ACCUMULATOR

In case of a pressure loss below appr. 15 bar (217 psi) in accumulator H73 the hoisting brakes will close.
In this case the accumulator can be refilled by the emergency hand pump A9, which is permanently con

nected to the hydraulic tank. Before refilling the hydr. accumulator, close three way valves H60 and A60.
Operate lever of hand pump until the pressure gauge at the pressure accumulator indicates appr. 35 bar
(507psi).
Now release hoist brakes again by opening three way valve A60 first after three way valve H60.
(refer to description part 6.2.)

−6.3− L284
EMERGENCY OPERATION

6.4. OPENING OF SLEWING BRAKES

As for the slewing system only the disc brakes can be released by the accumulator, the crane must be turned
by additional equipment (e. g. second crane).
−Change over hand valves D62A, D62B in order to disconnect the slewing brakes D62U, D62V from the
regular brake circuit
−Change over hand valve D62C in order to connect the emergency accumulator H73 to the slewing brakes
−Release slewing brakes D62U, D62V by changing three way valve A60 to emergency position.

DANGER !
Do not swing load over people!
Emergency movements are only allowed if supervised by additional per

sonnel!

−Fix a rope at the marked point in the figure above with adequate strenght. Now the crane can be turned
by use of additional equipment (e.g. fork lifts, add. crane), which is pulling the slewing platform sidewards.
Approx. force for turning the crane: max. 2 tonnes rope pull (4409 lbs).
−If the pressure in accumulator H73 drops below approx. 15 bar (217 psi), the multi disc brakes D62U,
D62V close and the crane can’t be turned anymore.
For loading the pressure accumulator refer to description 6.3.
After the emergency operation is finished change over hand valves D62A, D62B, D62C to normal position
and close three way valve A60.

6.5. LAYOUT OF EMERGENCY HAND PUMP

2
3
1
1 Hand pump
2 Hand valve (Keeps always closed !)
3 Pump lever

L284 −6.4−
 EMERGENCY OPERATION

6.6. ILLUSTRATIONS OF COMPONENTS FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION

Valve A

Valve B

three−way valve A60

−6.5− L284
EMERGENCY OPERATION

bypass valve H62

L284 −6.6−
 EMERGENCY OPERATION

hand valve D62A hand valve D62C hand valve D62B

−6.7− L284
EMERGENCY OPERATION

L284 −6.8−
 MAINTENANCE

INDEX

7. MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7

7.1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7

7.1.1. MAINTENANCE INTERVALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8

7.1.2. HIGH ADHESION LUBRICANT OR UNDERWATER GREASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
7.1.3. DISPOSAL OF USED MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
7.1.4. QUALIFIED PERSONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8

7.2. SPECIAL SAFETY REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9

7.2.1. GENERAL MAINTENANCE SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9

7.2.2. FIRE AND EXPLOSION PREVENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
7.2.3. HANDLING AND DISPOSAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11

7.3. HYDRAULIC OIL FILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13

7.4. zlDIESEL OIL TANK AND FILLING UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14

7.5. LUBRICANTS AND OILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15

7.5.1. RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15

7.5.2. HYDRAULIC LINES AND HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16

7.6. OPERATION AT LOW OUTSIDE TEMPERATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17

7.6.1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17

7.6.2. OUTSIDE TEMPERATURES COLDER THAN −10°C (14°F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
7.6.3. OUTSIDE TEMPERATURES UNTIL −25°C (−13°F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
7.6.4. OUTSIDE TEMPERATURES COLDER THAN −30°C (−22°F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17

7.7. DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18

7.7.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18

7.7.2. TYPE PLATE OF DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19
7.7.3. ENGINE NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19
7.7.4. PRIOR STARTING DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
7.7.5. STARTING ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
7.7.6. SHUTTING DOWN OFF ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
7.7.7. WINTER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
7.7.8. TAKING ENGINE OUT OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
7.7.9. RESTORING ENGINE TO SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
7.7.10. MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23

7.8. THE DRY AIR−FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31

7.8.1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31

7.9. INSTRUCTIONS FOR STARTER BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.32

7.9.1. WARNING NOTES AND SAFETY REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.32

−7.1− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.9.2. STORAGE AND TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.33

7.9.3. COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.33
7.9.4. INSTALLATION IN THE CRANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.33
7.9.5. CHARGING BATTERIES OUTSIDE THE CRANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.33
7.9.6. MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.34
7.9.7. AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY / CHARGING OF BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.35
7.9.8. TAKING BATTERIES OUT OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.35

7.10. MAINTENANCE OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.36

7.10.1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.36

7.10.2. FILTER ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.36
7.10.3. HYDRAULIC FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.36
7.10.4. FLUSHING OF HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT AND PREFILLING THE PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.36
7.10.5. MAINTENANCE OF HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.37
7.10.6. MAINTENANCE OF OIL COOLERS AND RADIATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.37

7.11. LIEBHERR CONDITION MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.38

7.11.1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.38

7.11.2. TECHNIQUES EMPLOYED IN CONDITION MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.38
7.11.3. OIL SAMPLE / OIL EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.40
7.11.4. TAKING AN OIL SAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.41
7.11.5. CONDITION MONITORING REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.42
7.11.6. FILTER PLATE AGGREGATE ROOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44
7.11.7. RETURN FLOW FILTER HYDRAILIC OIL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45

7.12. PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.46

7.13. GEARBOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.47

7.13.1. DISTRIBUTION GEARBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.47

7.13.2. WINCH GEARBOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48
7.13.3. SLEWING GEARBOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.50

7.14. MULTIPLE DISC BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.52

7.15. NAF − AXLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.53

7.15.1. GENERAL DESIGN AND DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.53

7.15.2. GENERAL LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.53
7.15.3. GENERAL LAYOUT AND MAINTENANCE POINTS OF DRIVEN AXLES . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.54
7.15.4. GENERAL LAYOUT AND MAINTENANCE POINTS OF NON DRIVEN AXLES . . . . . . . 7.55
7.15.5. TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR NAF" AXLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.56
7.15.6. RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS CHART BY MANUFACTURERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.56
7.15.7. SERVICE INTERVALS FOR AXLES (DRIVEN AND NON−DRIVEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.56
7.15.8. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.59
7.15.9. CHECKING OF THE COMPENSATING CYLINDERS AT THE AXLE SETS . . . . . . . . . . . 7.61
7.15.10. ADJUSTMENT OF THE COMPENSATING CYLINDER AT THE AXLE SETS . . . . . . . . . 7.62

7.16. PUMPING UP THE TYRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.64

7.17. CENTRALIZED LUBRICATION SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.65

L284 −7.2−
 MAINTENANCE
7.17.1. DESCRIPTION CENTRALIZED GREASING PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.65
7.17.2. FUNCTIONAL PRINCIPLE PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.65
7.17.3. FUNCTIONAL PRINCIPLE GREASING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.66
7.17.4. CONTROL AND ADJUSTMENTS TO THE CENTRALIZED GREASING PUMP . . . . . . . 7.67
7.17.5. PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS FOR GREASING PUMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.67
7.17.6. PROGRESSIVE PISTON DISTRIBUTOR BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.68
7.17.7. ON THE UNDERCARRIAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.69
7.17.8. ON THE SLEWING PLATFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.70
7.17.9. ON THE TOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71
7.17.10. ON THE JIB HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.72
7.17.11. MAINTENANCE DRAWING BASIC EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.73

7.18. THREE−ROW−ROLLER SLEWING RING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.74

7.18.1. THREE−ROW−ROLLER SLEWING RING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.74

7.18.2. CHECKING PRETENSION LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.75

7.19. INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF CRANE ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.77

7.19.1. SELECTION OF WIRE ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.77

7.19.2. ROPE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.77
7.19.3. MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.78
7.19.4. INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.78
7.19.5. INSTRUCTIONS FOR UNTWISTING OF HOIST ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.79
7.19.6. DISCARD CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80

7.20. REPLACEMENT OF ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.81

7.20.1. HOLDING WINCH AND CLOSING WINCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.81

7.21. DIRECTIONS FOR USE OF QUICK RELEASE LINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.83

7.21.1. TECHNICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.83

7.21.2. HANDLING OF QUICK RELEASE LINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.83
7.21.3. MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.84

7.22. ROPE PULLEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.85

7.22.1. GENERAL LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.85

7.22.2. STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.85
7.22.3. TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.85
7.22.4. DURING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.86
7.22.5. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.86
7.22.6. RESISTANCE TO CHEMICAL PRODUCTS OF LAMIGAMIDR ROPE PULLEYS . . . . . . 7.87

7.23. STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88

7.24. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88

7.24.1. MAINTENANCE TO THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88

7.24.2. WET CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.89
7.24.3. CLEANING SCREEN MONITORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.89
7.24.4. CHANGING CABLE OF CABLE REEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.89

7.25. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR SLIP RING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.90

−7.3− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.25.1. TERMINAL BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.90

7.25.2. POWER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.90
7.25.3. SIGNAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.91
7.25.4. BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.91
7.25.5. TRIP LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.91
7.25.6. CABLE INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.91

7.26. MAINTENANCE OF THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92

7.26.1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM IN THE UPPER CABIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92

7.27. WELDING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.94

7.27.1. UNDERCARRIAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95

7.27.2. SLEWING PLATFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96
7.27.3. TOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.97
7.27.4. JIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.98

7.28. CORROSION PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.99

7.28.1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.99

7.28.2. GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.99
7.28.3. PROTECTING CRANE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.100
7.28.4. RECOMMENDED CORROSION INHIBITORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.100

7.29. MAINTENANCE LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103

7.29.1. GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103

7.29.2. FILLING QUANTITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.104
7.29.3. DAILY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.105
7.29.4. WEEKLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.105
7.29.5. AT 500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.107
7.29.6. AT 1000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.109
7.29.7. AT 1500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.111
7.29.8. AT 2000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113
7.29.9. AT 2500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115
7.29.10. AT 3000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.117
7.29.11. AT 3500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.119
7.29.12. AT 4000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121
7.29.13. AT 4500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.123
7.29.14. AT 5000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125
7.29.15. AT 5500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.127
7.29.16. AT 6000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.129
7.29.17. AT 6500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.131
7.29.18. AT 7000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.133
7.29.19. AT 7500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.135
7.29.20. AT 8000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137
7.29.21. AT 8500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139
7.29.22. AT 9000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.141
7.29.23. AT 9500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.143
7.29.24. AT 10000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.145
7.29.25. AT 10500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.147
7.29.26. AT 11000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149
7.29.27. AT 11500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.151
7.29.28. AT 12000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.153
7.29.29. AT 12500 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.155
7.29.30. AT 13000 OPERATION HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.157

L284 −7.4−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.31. AT 13500 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.159
7.29.32. AT 14000 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.161
7.29.33. AT 14500 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.163
7.29.34. AT 15000 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.165
7.29.35. AT 15500 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.167
7.29.36. AT 16000 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.169
7.29.37. AT 16500 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.171
7.29.38. AT 17000 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.173
7.29.39. AT 17500 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.175
7.29.40. AT 18000 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.177
7.29.41. AT 18500 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.179
7.29.42. AT 19000 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.181
7.29.43. AT 19500 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.183
7.29.44. AT 20000 OPERATION HOURS ............................................... 7.185

7.30. SERVICE SPARE−PARTS AND STANDARD TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.187

7.30.1. HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS SLEWING PLATFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.187

7.30.2. HYDRAULIC OIL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.187
7.30.3. DIESEL−FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.187
7.30.4. DIESEL ENGINE OM 444 LA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.188
7.30.5. ROTATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.188
7.30.6. SPREADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.188
7.30.7. GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.188
7.30.8. SWITCH CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.188

TABLE OF LUBRICANTS

−7.5− L284
MAINTENANCE

L284 −7.6−
 MAINTENANCE

7. MAINTENANCE

7.1. GENERAL

The importance of on−going routine preventative maintenance cannot be overstressed. The benefits aris

ing from a properly organised and scheduled maintenance programme are three−fold:

1. Maintenance in itself ensures that the crane and its component machinery are maintained
in peak operating condition, thus ensuring minimum crane operational downtime.

2. Machine and component inspection which form a large crucial part of a good maintenance
programme, in many instances highlight potential problems which thought maybe not of imme
diate consequence, could prove to be problematic in the long term.

3. Equipment functionality checks and tests are of extremely important significance,

particularly with respect to safety considerations. Cranes, which feature many safety devices
and features whose correct functionality while not forming part of the normal operating cycle
are imperative in maintaining safe crane operation.

Maintenance should therefore, be considered as being a check to ensure correct operation of the equip

ment, an inspection with a view to seek potential problems, as well as the routine maintenance, part replace

ment, etc. itself, − all of which is necessary in achieving maximum crane up−time and prolonged problem−
free machine life.
The MAINTENANCE LIST detailed in the following pages is provided as a general purpose guidline and
should only be used as such.It neither claims to be a totally comprehensive nor fully accurate in all details,
with respect to any given crane. Neither does it cater for any special or non−standard equipment or facilities.
It does however, provide a solid foundation on which a comprehensive maintenance schedule for a particu

lar crane may be built and/or customised
The maintenance list is divided into a number of MAINTENANCE TIME INTERVALS (OPERATING
HOURS).
The MAINTENANCE LIST is divided also into a number of activities, i.e. greasing, filter element replacement,
gear oil− and hydraulic oil check, periodical checks, etc. Within each maintenance group the crane is subdi

vided into a number of principle areas and specific crane component parts, highlighting the particular ma

chine / component on which inspection and maintenance is to be carried out.
Instructions on the checks, adjustments, part replacements, etc. relevant to the machine or equipment are
provided. More comprehensive information dealing with set up, operation and maintenance of the crane’s
component equipment may be found on the detailed section in the Instruction manual.

Cleanliness is required for the operation of the hydraulic system. Filters of any type as well as the hydraulic
oil have to be checked at appropriate intervals.
Periodical exchange of the oil used in the different gearboxes must be done.
All movable parts like bearings of winches, axels, hinge sections, rope pulleys, slewing bearings, ropes,
hinges on doors, hinges of ventilation flaps etc. must always be greased.

−7.7− L284
MAINTENANCE

. IMPORTANT !
Special care must be taken when the crane is out of operation. The standstill heatings must be
switched on. Important pressures, should be checked at extreme outside temperatures (e.g. feed
pressure, control pressure etc. It is necessary to check the hose− or pipe armatures, which are
mounted outside of the crane and are exposed to seawater, at regular intervals.

While greasing the bearings of the winches and the roller slewing ring, the winches as well as the
slewing ring has to be operated with slowly speed to ensure an adequate distribution of the
grease.

The maintenance intervals indicated in the maintenance list are based on the actual operating
hours of the crane. Should the crane be standing for a period of more then four ( 4 ) weeks − the
crane has to be operated once a month for at least two ( 2 ) hours. In addition to that all the greas

ing, oil inspections and oil level checks have to be done as well.

The crane has to be preserved, if not in operation for more than three ( 3 ) months. Detailed pres

ervation instructions are obtainable at your local LIEBHERR SERVICE department.

The bolts of the main slewing bearing have to be kept greased after erection and regreased after
everey inspection.

ATTENTION !
Switch off the heating elements installed inside the hydraulic oil tank
prior exchanging or draining the hydraulic oil !

7.1.1. MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

The maintenance intervals mentioned in the section MAINTENANCE LIST are guiding times and should be
observed. If for any reason a deviation to the given maintenance interval (s) should become necessary, ask
your local LIEBHERR SERVICE department for advice and confirmation to do so.

7.1.2. HIGH ADHESION LUBRICANT OR UNDERWATER GREASE

Gear rims must always be greased

Ropes must always be greased

7.1.3. DISPOSAL OF USED MATERIALS

. NOTE !
When changing oil and grease, batteries, etc. − used materials must be properly disposed of in
accordance with the relevant state regulations.
Contamination of soil, sewage and water systems must be avoided !

7.1.4. QUALIFIED PERSONS

PERSONS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SAFETY OF THE CRANE MUST ENSURE THAT:
− qualified persons are only delegated to work on the machinery or apparatus,
− these persons must keep the Operating− and Maintenance Instructions provided, and other documents,
available when carrying out the operations to which they refer and to follow that documentation without fail,
− unauthorised persons are prohibited from working on, or approaching, the machinery or apparatus.
Qualified persons are persons who, as a result of their training, experience and the instruction they have
received, and of their knowledge of the relevant Standards, directives, accident prevention regulations and
operating conditions, have been authorised by those responsible for the safety of the machine to carry out
the particular task required and who are able to recognise and avoid the potential hazards. A knowledge
of first−aid and local rescue equipment is essential. According to regulations, unqualified personnel are
forbidden to work for example on power installations and apparatus.

L284 −7.8−
 MAINTENANCE

7.2. SPECIAL SAFETY REGULATIONS

7.2.1. GENERAL MAINTENANCE SAFETY

−STUDY THE INSTRUCTION− AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL before operating or servicing the crane.
Make certain that you have additional information for special attachments of your crane, read it and under

stand it. IF IN DOUBT OR ANY INFORMATION REQUIRED, PLEASE CONTACT YOUR NEAREST LIEB

HERR SERVICE STATION (Contacts to LIEBHERR Service stations see SECTION 1 OF THIS MANUAL).

−ALLOW ONLY TRAINED AND AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL TO OPERATE, MAINTAIN, SERVICE OR RE

PAIR THE LIEBHERR MOBILE HARBOUR CRANE.

−WHEN MAKING REPLACEMENTS − USE ONLY ORIGINAL LIEBHERR SPARE PARTS ! THIS IS ABSO

LUTELY NECESSARY FOR OPERATING YOUR CRANE SAFELY.

−MAINTENANCE WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED AS OUTLINED IN THE MAINTENANCE GUIDLINES

AND INTERVALS OF THIS MANUAL.

−PERFORM ONLY WORK YOU UNDERSTAND, USING THE MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND SPARE PART
MANUAL AS GUIDLINE.

−WEAR PROPER WORKING− AND SAFETY CLOTHING (coverall, safety boots, hard hat, safety glasses
and gloves, ear protection, etc.) WHEN PERFORMING SERVICE OR REPAIR WORK.
KNOW YOUR LOCAL SAFETY RULES AND REGULATIONS.

−KEEP UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL FROM THE CRANE WHEN PERFORMING MAINTENANCE− or

REPAIR WORK.

−BEFORE SERVICING THE CRANE, ATTACH A "DO NOT OPERATE" TAG ON THE ACCESS LADDER
AND THE CONTROL PANEL.

−DO NOT USE FLAMMABLE FLUIDS TO CLEAN THE CRANE.

−NEVER CHECK FOR LEAKS WITH YOUR BARE HANDS AND / OR WITHOUT SAFETY GLASSES.
Fluids escaping from a small hole can have enough force to penetrate skin.

−DO NOT DISCONNECT LINES or HOSES, FITTINGS, CAPS or COVERS WHILE THE HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM, ENGINE FUEL or COOLING SYSTEM is PRESSURIZED. ALWAYS LOWER A LOAD OR AT
TACHMENT TO GROUND − LOWER THE JIB AND TOWER INTO MAINTENANCE POSITION.
SHUT OFF THE DIESEL ENGINE, AND RELEASE THE RESSURE FIRST. After servicing, ensure that all
lines, hoses and fittings are properly connected and all caps and covers are closed.

−BEFORE WORKING ON THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, SWITCH OFF THE POWER SUPPLY AND DIS
CONNECT THE BATTERY CABLES. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE NEGATIVE ( "−" MINUS) CABLE
FIRST AND RECONNECT IT LAST. BEFORE PERFORMING WELDING, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
CABLES AND REMOVE THE ELECTRONIC PRINT CARDS.

−DO NOT LIFT HEAVY COMPONENTS − USE PROPER LIFTING DEVICES SUCH AS CHAIN BLOCKS,
CRANES, etc.

−NEVER USE DAMAGED OR INSUFFICIENT WIRE ROPES, CHAINS AND SLINGS. Always wear
SAFETY GLOVES when handling wire ropes.

−NEVER USE METAL ON METAL SUPPORTS.

−7.9− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.2.2. FIRE AND EXPLOSION PREVENTION

−NEVER SMOKE OR ALLOW AN OPEN FLAME in refueling areas or where batteries are being charged,
or where batteries or flammable materials are stored (Diesel fuel tank, hydraulic oil tank).

−ALWAYS SHUT OFF THE DIESEL ENGINE FIRST PRIOR REFUELING AND HAVE A FIRE
EXTINGUISHER ON STAND−BY.

−NEVER STORE FLAMMABLE FLUIDS ON THE CRANE EXCEPT IN THE STORAGE TANKS
INSTALLED FOR THE CRANE OPERATION.

−FREQUENTLY CHECK THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND CORRECT ALL WIRING DEFECTS.

−DO NOT USE FLAMMABLE MATERIALS / FLUIDS TO CLEAN THE CRANE.

−INSPECT PERIODICALLY ALL COMPONENTS, LINES, TUBES AND HOSES FOR EVENTUAL OIL AND
FUEL LEAKS OR MECHANICAL DAMAGE. REPLACE OR REPAIR ANY DAMAGED COMPONENTS.
BE AWARE, OIL− OR FUEL LEAKS CAN CAUSE FIRES !

−KNOW THE LOCATION OF THE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND BE FAMILIAR WITH ITS OPERATION.

L284 −7.10−
 MAINTENANCE
7.2.3. HANDLING AND DISPOSAL INSTRUCTIONS

GENERAL

THE ENVIRONMENT IS OF GREAT IMPORTANCE TO LIEBHERR BOTH IN THE FAC

TORY DURING PRODUCTION OF OUR GOODS AND IN THE DESIGN OF OUR PRODUCTS.

−energy saving crane powering concept

−less pollutants, lower gasoline consumption, lower noise levels
−control of exhaust emmissions before delivery

HANDLING AND DISPOSAL INSTRUCTIONS

When chemical cleaning, testing compounds and lubricants are used, the pertinent danger and also han

dling information on the packing units is to be adhered to and appropriate protective devices must be used.

. IMPORTANT !
DO NOT USE FLAMMABLE FLUIDS TO CLEAN THE CRANE ! NEVER STORE FLAMMABLE OR
OTHER DANGEROUS FLUIDS / GOODS ON THE CRANE !

DANGERS

EXPLOSIVE POISONOUS

HIGHLY INFLAMMABLE NOXIOUS

FIRE SUPPORTIVE MATERIALS CORROSIVE, CAUSTIC

. IMPORTANT !
LUBRICANTS, PAINTS, THINNERS AND CLEANING COMPONENTS ARE TO BE STORED OR
PRESERVED ALWAYS IN CLOSED VESSELS.
NEVER STORE FLAMMABLE FLUIDS ON THE CRANE EXCEPT IN THE STORAGE TANKS
(HYDRAULIC OIL, DIESEL FUEL) INSTALLED FOR THE CRANE OPERATION.

ATTENTION !
FILLED UP AND LABELLED PACKING UNITS OF USED LUBRICANTS,
OLD PARTS, PAINTS, THINNERS AND CLEANING COMPONENTS TO BE
RETURNED UNDER MAXIMUM SAFETY AND IN COMPLIANCE TO
SPECIAL LOCAL RULES AND REGULATIONS TO YOUR NEXT DISPOSAL
DEPOSITION.

−7.11− L284
MAINTENANCE

L284 −7.12−
 MAINTENANCE

7.3. HYDRAULIC OIL FILLING

Prior filling hydraulic oil check hydraulic oil tank for wear particles and clean if necessary. Fill in hydraulic
oil only via return flow filter. Remove cover of return flow filter and fill in hydraulic oil up to the centre of the
middle oil sight glass. Check oil level at the inspection glass on the side wall of the hydraulic oil tank. The
oil level should always be between the MAXIMUM and MINIMUM mark. Fix cover of the return flow filter
(check first if O−ring fits properly).
Preconditions for hydraulic oil filling:
F crane supported on all propping plates
F outriggers fully extended
F jib in min. outreach position
F axle sets adjusted
Float switch and tank temperature sensor

Breather filter
CAPACITY : 900 l
237 gal

inspection glass
Return flow filter MAXIMUM 900 l

211 gal

185 gal

158 gal

Manholes for
inspection

Sucction line with

Tank anti−condensation heater SUCCTION SHUT OFF VALVE
Leave it open all the time !
Return flow line Close ONLY for inspection !

Cover of return flow filter

Connection point
(Breather filter) for
KNF Vacuum−pump

−7.13− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.4. DIESEL OIL TANK AND FILLING UP

The diesel oil tank can be filled via the filler cap on top. Check the diesel oil level at the indication in the opera

tor’s cabin. The suction line can be closed via a handvalve locateded underneath the tank. Water and sedi

ments can be drained via drainage valves. Two manholes are installed to inspect and clean the tank.

CAPACITY : 4500 l (1189 gal)

Filler cap Fuel tank level sensor

Breather cap

Sucction shut off hand valve Drainage plug

Manhole for inspections

L284 −7.14−
 MAINTENANCE

7.5. LUBRICANTS AND OILS

Should only be chosen from the TABLE OF LUBRICANTS, which is attached to the end of this section.
Since we know that the ordinary commercialized multi purpose greases do not always comply with the re

quirements of our cranes, we have developed a grease paste in close collaboration with our suppliers.
This new grease paste has, after extensive tests, proved to be very suitable for the best greasing of our
cranes and thus has been used for some time now in our factory for the greasing of cranes.
The working temperature of this grease paste range is form − 50°C to + 90°C. (58°F−194°F)
The grease paste is extremely
− resistant to pressure
− resistant to water
− can easily be conveyed through grease pipes
− and has a very high dripping point.

7.5.1. RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS

We are pleased to offer this grease paste as follows:

1) for greasing with automatic grease pump of CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEMS:

AVIALITH 2EP special paste

EP Extreme Pressure resistant !

. IMPORTANT !
For central lubrication system only use grease including EP ( = Extrem Pressure ) additives.

. NOTE !
− see also TABLE OF LUBRICANTS (copy attached to this manual),
− details given in section CENTRALIZED LUBRICATION SYSTEM and
− section SERVICE SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS.

−7.15− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.5.2. HYDRAULIC LINES AND HOSES

7.5.2.1. GENERAL

. IMPORTANT !
HYDRAULIC LINES, HOSES AND FITTINGS MAY NEVER BE REPAIRED !
Any damaged sections must be replaced immediately.

ATTENTION !
Escaping pressurized oil can cause body injuries or cause fires !

7.5.2.2. STORAGE
Even when hoses and lines are installed, stored and used according to specification − they undergo a natu

ral aging process. For that reason, their service life is limited.
Improper storage, mechanical damage and improper use use are the most frequent causes of hose frac

tures.

. NOTE !
USE ONLY ORIGINAL SPARE PARTS according to manufacturers specification.
For replacement to the units we recommend that you aquire the necessary knowledge first or you
ask for assistance / advise from your local LIEBHERR CUSTOMER SERVICE.
7.5.2.3. SERVICE LIFE

. NOTE !
THE SERVICE LIFE OF A HYDRAULIC HOSE MAY NOT EXCEED 6 YEARS, INCLUDING A
STORAGE PERIOD OF NO MORE THAN 2 YEARS (ALWAYS CHECK THE MANUFACTURERS
DATE ON THE HOSES).
Using hoses and lines close to the limit range of permitted use can shorten the service life (for exam
ple at high temperatures, frequent working cycles, extreme high impulse frequencies, multi shift op
eration or round the clock operations).
7.5.2.4. REPLACEMENT AND INSPECTION TO HOSES
Hoses and lines must be replaced if any of the following points are found during an inspection:
− Damage on the external layer into the inner layer (such as chaffings, cuts and rips)
− Brittleness of the outer layer (crack formation of the hose material)
− Changes in shape, which differ from the natural shape of the hose or line, when under pressure or
when not pressurized, or in bends and curves − such as separation of layers, blister or
bubble formation.
− Leakages
− Non observance of installation requirements
− Damage or deformation of hose fittings, which might reduce the strengths of the fitting or the
connection between hose and fitting
− Any movement of the hose away from the fitting
− Corrosion on fittings, which might reduce the function or the strength of the fitting
− Storage or service life has been exceeded

. NOTE !
To avoid excessive leakages the provided KNF VACUUM−PUMP should be connected to the hy

draulic oil tank. Route or install the hoses and lines properly. DO NOT MIX UP CONNECTIONS !

DISPOSAL !
USED MATERIALS MUST BE PROPERLY DISPOSED OF IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE RELEVANT STATE REGULATIONS !

L284 −7.16−
 MAINTENANCE

7.6. OPERATION AT LOW OUTSIDE TEMPERATURES

7.6.1. GENERAL

As a standard in our factory, all mechanical gearboxes such as

− hoisting winches,
− slewing gears,
− travelling gears,
− distribution gearboxes and
− cable reel drives
are prefilled with gear oil type SAE 90.
With this type of oil it is possible to operate the crane until an outside temperature of −20°C (−4°F).
At temperatures warmer than −20°C (−4°F) there is no limitation for use with this type of oil.

7.6.2. OUTSIDE TEMPERATURES COLDER THAN −10°C (14°F)

Following procedures shall be performed at temperatures colder than −10°C (14°F) when the crane is
started up after a longer standstill (e.g. more than 6 hours) :
− start up diesel engine and let it idle for approx. 15 min without performing any crane
motions
− afterwords the motions hoisting, wipping and slewing shall be performed with reduced
speed and without any working load for approx. 5 min.

7.6.3. OUTSIDE TEMPERATURES UNTIL −25°C (−13°F)

At outside temperatures until −25°C (−13°F), the above mentioned gearboxes shall be filled with a multi−
grade oil like − SAE 80W − 90 or
− SAE 80W − 140.

. NOTE !
These oils must have a pourpoint of min. −30°C (−22°F) !
Before the crane is taken into operation, the above mentioned procedures for starting up diesel engine at
outside temperatures colder than −10°C (14°F) shall be performed.
At temperatures warmer than −25°C (−13°F) there is no limitation for use of these types of oil.

7.6.4. OUTSIDE TEMPERATURES COLDER THAN −30°C (−22°F)

For operating the crane at temperatures colder than −30°C (−22°F) special precautions have to be ob

served. It is possible to order an additional low temperature equipment.
The main equipment consists of
− machinery room heater,
− hydraulik tank heating element,
− diesel engine cooling water preheating element and a
− distribution gearbox preheating element.

. IMPORTANT !
Please contact your next LIEBHERR service station if the crane shall be operated at outside tem

peratures colder than −30°C (−22°F) !

. NOTE !
The sealing of the doors, windows and hatches have to be greased well with VASELINE !

−7.17− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.7. DIESEL ENGINE

The LIEBHERR diesel engines are very robust strong engines specially designed for heavy duty machinery.
This engines proofed their reliability, ease of maintenance and longlifetime already in the tough work of va

rious construction machineries.
The LIEBHERR diesel engine type D 9408 TI−E is an exhaust turbocharged and intercooled direct injected
four stroke diesel engine with a watercooling system.

7.7.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Type of LIEBHERR diesel engine: D 9408 TI−E

Emission optimized
Intercooling
Exhaust gas turbocharging
8 cylinders
diesel−engine bore 135mm
stroke 150mm

view fanside view flywheelside view fanside

7 21
8

1 9
22
10
11
12 23
13
2

24
14

25
15 view flywheelside
16
3
17
26
(6)

5 18
turning direction
19

20

L284 −7.18−
 MAINTENANCE
:1 Lub oil pressure sensor
2 Alternator drive with V−belts
3 Glow start solenoid valve
4 Electric engine stop solenoid
5 Flame glow plug
6 Lub oil filling cap
7 Exhaust gas manifold
8 Lub oil − coolant heat exchanger
9 Vibration damper
10 Starter motor
11 Lub oil filter ( two similar pieces )
12 Dipstick to check lub oil level
13 V−belt tensioning device
14 Air inlet from airfilter
15 Exhaust gas turbo charger
16 Air outlet to intercooler
17 Engine housing ventilator
18 Flame glow plug
19 Coolant outlet to watercooler ( thermostate valves are underneath this housing)
20 Air inlet after intercooler for combustion
21 Coolant ( DCA 4 ) filter
22 Temperature sensor for the flame start unit
23 Alternator
24 Lub oil pan
25 Lub oil draining point
26 Pick up sensor to monitor engine rpm

7.7.2. TYPE PLATE OF DIESEL ENGINE

The type plate contains engine number in addition to other data.

The type plate is mounted on the left side of the crankshafthousing ( view from flywheelside ) just above the
starter motor. Depending on the engine type there can be a second type plate on the airintake pipes.

Engine type plate

Additional engine type plate

7.7.3. ENGINE NUMBER

The engine number is punched into the engine type plate and the crankshaft housing. The engine number
has 8 digits.
Example: 95 12 0030
manufacturing year 8 cylinder running number

−7.19− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.7.4. PRIOR STARTING DIESEL ENGINE

− check oil level (dipstick on engine) and hydr. oil level (sightglass on hydr. oil tank)
− check fuel supply (open shutoff valve − on bottom of diesel fuel tank)
− check hydraulic oil supply (open shutoff valve − on bottom of hydr. oil tank)
− check coolant level on expansion tank
− check battery main switch (4A−S04) in engine room, switch ON"
− release all emergency stop buttons
− switch the ignition on (key switch on control panel II to pos ‘ I ‘ ) and check content of diesel fuel on the
screen monitor (reorder fuel in time if required)

Hydr. tank

Fuel tank

7.7.5. STARTING ENGINE

− insert key into key switch Ignition on" ( − S51) and turn to position  I  to switch the ignition on.
WAIT appr. 15 − 20 sec till the screen monitor illuminates ( LITRONIC self check routine is finished )
− check on the screen monitor if any faults are indicated and rectify faults if required
− Start engine by pushing button Start / Stop diesel engine" ( − S9 ). release push button after the
engine has started.
− allow engine to idle first and check indications on the screen monitor (oil pressure, cooling water
content and −temperature, air filters, etc)

. NOTE !
If no oil pressure or another fault is indicated on the screen − shut off engine immediately
( by pushing button −S9 Start / Stop diesel engine" ).

− prior starting up crane operation set engine speed to 100 % by pushing button
 maximum engine speed  ( − S31 )

key switch "IGNITION ON / OFF" −S31

push button
"MAXIMUM / IDLE ENGINE SPEED"

push button "START / STOP ENGINE"

L284 −7.20−
 MAINTENANCE
7.7.6. SHUTTING DOWN OFF ENGINE

− lower load or auxiliary equipment to ground

− release all joysticks to zero position
− set engine idle speed by pushing button  Maximum / idle engine speed  ( − S31 )

− run engine at idle speed for appr. 1 minute

− stop engine by pushing button Start / Stop diesel engine" ( − S9 )
− switch off the ignition by turning key switch Ignition on / off " ( − S51) to position  0 

. IMPORTANT !
RUN ENGINE AT IDLE SPEED FOR APPR. 1 MINUTE BEFORE SHUTTING OFF THE ENGINE !

−S31 key switch "IGNITION ON / OFF"

push button
"MAXIMUM / IDLE ENGINE SPEED"

push button "START / STOP ENGINE"

. IMPORTANT !

Do not use the red push button EMERGENCY STOP" to shut off
the engine at normal operating conditions.
USE
EMERGENCY STOP" ONLY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY !

7.7.7. WINTER OPERATION

− change engine oil in good times (see table SERVICE FLUIDS)

or use multigrade oils suitable for the whole year

− Test antifreeze in good time with tester. Antifreeze protection must exist down to −37°C in normal case".

− use winter−grade diesel fuel with adequate fluidity

winter−grade
diesel fuel

−7.21− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.7.8. TAKING ENGINE OUT OF SERVICE

The following operations are to be performed before taking an engine out of service for a period
longer than one ( 1 ) month and not exceeding twelve ( 12 ) months

− Thoroughly clean engine

− Run engine to normal operating temperature and drain oil from sump
− Renew lub oil filter cartridges and lub oil
− Pour in coolant conforming to Service Product Specifications. Check Antifreeze content.
− Run engine until warm (coolant temperature 75 − 95°C (167−203°F) ) and allow to run for five (5) minutes.
− Check engine oil and pour up to max. mark on dipstick
− Fill fuel tank completely
− Close shut−off valve on diesel fuel tank
− Disconnect negative terminal from batteries

. NOTE !
Batteries which are not in use should be recharged once a month or to be maintained
via battery charger on a continuous charge of 0,06 A (60 mA).
Fully discharge and charge every three ( 3 ) months.

− Coat all bright metal and unpainted parts of the engine, such as belt pulleys, linkages and levers, etc. with
multi−purpose grease
− Relieve tension on all V−Belts
− Seal / plug all openings, such as exhaust pipe and air filter, airtight
− Activate EMERGENCY STOP SWITCHES in aggregate room and drivers cabin, lock cabin doors.

7.7.9. RESTORING ENGINE TO SERVICE

− Remove all seals / plugs fitted to engine parts (exhaust pipe and air filter)
− Remove grease from keyways of belt pulleys
− Tension V−Belts
− Check batteries and connect terminals
− Check level of engine oil, coolant and diesel−fuel. Check Antifreeze content of coolant.
− Open shut−off valve on diesel−fuel tank
− Release all EMERGENCY STOP SWITCHES
− Run engine until warm (coolant temperature 75 − 95°C (167−203°F))
− Drain engine oil from sump
− Renew lub oil filter cartridges and lub oil
− Run engine until warm (coolant temperature 75 − 95°C (167−203°F)) and allow to run for five (5) minutes.
− Check engine oil and pour up to max. mark on dipstick

L284 −7.22−
 MAINTENANCE
7.7.10. MAINTENANCE

7.7.10.1. CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Check the oil level when the crane is horicontally lev

elled. After shutting off the engine, briefly wait for the oil
to flow back into the oil pan.
Remove the dipstick, wipe it of with a clean cloth, and re

insert all the way to the stop.
Remove dipstick and take oil level reading.
The oil level must be between the MIN. and MAX. mark

ings of the dipstick. MAX
MIN

. IMPORTANT !
Do not fill the engine above the MAX. level.
The amount of oil between the min. and max.
markings is approx. 10−12 liters.

7.7.10.2. DRAINING ENGINE OIL

WARNING !
BE AWARE OF THE DANGER DUE TO HOT OIL
WHEN CHANGING LUB OIL OR OIL FILTER.
CHANGE THE OIL WITH THE ENGINE AT OPERAT
ING TEMPERATURE

− Unscrew the protection cap from the drainage valve.

Connect the drain hose and screw it in. When screw
ing in the drain hosethe check valve inside the drain
age valve will open and the lub oil is drained off.
Collect the drained oil in a suitable container and dis
pose it properly.
− Remove the drain hose, fix back the protection cap.

7.7.10.3. FILLING ENGINE OIL

− Fill the engine oil via the filling pipe socket to the max.
level (see checking engine oil level).
− Start the engine and run it for one to two minutes.
− Shut down the engine and check the oil level again.
Refill engine oil to the max. level if requiered.

Ex factory the diesel engine is filled with:

AVIA MULTI HDC PLUS 15W−40

−7.23− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.7.10.4. REPLACING LUB OIL FILTERS

− Place a container suitable for collecting oil under

neath the filters.
− Unscrew both filters. The filters are filled with lub oil,
so dispose them properly.
− Clean the sealing surface on the filter base
− Lubricate the sealing of the new filter with clean
engine oil.
− Screw on the new filter and tighten by hand.
− Start the engine. The oil filters will be filled up with oil.
Wait until the lub oil pressure indicators responses
(can be checked on the monitor in the cabin).
− Check the engine oil level and refill if necessary.

7.7.10.5. CHECKING V−BELT TENSION

− The V−belts are correctly tightened if they can be

pressed approximately 10 mm by hand in the
middle of both pulleys

7.7.10.6. ADJUSTING THE V−BELTS

− Loosen screws 1, 2, 3, nut 4 and counternut 5. Turn

adjusting screw 6 until the correct tension is
4
achieved. Tighten all screws respectively all nuts
back again.

7.7.10.7. CHANGING THE V−BELTS

1
− Loosen screws 1, 2, 3, nut 4 and counternut 5. Turn 3
adjusting screw 6 totally back. Move the generator 5
totally inwards. Take off old or used V−Belts. Put on
new V−belts, adjusting and tightening up again.
2
6

L284 −7.24−
 MAINTENANCE
7.7.10.8. CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL

− Check the coolant level at the filling cap 1.

2
7.7.10.9. REFILLING COOLANT 1

WARNING !
THE COOLING SYSTEM IS PRESSURIZED WHEN
THE ENGINE IS WARM. YOU MUST OPEN THE CAPS
ON THE EXPANSION RESERVOIR ONLY IF THE EN
GINE IS COLD ENOUGH TO BE TOUCHED BY HAND

− The cap item 2 is pretensioned with 0.7 bar in order

to increase the boiling point of the coolant.
− The cooling system must be provided with anti freeze
and corrosion protection DCA 4 all year long.
− Prepare correct mixed coolant in a suitable container.
− Open cap item 1 and refill coolant to correct level and
fit back the cap properly. Excess coolant will escape
through the hose fitted to the overpressure valve (2).

7.7.10.10. REPLACING THE COOLANT

1
− The coolant must be replaced every two years.
− The cooling system must be provided with anti freeze
and corrosion protection DCA 4 all year long.
− Replace the coolant when the engine is cold.
− Replace the water filter as well.

7.7.10.11. DRAINING THE COOLANT

− Open the heating valves for the cabin heating.

− Drain the coolant at the point marked 1 ( view from
fanside on the right side ).
− If the cooling system is contaminated the whole cool
ing circuit must be cleaned. Ask your next LIEBHERR
service station for advise.
− Some coolant will still remain in the engine, if you
need to drain all, open screw item 1 on the lub oil filter
housing.

7.7.10.12. FILLING THE COOLANT

2
− The cooling system must be provided with anti freeze
and corrosion protection DCA 4 all year long. 1

− Prepare correct mixed coolant in a suitable container.

− Open cap item 1 and refill coolant to correct level and
fit back the cap properly. Excess coolant will escape
through the hose fitted to the overpressure valve (2).
− Open the heating valves for the cabin heating.
− Start engine and let it idle for a few minutes.
− Shut down engine and check coolant level again.
Refill if necessary

−7.25− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.7.10.13. REPLACING THE COOLANT FILTER

− In order to protect the diesel engine to the impacts of corro

sion and cavitation in the cooling system a special DCA
4−filter system is installed. This filter system is filtering parti
cels in the coolant as well as keeping the DCA 4 concentra
tion at a correct level. This filter can therefore not be cleaned
and must be replaced every 500 working hours. A new filter
needs to be installed also if you replace the coolant.
− Close both valves at the filter housing.
− Unscrew the old filter housing and dispose it properly.
− Lubricate the o−ring of the new filter housing with a liitle bit
engine oil and screw on the filter housing to the cleaned
base part.
− Tighten the filter first easy by hand, afterwards additionally
1/2 to 3/4 turn more.
− Open both shut valves and check for tightness
− Start the engine and let it idle for a few minutes. Shut down the engine again and check for correct coolant
level and tightness.

7.7.10.14. COOLANT

The cooling system must be provided with anti−freeze and corrosion protection DCA 4 (DCA=Diesel Coolant
Additive) all year long.

. IMPORTANT !
IT IS NOT PERMITTED TO USE WATER ALONE AS A COOLANT EVEN IF ANTIFREEZE PROP

ERTIES ARE NOT REQUIERED.
THE PORTION OF ANTIFREEZE MUST NOT DROP BELOW 40% BY VOL. DURING OPERATION.
WHEN REFILLING THE COOLANT (AFTER LOSS OF COOLANT) IT IS ESSENTIAL TO ENSURE
AN ANTIFREEZE PORTION OF 50% BY VOL. (PROTECTION UNTIL −37°C.
DO NOT USE MORE THAN 55% ANTIFREEZE AGENT, OTHERWISE THE HEAT DISSIPATION
WILL BE IMPARED.

The machine is provided with anti freeze protection at the factory which provides sufficient protection down
to −37 °C (−34,6°F) (corresponds to approx. 50 Vol.% anti freeze), and appr. 3 liters liquid DCA 4 and the
DCA 4 provided in the new coolant filter.
The system has to be filled always with the correct DCA 4−concentration. For this it is necessary to change
the filterelement at every maintenance interval. The intervalls should correspond with the maintenance chart
of the diesel engine.
If the cooling system is tight it should not be refilled with DCA 4 liquid. If any leakages or repair works are done,
the concentration has to be checked with the FLEETGUARD test set" Id. No.: 5608 45903.
The DCA 4−concentration has to be at min. 0,3 units and max. 0,8 units per liter coolant. For new mixing of
the coolant approxamately 3 liters liquid concentrate DCA 4 are necessary.
For mixing coolant use only water which has drinking quality.

L284 −7.26−
 MAINTENANCE
7.7.10.15. THE FUEL SYSTEM

WARNING !
WHEN WORKING ON THE FUEL SYSTEM, SMOKING AND WORKING
WITH OPEN FLAMES OR SPARKS IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED. FUEL
MUST ONLY BE REFILLED WITH THE ENGINE SHUT OFF. NEVER
DRAIN FUEL ONTO THE GROUND. CATCH ANY FUEL WITH A SUIT
ABLE CONTAINER.

The fuel level in the tank is indicated on the LITRONIC monitor.

It is recommended to keep the fuel level as high as possible in order to prevent the formation of condensation.

7.7.10.16. FILLING UP FUEL

Fill in fuel through the filler sieve on the tank cap.

To prevent condensation in the tank, refill the tank in the evening resp. after a work shift.
Check fuel quality regularly.

−7.27− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.7.10.17. DRAINING WATER IN THE WATER SEPERATOR

In order to drain condensed water in the fuel system a fuel water

seperator is installed. Check this seperator daily and drain con

densed water if necessary.
If the fuel is regulary or heavy contaminated check the fuel tank
and the supplied fuel quality.
− For draining open hand valve item 1 and collect water/fuel
in a suitable container and dispose it properly.

1
7.7.10.18. REPLACING THE FILTER INSERT OF
THE WATER SEPERATOR 2
3
− Shut off the diesel engine.
− Close the main shut off valve underneath the diesel tank.
− Take off screws item 1.
− Remove cover.
− Take out spring housing item 2.
− Remove old filter insert.
− Fit new filter insert.
− Place back spring housing.
− Check sealing for correct seat and eventual damage.
1
− Tighten cover with the screws item 1 back.
− Open the main shut off valve underneath the diesel tank.
− Check correct seat of cover.

7.7.10.19. REPLACING THE FUEL FILTER

2
− Close the main shut off valve underneath the diesel tank.
− Drain the fuel in the filter element by opening the valve item
3. Collect and dispose fuel properly.
3
− Remove the filter item 2 by turning it anticlockwise and take
it off.
− Lubricate the sealing ring of the new filter element with oil.
− Install the new filter element by turning it on clockwise.
− Open the main shut off valve and check for tightness.
− Bleed the system.
4

L284 −7.28−
 MAINTENANCE
7.7.10.20. BLEEDING THE FUEL SYSTEM

Bleeding the fuel system is necessary after:

− Changing the fuel filter
− Cleaning the fuel tank
− Repairs on the fuel system 1
− Driving the tank to empty

A hand pump is installed on top of the engine to bleed the fuel

system.
Bleeding:
− Make sure that the main shut off valve underneath the diesel
tank is open.
− Make sure that the diesel tank is full".
− Open the hand valve on the water seperator until diesel fuel
is flowing out. Close it again.
− Open the hand valve on the bottom of the diesel filter. Pump
with the hand pump by pushing the pushhandle item 1 up
and down, until fuel is flowing out on the diesel filter. Close
the hand valve.
− Open the bleeding screw on top of the fuel filter item 4 .
Operate the hand pump until bubble or foam free fuel is
draining off . Close back the bleeding screw.
− Loosen the fitting input fuel" on the injection pump.
Operate the hand pump until bubble or foam free fuel is
draining off. Close back fitting.
− Loosen the fitting return line fuel" on the injection pump
(overflow valve). Operate the hand pump until bubble or
foam free fuel is draining off. Close back fitting.
− Loosen nuts of the injection lines on all injectors. Crank the
engine until bubble or foam free fuel is draining off. Close
back all fittings.
− Start the engine and check tightness of all fittings.
− If there are still starting problems, eventually repeat the
whole procedure.

−7.29− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.7.10.21. DRAINING WATER AND SEDIMENT FROM THE FUEL TANK

The fuel tank has drainage valves. This makes it possible to drain condensed water from the tank, as well as
to drain the fuel. When draining open the filling cover.
In case that the fuel is contaminated the fuel tank must be cleaned. Therefore the tank is equipped with
manholes.

7.7.10.22. GREASING THE FLYWHEEL

− Remove the cover on the flywheelhousing

− Check condition of gear rim
− Regrease with multi purpose grease
− Turn the engine by cranking with the starter motor
− Refitt the cover

7.7.10.23. INTERCOOLER AND WATERCOOLER RADIATOR

Check and if necessary clean the intercooler and watercooler radiator regulary.
A dirty watercooler can cause overheating of the engine.
A dirty intercooler can caus loss of power.
Check tightness of intercooler hoses regulary. Leakage of air ( pressure drop ) will result in big power loss.

7.7.10.24. ENGINE AND DISTRIBUTOR GEARBOX FASTENIN SCREWS

All fastening screws and rubber mountings must be checked regulary, and if necessary be retightened or
replaced.

7.7.10.25. EXHAUST FLAP

Check easy movement and proper closing of the exhaust flap regularly.

7.7.10.26. FLAME GLOW PLUGS

The flame glow plugs should be checked by experienced personal every 1000 working hours, or at least be

fore the cold season. Ask your next service station for advise or help.

7.7.10.27. ENGINE BREATHER VALVE

− The breather valve must be replaced every two years, or in

case of mechanical damage or malfunctioning.
− A malfunctioning engine breather valve could result in
leakages on the crankshaft sealings.

L284 −7.30−
 MAINTENANCE

7.8. THE DRY AIR−FILTER

7.8.1. GENERAL

Maximum engine protection against dust is only possible if the air−filters are cleaned and changed on a
regular basis.
The dry air−filters are designed to provide maximum engine protection with very long service intervals.
During operation of the crane the air−filter elements are monitored for an eventual pollution through the
LITRONIC Control. Soon as the symbol air−filter clogged" appears on the screen and the buzzer sounds,
the filter elements have to be serviced a.s.a.p.

3 2 5
1 Fastening bolt
2 Sealing ring
3 Main filter element (filter bowl)
4 Rubber sealing ring
5 Smaller safety element

. IMPORTANT !
RENEWING OF FILTER ELEMENTS AFTER THIRD ( 3RD ) CLEANING OR AFTER
TWO ( 2 ) YEARS OPERATION AT THE LATEST.

7.8.1.1. CLEANING / REPLACEMENT OF THE FILTER ELEMENTS

The main filter elements can be wet− or dry cleaned. Wet cleaning is only required when the filter element
is oily or sooty. The filter elements should be replaced after being cleaned 3 times, latest after two ( 2 ) years
operation.
The smaller safety elements should not be cleaned or rinsed. The safety element should be replaced
(together with the main filter elements) latest after two ( 2 ) years operation.

7.8.1.2. DRY CLEANING

− Remove the wing nut with seal, take out main filter element
− Clean the element with compressed air gun from inside out (air pressure not to exceed 5 bar)
− The element should not be hit in an attempt to clean it. This could lead to damage of the element.
− Check the wing nut of the safety element for correct tightness.
− Visually check the seals and metal parts for any damages, use a light to check the filter element from
inside − even a small damage will create a bright light spot.
− Together with the new main filter element a new sealing ring is supplied with.
− Reassemble the air filter and check all intake components for eventual cracks and tightness.
− Check all clamps, brackets etc. for correct tightness. Damaged parts / filters must be replaced.

−7.31− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.9. INSTRUCTIONS FOR STARTER BATTERIES

7.9.1. WARNING NOTES AND SAFETY REGULATIONS

− Follow information on the battery, in the instructions for use

i and instructions for operating the crane.

− Wear eye protection

− Wear Safety gloves

Explosion hazard:

A highly−explosive oxyhydrogen gas mixture occurs when charging batteries,

therefore:

Fires, sparks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited !

− Avoid causing sparks when dealing with cables and electrical equipment
− avoid short circuits

Corrosice hazard:

Battery acid is highly corrosive, therefore:

First aid:

− Rinse off acid splashed in the eyes immediately for several minutes with clear water.
Then consult a doctor immediately !
− Neutralize acid splash on skin or clothes immediately with azid neutralizer (soda)
or soap suds and rinse with plenty of water.
− If acid is consumed, consult a doctor immediately !

Warning note:

− Keep children away from acid and batteries

− Do not place batteries in direct daylight without protection
− Discharged batteries can freeze up, therefore store in an
area free from frost

Disposal:

− Hand in old batteries at a collection point. For transport follow the instructions
Storage and transport".
− Never dispose of old batteries as domestic waste.

L284 −7.32−
 MAINTENANCE
7.9.2. STORAGE AND TRANSPORT

− Unfilled batteries do not require any maintenance. Store in a cold and dry place (free from frost).
− Recharge filled batteries when the acid density falls to a minimum of 1,210 kg / liter (1,180 kg / liter in
the case of electrolyte 1,230 kg / liter − refer to item Charging outside the crane".
− Filled batteries are to be transported and stored upright otherwise acid can escape.
− During transport, secure batteries to prevent tipping over.

7.9.3. COMMISSIONING

Batteries supplied as spare parts are unfilled, dry charged, are ready for operation after filling with battery acid
without initial charging.

− When filling, the temperature of the battery and the acid should be at least 10°C (50°F)
− Remove sealing plugs
− Fill the individual cells of the battery with sulphuric acid in accordance with VDE
of density 1,280 kg / liter (for tropical countries 1,230 kg / liter) up to the maximum acid level mark
or 15 mm (0,59") above the upper edge of the plates.
− Allow batteries to rest for 15 minutes, tilt slightly several times and top up acid if required.
− Screw in sealing plugs securely or press in. Wipe off any acid splash.

Batteries filled are ready for operation.

. NOTE !
If the battery does not provide an adequate starting performance as a result of too low temperatures
or unfavourable storage conditions, recharge the battery (refer to charging outside the crane")

7.9.4. INSTALLATION IN THE CRANE

− Prior installing and removing the batteries, switch off the engine and electrical equipment.
− Avoid short circuits due to tools
− When removing, first disconnect the negative poles ( − ), then the positive poles ( + ).
− Prior to installing the batteries, clean the mounting area / battery carrier and protection cover.
− Clamp batteries rigidly
− Clean battery poles and clamps and other fixings and lubricate slightly with acid−free grease (for
example with BOSCH Ft40v1).
− When installing , first connect positive poles ( + ), then negative poles ( − ). Check pole clamps
for firm seating.

7.9.5. CHARGING BATTERIES OUTSIDE THE CRANE

− The batteries should be removed from the crane for recharging.

− Batteries must only be charged with direct current DC. Connect positive pole ( + ) of battery to
positive pole ( + ) of the charger and negative pole ( − ) of battery to negative pole ( − ) of charger.
− Only switch on charger after connecting it to the battery. When charging is complete, first switch off teh
charger.
− 1 / 10 of the capacity is recommended as the charging current (e.g. 44Ah : 10 = 4,4 A charging current).
− The acid temperature must not exceed 55°C (131°F) during charging. Interrupt charging if this
temperature is exceeded.
− The battery is fully charged when the acid density and the charging voltage have stopped rising
for two (2) hours.
− After charging, check the acid level and top up if required with distilled water up to the
maximum acid level mark or 15 mm (0,59") above the upper edge of the plates.
− Ensure adequate ventilation when charging.

−7.33− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.9.6. MAINTENANCE

The following instructions should be followed in order to achieve a long battery life:
− Keep the surface on the batteries clean and dry
− Clean the terminals and cable connectors regularly and generously grease with acid−free grease
(for example with BOSCH Ft40v1). Oil and grease must never come into contact with the sealing
compound.
− Check acid level regularly and replenish with distilled water, if required.

sealing plug
distilled water

acid

− Never place tools or other equipment on the batteries ( The protection plate is not a storage place !)

ATTENTION !
Never top up acid ! Do not use so called improving agents !
Do not place tools or other equipment on the batteries !

− The state of charge of the batteries can only be checked by making an acid density measurement using
a hydrometer. If the acid density is below 1,210 kg / liter (or 1,180 kg / liter in the case of electrolyte
1,230 kg / liter ) the battery has to be recharged ( see charging batteries outside the crane  ).
At this acid density the batteries must be protected against freezing down to −15°C (−5°F) at 1,280
kg / liter down to −70°C (−94°F).

1,280 kg / liter = 100% charge

1,200 kg / liter = 50% charge
1,120 kg / liter = 0% charge

L284 −7.34−
 MAINTENANCE
7.9.7. AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY / CHARGING OF BATTERIES

During stand−by of the crane the batteries installed on the crane will be serviced by a battery charger installed
on the crane − as long as the auxiliary power supply (shore supply) is connected to the crane.

240 V AC power supply

from switch box

power supply to alternator,

ignition, etc.

battery charger units

to control panel,
cold start valve

starter motor

battery main switch

. NOTE !
SHOULD THE CRANE BE NOT OPERATED OVER A LONGER PERIOD (i.e. weekend, etc)
CONNECT THE AUXILIARY (SHORE−) SUPPLY IN ORDER TO HAVE THE BATTERY CHARGERS
OPERATIONAL AND THE STAND BY HEATING SYSTEM RUNNING !

. NOTE !
DO NOT SWITCH OFF THE BATTERIE MAIN SWITCH − OTHERWISE BATTERIES ARE DISCON

NECTED FROM THE BATTERIE CHARGER UNITS ! SWITCHING OFF IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR
MAINTENANCE TO THE SYSTEM OR WHEN PERFORMING WELDING REPAIR WORK ON THE
CRANE !

7.9.8. TAKING BATTERIES OUT OF SERVICE

− Charge batteries and store in a cold and dry place (free from frost).
− Check state of charge regularly (refer to maintenance")

. IMPORTANT !
Batteries which are not in use should be recharged once a month or to be maintained
via battery charger on a continuous charge of 0,06 A (60 mA).
Fully discharge and charge every three ( 3 ) months.

−7.35− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.10. MAINTENANCE OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

7.10.1. GENERAL
The correct function of the hydraulic system depends on maintenance. The biggest problem is impurity of
the hydraulic oil. The checking of filters is very important and the renewing as well as the cleaning of filters
and oil should be carried out accoding to the maintenance list.
Check the hydraulic system daily for leakages.

7.10.2. FILTER ELEMENTS

Initially the filter cartridge must be exchanged after 100 working hours and then every 500 working
hours.

PRESSURE FILTER RETURN FLOW FILTER Filter cover

Electric or mechanic to be removed
dirt indicatior for exchange

Tank plate
Safety bypass valve Oil inlet
in case of dirty filter

Oil outlet Oil inlet

Filter element

Filter element

Oil outlet Oil outlet

Filter cover
to be removed
for exchange
7.10.3. HYDRAULIC FLUID
Change the oil initially after approximately 500 working hours and then every 1500 working hours.
We recommend that a oil sample of the used hydraulic fluid (approx. 0,25 l), which has to be drawn from
the system (out of a filter), is submitted to the oil supplier for analysis. The oil supplier will inform you about
the condition of the oil and recommend a new time for an oil exchange.
Hydraulic oil cleanliness requirement code: 18/15 ISO 4406
9 NAS 1638
At first operation used hydraulic oil:
PANOLIN HLP SYNTH 68 (temp. range: −55°C to +45°C) (−67°F−113°F)
7.10.4. FLUSHING OF HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT AND PREFILLING THE PUMPS
It is necessary to flush the hydraulic circuits, if any dirt or solid particles have penetrated. This can occur
when a pump or motor is damaged or a valve or cylinder (ram) fails. Depending on the nature and extent
of the damage, flush thoroughly all affected pipes, filters and the hydraulic oil tank.

ATTENTION !
Before operating the crane after an oil exchange or an pump repair, all
pumps and respective suction lines in CLOSED hydraulic circuits must
be prefilled with hydraulic oil !
In OPEN hydraulic circuits the screw on the suction pipe flanged to the
pump must be loosen lightly. Start engine and let the air escape from
the suction pipe until oil is coming out between screw and threat. Then
the screw must be fastened again !

L284 −7.36−
 MAINTENANCE
7.10.5. MAINTENANCE OF HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS

7.10.5.1. GENERAL

The piston rods are specially protected against corrosion and other effects of climatic conditions and salt
laden atmosphere.

During operation of the hydraulic rams or cylinders, they are self lubricated and are maintenance free.
However, if the hydraulic rams or cylinders are not operated over a longer period (i.e. the crane is supported
on the propping pads for more than one week) − we do recommend to apply a thin layer of multi purpose
grease onto the piston rods as an additional protection to the piston rods.

7.10.6. MAINTENANCE OF OIL COOLERS AND RADIATORS

The cooling lamellas of the oil cooler units (hydraulic oil coolers, gear oil coolers) and radiator units (radiator,
intercooler) have to be FREE OF DIRT to achieve a sufficient cooling capacity.
Therefore they have to be inspected visually at least every week and cleaned, if necessary.

7.10.6.1. CLEANING OF OIL COOLER UNITS

Depending on the kind of dirt on the lamellas of oil cooler units (hydraulic oil cooler, winch gear oil cooler,
splitter gearbox oil cooler) the following methods may be used:
DRY DUST => Clean with air pressure (max. pressure 10 bar (145 psi))
WET DUST => Clean with steam cleaner (max. pressure 150 bar (2176 psi))
OILY DUST => Clean with steam cleaner (max. pressure 150 bar (2176 psi)) and add
solvent cleaner

7.10.6.2. CLEANING OF RADIATOR UNITS

Depending on the kind of dirt on the lamellas of radiator units (engine water cooler, intercooler) the following
methods may be used:
DRY DUST => Clean with air pressure (max. pressure 3 − 4 bar) (43−58 psi)
WET DUST => Clean with steam cleaner (max. pressure 3 − 4 bar) (43−58 psi)
OILY DUST => Clean with steam cleaner (max. pressure 3 − 4 bar) (43−58 psi)
and add solvent cleaner

. IMPORTANT !
If in doubt of the correct cleaning method for a certain type of dirt, contact any LIEBHERR represen

tative for advice !

−7.37− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.11. LIEBHERR CONDITION MONITORING

7.11.1. GENERAL

The LIEBHERR CONDITION MONITORING system for major components in a crane (e.g. diesel engine,
distribution gear, winch gear etc.) relies on oil analysis.
Objectives: − Prevent major failure
− Reduce downtime
− Minimise repair cost.
The idea of condition monitoring by spectrometric analysis of used oils is not new, it was first used in preven

tative maintenance programmes to solve the problem of short engine life.
Economically it is therefore essential for crane owners/operators to be aware of abnormal conditions before
they become critical problems.
Condition monitoring through oil analysis is an excellent way to achieve this in units such as engines, trans

missions and other oil filled systems.

7.11.2. TECHNIQUES EMPLOYED IN CONDITION MONITORING

Condition monitoring involves monitoring wear metals and physical parameters. Comprehensive and reli

able programmes are made up of three parts:
a) spectroscopic metal analysis
b) physical and chemical oil tests
c) Interpretation and diagnosis of data
Specific oil tests and spectrometric metal analysis are necessary to evaluate the true machine and oil condi

tion.
The ideal combination of tests are given below, with the information to be gained from each. It will be evident
that the purposes of the tests tend to overlap other tests. This is deliberate action, to ensure results of one
test is confirmed by data from another. The work is repeated if this is not the case.
Used tests:
− Wear and additive metal analysis
− Viscosity
− Fuel dilution
− Oil condition index OCI
− Dispersancy
− Water/Glycol/Antifreeze
− Environmetal dirt
− Total base number
− Particle count

L284 −7.38−
 MAINTENANCE
7.11.2.1. SPECTROSCOPIC METAL ANALYSIS AND SIGNIFICANCE

Metals determined Significance

Barium Additive metals
Calcium Oil type
Magnesium contamination by other oil
Zinc Additive metals
Sodium Additive metals
Silicon Coolant contamination
Aluminium Upper cylinder and bearing, wear accessory drives, thrust
washers
Chromium Ring and seal wear, hydraulic rod wear
Molybdenum Additive metal, ring and seal wear
Copper bearing and bushing wear, thrust washers and clutch discs,
cooler and turbo wear
Lead Bearing and cooler wear, corrosion, petrol contamination
Tin Bearing and liner wear
Manganese Wear to steel components
Titanium Environmental contamination in special cases
Nickel compressor tube wear, special steel component wear, fuel
contamination
Silver Bearing and liner wear in special cases
Vanadium Valve stem wear, special steel component wear, fuel contami

nation
The level of wear metals used to assess abnormal conditions differ for each engine or unit type, indeed they
differ slightly for particular units of one type.
The information required must, therefore, be built−up for each unit by regular monitoring. Nevertheless,
regular condition monitoring on a particular machine ultimately relies, not on the actual metallic values, but
on sudden increases from the average.

7.11.2.2. VISCOSITY

The viscosity of the oil is important for its performance. It depends very much on the working conditions (e.g.
temperature) and the time the oil has been in use. A viscosity change of 10 % is considered abnormal.

7.11.2.3. FUEL DILUTION

This is measured by either distillation or flash point. This test is essential to detect over rich mixtures, faulty
injector systems and leaking pipework etc. An excess of fuel can lead to poor lubrication and excessive wear
or failure. 5 % is considered abnormal.

7.11.2.4. OIL CONDITION INDEX OCI

The OCI is a measure of the conductivity of the oil. It indicates the concentration of soot and other conducting
materials present in the sample, e.g. water and metal particles. An arbitrary scal of 0−40 is used. A value
of 10−12 is typical of new oils and values up to 28 are typical of used oils in good condition. Higher values
indicate a problem may exist. Again to establish the cause of an increase in the OCI value, other tests must
be carried out.

−7.39− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.11.2.5. DISPERSANCY

This is relevant to engine oils only, and is simply assessed by the blotter spot method.
Engine oils contain detergents and dispersants to disperse soot and other insoluble carbon residues
throughout the oil. If insufficient is present the solids will coagulate to form sludges. These will tend to block
passage ways etc. and prevent lubrication of vital components.
Generally, an even distribution of soot is a good sign and a non−even distribution is a poor sign. This in

formation is used with the other data to assess the condition of the oil.

7.11.2.6. GLYCOL − ANTIFREEZE − WATER

Where water is detected it is measured by distillation or other means to establish its concentration. More
than 0.2% is considered significat. Having established water is present, it is necessary to identify its origin.
The options include:
1. Coolant contamination
2. Condensation
3. supply tank contamination

7.11.2.7. ENVIRONMENTAL DIRT

The third major cause of engine or machine failure is dirt contamination. It acts as an abrasive on pistons
rings, liners and bearings, etc. to cause severe problems.

7.11.2.8. TOTAL BASE NUMBER

To protect the crankcase from acid attack by corrosive acids produced in the combustion chamber, the lubri

cant contains a degree of reserve alkalinity. This reserve alkalinity is expressed as mg of KoH/gm of oil and
is described as the Total Base Number (TBN). It is measured by one of two methods adopted by the Institute
of Petroleum under the numbers IP177 and IP276 . The TBN is a measure of the neturalizing properties of
the oil.

7.11.3. OIL SAMPLE / OIL EXCHANGE

7.11.3.1. GENERAL

The FIRST OIL EXCHANGE has to be performed as stated in the MAINTENANCE LIST of the crane. This
oil exchange can not be delayed as at the "start up" period of any engine or transmission higher contamina

tion of the oil can occur. NO OIL SAMPLE IS TAKEN !

7.11.3.2. SAMPLING PERIODS

AFTER the FIRST OIL EXCHANGE the sampling periods are the same as the in the MAINTENANCE LIST
required oil exchange periods for that specific engine or transmission.

7.11.3.3. OIL EXCHANGE

NO SAMPLE HAS BEEN TAKEN: The oil has to be exchanged as stated in the crane’s MAINTE

NANCE LIST
SAMPLE HAS BEEN TAKEN: The CONDITION MONITORING REPORT will tell, if:
− the oil is still in good condition and no exchange is needed
− another sample is required
− the oil has to be exchanged
− further actions are required

L284 −7.40−
 MAINTENANCE
7.11.4. TAKING AN OIL SAMPLE

7.11.4.1. GENERAL

For taking an oil sample a special PLASTIC SYRINGE−CUM−BOTTLE−KIT is avialable:

LIEBHERR Id. No.: 885601814
The kit consists of: − Plastic syringe / bottle to take and contain the sample
− 1,5 m (49,2 ft) (of plastic tubing for easier access of the oil
− Postal carton
− Sample information form to state all important data about the oil and the unit
is was used in.

syringe
plunger tall
nozzled cap
to fit syringe

LABORATORY
LIEBHERR

plastic tube

blank cap
of syringe

PLASTIC
SYRINGE / SAMPLE
BOTTLE PLASTIC TUBE POSTAL CARTON INFORMATION FORM

7.11.4.2. HOW TO TAKE A REPRESENTATIVE OIL SAMPLE

−Ensure the engine or other units has been working for at least 15 minutes just prior to taking the sample.
−To obtain from the DRAIN PLUG allow about a quarter litre oil to empty away before holding the sampling
vessel under the free flowing oil stream.
−Drain approx. 200 ml of oil into the sampling vessel
−Close the drainage hole again and check the oil level of that system − refill if necessary
−Connect the nozzled cap with the tube to the syringe
−Shorten the plastic tube to the minimum needed lenght
−Hold the free end of the plastic tube into the sampling vessel and fill the syringe with the sampling oil by
pulling its plunger, while holding the syringe vertically with the nozzle pointing upwards.
−If the oil stops flowing before the syringe is full, loosen the cap and gently push the oil level to the top.
Re−tighten the cap and continue drawing the oil.
−When the syringe is full, discard the nozzled cap, tubing and plunger tall (twist−off). fit the blank cap
tightly.
−Fill in the provided SAMPLE INFORMATION FORM (completely !)
−Put the SAMPLE INFORMATION FORM toghether with the SYRINGE / BOTTLE into the POSTAL CARTON
−Send it to the the in section ADRESS stated adress

−7.41− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.11.4.3. SAMPLING POINTS (EXAMPLES)

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK SLEWING GEAR

SYRINGE

SYRINGE

HOISTING WINCH

SAMPLING VESSEL

SYRINGE

SAMPLING VESSEL

7.11.4.4. POST ADDRESS

LABORATORY: LLANDUDNO
GWYNEDD LL30 1SA
UNITED KINGDOM

7.11.5. CONDITION MONITORING REPORT

The results of the oil sample examination are all stated in the CONDITION MONITORING REPORT which
is sent to the stated address in the SAMPLE INFORMATION FORM. In this report a diagnosis of the oil sample
is given as well as a advice for further action.
Four different symbols are indicated to signalize the main action:

INDICATES Normal

INDICATES High result reading obtained, submit second sample for recheck

INDICATES Change oil as indicated

INDICATES Action required as indicated

See also EXAMPLE CONDITION MONITORING (ANALYSIS) REPORT" on ther following page.

L284 −7.42−
 MAINTENANCE
7.11.5.1. EXAMPLE CONDITION MONITORING (ANALYSIS) REPORT

Contacts

CUSTOMER"

The CONDITION MONITORING REPORT is provided as a DIN A4−size document and will be mailed to the
contacts given with the sample information form.

. NOTE !
IF THE RESULT OF THE DIAGNOSIS SHOULD REQUIRE AN IMMEDIATE ACTION, A COPY
OF THE CONDITION MONITORING REPORT WILL BE SENT BY FAX IN ADVANCE TO YOUR
ATTENTION OR TO THE CONTACT(S) PROVIDED WITH THE SAMPLE FORM. THE ORIGINAL
REPORT WILL BE MAILED TO THE SAME ADRESS. THEREFORE WE KINDLY ASK TO STATE
YOUR FAX−NUMBER AS WELL.

−7.43− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.11.6. FILTER PLATE AGGREGATE ROOM

1 2

1 Filter sensor 4L−S01

2 Filter sensor 4A−S17
3 Filter ( A2 ) for feed pressure circuit
4 Filter ( L2 ) for steering circuit
5 Oil tray

4 3

5 5
7.11.6.1. MAINTENANCE TO FILTERS

− During operation of the crane the filter is monitored

by the LITRONIC Control (sensors connected to filters).
− Check leaktightness, tight fit of sensor ( 5 ) and clean the
oil tray if required at appropriate intervals.
− Should one of the symbols pressure filter clogged" appear
on the screen and the buzzer sounds, the Filter element (insert)
has to be checked and to be replaced immediately
(latest at next working brake).

7.11.6.2. REPLACEMENT OF FILTER ELEMENTS

− Lower the load / auxiliary equipment safe to ground and

shut off the diesel engine. Wait a few minutes till the
pressure is reduced to 0 bar.

WARNING !
Prior replacing the filter element (insert), wait until the
pressure reads 0 bar , all parts and the hydraulic oil are down
to low temperature.

− Unscrew the lower housing ( 1 ) gently by using a spanner

− Pull out gently used filter element ( 2 ) of the lower housing

− Drain the remaining hydr. oil of the lower housing
DISPOSAL !
USED MATERIALS MUST BE PROPERLY DISPOSED OF IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE RELEVANT STATE REGULATIONS !

− Clean all parts carefully, check O−ring ( 4 ) for good condition (replace if required)
− Insert new filter element, check correct seat of O−ring ( 3, 4 ) − fill up the lower housing ( 1 ) with
new hydraulic oil − and screw lower housing clockwise (by hand only) to the upper part again.
− Tighten lower housing ( 1 ) gently with combination spanner clockwise (max. turn 30 − 45°), check
tight fit of filter sensor ( 5 ) .
− Start engine and run on idle speed first − watch indications on the screen − check for tightness
of housing after 5 minutes again.

L284 −7.44−
 MAINTENANCE
7.11.7. RETURN FLOW FILTER HYDRAILIC OIL TANK

1 2 3
ARRANGEMENT
1 Return flow filter A7
2 Float switch 4A−B12 and
Tank temperature sensor 4A−R12
3 Breather filter
4 Hydraulic oil tank

7.11.7.1. MAINTENANCE TO RETURN FLOW FILTERS

− During operation of the crane the return flow filter is monitored 1 2

by the LITRONIC Control (sensors connected to filters).
− Check leaktightness, tight fit of sensor at appropriate intervals.
− Should the symbol flowback filter clogged"
3
appear on the screen and the buzzer sound, the
Filter element (insert) has to be checked and to be
replaced immediately (latest at next working brake).
6 4
7
7.11.7.2. REPLACEMENT OF FILTER ELEMENTS
5
− Lower the load / auxiliary equipment safe to ground and
shut off the diesel engine. Wait a few minutes till the
pressure is reduced to 0 bar. 8

WARNING !
Prior replacing the filter element (insert), wait until the 9
pressure reads 0 bar , all parts and the hydraulic oil are down 1 screw, washer
to low temperature. 2 cover
3 sealing ring
− Remove plug of sensor and unscrew the cover ( 2 ) gently
4 magnet stick
by using a spanner for the screws (1) of adequate size.
5 tension spring
− Pull out gently magnet piece (4) and tension spring (5), pressure 6 pressure piece
piece (6), O−ring (7) and used filter element (8) of the filter housing 7 O−ring

DISPOSAL ! 8 filter element

USED MATERIALS MUST BE PROPERLY DISPOSED OF IN 9 filter housing
ACCORDANCE WITH THE RELEVANT STATE REGULATIONS !

− Clean all parts carefully (1 − 7, 9), check Sealing ring (3) and O−ring (7)
for good condition (replace damaged parts if required)
− Insert new filter element (8) into center of the filter housing, parts 7 − 4, check correct seat of sealing
ring and O−ring, screw the cover (2) onto the housing.
− Tighten all screws (1) on the cover plate with a spanner, connect the plug of the filter sensor 4A−S16.
− Start engine and run on idle speed first − watch indications on the screen − check for tightness
of cover after 5 minutes again.

−7.45− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.12. PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS

THE FOLLOWING ACCUMULATOR TYPES CAN BE IN THE CRANE

THE FOLLOWING ACCUMULATORS ARE IN THE CRANE:

ID. NO. DESIGNATION TYPE PIECES

510631314 SB 210 − 4A / 10 bar (145 psi) A 1

511516114 SBO 330 − 20 A / 10 bar (145 psi) A 1

TO ENSURE THE SAFETY OF THE LIFTING APPLIANCE

THE PRESSURE ACCCUMULATORS HAVE TO BE

CHECKED OR REPLACED

EVERY TWO YEARS

L284 −7.46−
 MAINTENANCE

7.13. GEARBOXES

7.13.1. DISTRIBUTION GEARBOX

There is one distribution gearbox used in the crane.

It has a force fed lubrication system and and externally mounted gear oil cooler ensures adequate cool

ing of the gear oil and the gearbox.
The gear oil pump which is flanged to the gearbox draws the oil from the drain sump via a filter and forces
it through the oil cooler and a distributor system. The distributor system ensures that all bearings and gear
wheels are lubricated. After lubrication the gear oil is collected in the drain sump again.

. NOTE !
The gear oil is always flowing through the oil cooler unit, but the oil cooler fan motor is only working
at gear oil temperatures over 110°C (230°F) (operated by a temperature switch)

Before setting into operation fill in gear oil (oil types see "TABLE OF LUBRICANTS", which is attached to
the end of this section.)
The oil change is made by using the marked points of the figure below.(oil quantities and intervals see
MAINTENANCE LIST)
The oil level inspection can be carried out by the provided dip stick.

. IMPORTANT !
CHECK OIL LEVEL ONLY, IF THE CRANE IS SHUT DOWN.

Breather plug of gearbox Filling cap,

OIL CHANGE: Dip stick for level measurement Oil content appr. 16 liters (4,2 gal)

Oil cooler return line

Pump drive Pump drive

Pump drive

Pump drive

Temperature sensor
Drainage plug
(might be extended
Drive input by a hose for easier
(diesel engine) access)
Recommendation for service
Oil change should be carried out at the working temperature of the gearbox.
It is recommended to flush the gear with a little preheated new oil. In this way any abrasives and contamina

tion can be washed off.

−7.47− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.13.2. WINCH GEARBOXES

There are two main winches on the crane.

The winch gearbox has a splash lubrication system. The gear oil of the winch is led to a winch gear oil
cooler on the slewing platform.
Before setting into operation fill in gear oil (oil types see "TABLE OF LUBRICANTS", which is attached to
the end of this section.)
The oil change is made by using the marked points of the figure on the next page (oil quantities and intervals
see MAINTENANCE LIST).
Remove the breather plug when exchanging the oil, but don’t forget to put it on again after the oil exchange.
The oil level inspection can be carried out by the provided dip stick on the side of the winch drum. For the
inspection completely screw−in the dipsticks for correct reading of oil level. The new oil is filled in through
the dip stick pipe.

. NOTE !
The maximum oil level in a winch gearbox is appr. HALF WINCH FULL.

. IMPORTANT !
CHECK OIL LEVEL ONLY, WHEN THE CRANE IS SHUT DOWN.
TO CHECK CORRECT TORQUE OF BOLTS USE TORQUE WRENCH.

OIL CHANGE: CHECK PERIODICALLY:

− Winch − correct function of upper and lower limit switches
− rope fixation points and slack rope protection device
− Gear oil cooler circuit − gear oil level and tightness of hydraulics
− cooling lamellas of the gear oil cooler unit (cleanless)

Recommendation for service

Oil change should be carried out at the working temperature of the gearboxes
It is recommended to flush the gear with a little preheated new oil. In this way any abrasives and
contamination can be washed off.

Slack rope protection

Limit switches
Hydr. motor

Overwind protection

Slack rope protection

Limit switches
Hydr. motor

Overwind protection

Oil cooler with oil

cooler motor 4A−M11

L284 −7.48−
 MAINTENANCE
.... continued winch gearboxes

Anzugsmoment: 140 NM ( M16 8.8 )

Schrauben am Gewinde und
Scheiben beidseitig mit
NEVER−SEEZ PASTE Blue Moly"
behandeln !

Tightening torque: 140 NM ( M16 8.8 )

Thread of screws and
washers on both sides to be
treated with NEVER−SEEZE Gear oil drainage point
PASTE
Blue Moly" !
Oil cooler with oil
cooler motor
4A−M11

6 6

4 5 4

1 Slack rope protection bar

2 Dip stick for gear oil level measurement and Breather plug of winch gear box
3 Gear oil drainage point
4 Hoisting winch mounting eyes
5 Rope drum
6 Fixation points for the hoisting ropes
7 Winch gear box

−7.49− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.13.3. SLEWING GEARBOXES

Each slewing gearbox used in the crane has a splashed lubrication system.
Before setting into operation fill in gear oil (oil types see "TABLE OF LUBRICANTS", which is attached to
the end of this section.)
The oil change is made by using the marked points of the figure below (oil quantities and intervals see
MAINTENANCE LIST).
Remove the breather plug when exchanging the oil, but don’t forget to put it on again after the oil exchange.
The oil level inspection can be carried out by the provided level inspection glas. The correct level is oil
level up to the middle of the inspection glass.

. IMPORTANT !
CHECK OIL LEVEL ONLY − IF THE CRANE IS SHUT DOWN !

OIL CHANGE:
1 Hydraulic motor
2 Breather plug with extension pipe (2 pcs.)
3 Multi disc brake
4 Slewing gearbox
5 Slewing pinion (engaged to gear rim of slewing
bearing)
6 Gear oil filling
7 Gear oil level inspection glas
8 Drainage hose with blind plug

1
2

7
3

Recommendation for service

Oil change should be carried out at the working temperature of the gearbox.
It is recommended to flush the gear with a little preheated new oil. In this way any abrasives and contamina

tion can be washed off.

L284 −7.50−
 MAINTENANCE
... continued SLEWING GEARBOXES

OIL CHANGE: CHECK PERIODICALLY:

− slewing gear box − gear oil level and tightness of hydraulics
− check and regrease gear rim of slewing bearing
− ckeck for correct backlash
− check correct torque of M20 fastening bolts

PINION of Slewing gear box and TOOTHED

RING on Slewing bearing to be greased with
ALUPLEX 2RHY.

BACKLASH ADJUSTMENT according

LWN 2−16−002

−7.51− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.14. MULTIPLE DISC BRAKES

GENERAL:
The spring loaded multiple disc brakes on our machines are used as HOLDING BRAKES ONLY, as the slow
down of any movement is done by the hydraulic system. Therfore they are subject to very little wear. The
brakes are only on high wear, in the case of an EMERGENCY STOP SITUATION with full load. In this case
the mulitple disc brake of the winch(es) must be inspected and checked for proper function.
The maximum holding moment of a respective machine or drive is determined by the various arrangements
of the disks and springs in these brakes.

WARNING !
For this reason, the arrangement and layout of the multi−disc−brake must
always be exact and special caution must always be exercised, when re

pairs are carried out or when brakes are replaced. Only an exact arrange

ment protects the drives from overloading as well as guaranteeing the maxi

mum holding moment !

THE PROPER ARRANGEMENT OF THE DISCS AND SPRINGS IN THE BRAKES FOR THE WINCHES
AS WELL AS FOR THE SLEWING GEAR ARE SHOWN IN THE CROSS SECTION DRAWINGS IN THE
SPARE − PARTS − LIST OF THIS CRANE !

PRINCIPLE BRAKE LAYOUT:

1 Piston 12
2 Housing 11
3 Hydraulic pressure connection
1
4 Brake disc with outer gear rim (AL)
5 Brake disc with inner gear rim (IL) 10
6 Discs bracket
7 Leak oil connection 2
8 Friction faces (RFL)
9 Outer seal 9 3

10 Inner seal
11 Outer spring for brake force (AF) 4
12 Inner spring for brake force (IF) 8
HYDRAULIC MOTOR
1 2 5
12 11

ÉÉ Ç Ç ÇÉÉ
ÇÇ É
ÉÉ Ç Ç ÇÉÉ
ÇÇ É
ÉÉÉ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
3
Ç ÇÉÉ
ÇÇ É 4

ÉÉÉ ÇÇÇ
ÉÉÉ
Ç Ç
ÉÉ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÉÉ
ÇÇ É 7

ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÉÉ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
6

8 5 4
GEAR−BOX

L284 −7.52−
 MAINTENANCE

7.15. NAF − AXLES

7.15.1. GENERAL DESIGN AND DRIVE

The NAF axles contain a permanent differential compensation. Both inward planet gears are driven via the
sun gear shaft. From the planet gears is a further drive drive, designed of drive shafts and carrier plate to
the wheel hubs.

The main drive is obtained via hydraulic motor type A2FM. A hydraulically operated lamella brake is
used as holding brake.
Should it become necessary to carry out repairs, our experience shows that only ORIGINAL SPARE PARTS
should be used. For repairs to the units we recommend that you aquire the necessary knowledge first or
you ask for assistance / advise from your local LIEBHERR CUSTOMER SERVICE.
Please always quote quote the full, exact type description including factory numbers ( see TYPE PLATE
installed ) and year of manufacture. The location of the type / identification plate is on the differential
housing close to the oil refill screw (see Drawing below).

For safety reasons, the operator should verify and service at regular intervals all the bolted assemblies and
all the important safety locks such as:
−Wheel nuts
−Axle nuts
−Bolts on the steering components and the brake system parts
−Corrosion on the carrier elements is not acceptable for operational safety reasons
−Verify seals, oil levels and lubrication points at regular intervals
−Inspect brake linings regulary
−Inspect condition of tyres regulary

. NOTE !
AFTER FIRST 100 HRS ALL SCREWS HAVE TO BE CHECKED FOR CORRECT TORQUE.
AFTERWORDS CHECK EVERY 500 HRS, AT LEAST TWICE PER YEAR.
WHEN CHECKING FOR CORRECT TORQUE RELEASE TYRES FROM GROUND − SUPPORT
UNDERCARRIAGE !

7.15.2. GENERAL LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS

LUBRICATION POINTS: see section "GENERAL LAYOUT and MAINTENANCE POINTS"

Fill levels: are checked at the provided dip sticks. Approximate filling values can be
obtained from the drawings provided in this section and the spare parts list.
Oil change: Place the vehicle in horizontal position. Draining of the oil has to be accomplished only
after operationfor a certain time period (warmed up). Clean all lubrication points before
opening them. Open the drain holes on the carrier assembly.
Fill in new oil
Check the oil level at the dip sticks
Wait a few minutes. If the oil level falls, add new oil until the oil level remains constant.
Lubrication: The pins, slewing bearings, hydraulic ram connection points can be lubricated by the
provided greese nipples (where installed centralized lubrication system) .Grease
distributors ensure that the correct quantity of grease is supplied to the individual
lubrication points. Make sure that the grease vessels are not pumped dry.

−7.53− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.15.3. GENERAL LAYOUT AND MAINTENANCE POINTS OF DRIVEN AXLES

AXLE WITH PLANETARY DRIVE GEAR, DIFFERENTIAL COMPENSATION

1 2

12
4
10

5 9

11 9

9 7 6 6 3

550 Nm

1 Slewing bearing
2 Slewing drive
3 Hydraulic drive motor
4 Positioning sensor
THE NUTS MUST BE TIGHTENED BY A
5 Hydraulic ram TORQUE WRENCH !
6 Axle with integrated differencial gear drive
7 Tyre(s)
8 Inflating valves
9 Lubrication points
10 Ventilation breather with filling screw. Separate dip stick for oil level check.
11 Gear oil drainage screw
12 Distribution block to greasing points (4 connections)

. NOTE !
TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR BOLTS / NUTS M22 x 1,5 = 500 − 550 Nm !

L284 −7.54−
 MAINTENANCE
7.15.4. GENERAL LAYOUT AND MAINTENANCE POINTS OF NON DRIVEN AXLES

RIGID AXLE

1 2

9
4

5 8

8 8

550 Nm

1 Slewing bearing THE NUTS MUST BE TIGHTENED BY A

2 Slewing drive TORQUE WRENCH !

3 Rigid axle
4 Positioning sensor
5 Hydraulic ram
6 Tyre(s)
7 Inflating valves
8 Lubrication points
9 Disribution block to greasing points

. NOTE !
TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR BOLTS / NUTS M22 x 1,5 = 500 − 550 Nm !

−7.55− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.15.5. TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR
NAF" AXLES

THREAD TORQUE ( Nm )
Bolt grade 8.8 Bolt grade 10.9 Bolt grade 12.9

M 8 22,5 32,4 38,7

M 10 45 63 75,6
M 12 77,4 109 131
M 16 194 270 324
M 20 369 522 630
M 24 639 900 1080
M 27 945 1305 1575
M 30 1260 1800 2160

7.15.6. RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS CHART BY MANUFACTURERS

Lubricating point Quantity Lubricant

DIFFERENTIAL / PLANET GEAR 8,5 l SAE 90 (Hypoidoil)

INSIDE WHEEL BEARING necessary Brand EP grease

. NOTE !
SEE ALSO LIEBHERR TABLE OF LUBRICANTS ENCLOSED AT THE END OF THIS PART!

Examples of brand−EP−gear oil SAE 90 specification: API−GL 5 / MIL−L−2105 B

Fuchs Renogar HLS 90
Texaco Multigear EP 90, Geartex EP−B SAE 85W 90
Mobil Mobilube HD 90−A, Mobilube SHC 75 W−90
Esso GX 90
Shell Spirax HD 90, Spirax MB 90
BP Hypogear 90 EP
ELF Tranself Typ B SAE 80W−90
Examples for brand−EP−multiple grease, lithium saponified, water resistant (DIN 51825)
Klüber Microlube GL 261, Klüberplex BE 31−502
Tripol Tripol 3020 / 1000−1

7.15.7. SERVICE INTERVALS FOR AXLES (DRIVEN AND NON−DRIVEN)

starting first every every every

Service location 0 hrs 250 hrs 500 hrs 2000 hrs 4000 hrs

Differential, planet gear initial filling 2 3 2

and outer Wheel bearing
Wheelnuts 4 4
Various visible bolts / nuts 4
Inside wheel bearing 5
Tyre pressure 10 bar (145 4, X 4, X 4, X
psi)

2 Oil change 3 Oil level control X daily routine

4 Checking 5 Renew grease (permanent filling)

L284 −7.56−
 MAINTENANCE
7.15.7.1. AXLE WITH PLANETARY DRIVE GEARS, DIFFERENTIAL COMPENSATION

1 2
GENERAL LAYOUT

7 7

8 8

DETAIL

7 4 5 6 7

Detail "WHEEL BEARINGS" nuts

cover
halve wave shaft
O−ring
Shaft sealing ring
O−ring
Sealing ring

1 Type / identification plate 2 Airbreather and oil filling screw

3 Dip stick to check gear oil leve 4 Gear oil drainage screw
5 Grease nippel 6 Gear oil drainage screw
7 Wheel nuts M22 (Torque = 500−550 Nm) 8 Wheel bearings

. NOTE !
For Service−Intervals see
SERVICE INTERVALS FOR AXLES" or
MAINTENANCE LIST".

−7.57− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.15.7.2. RIGID AXLE

GENERAL LAYOUT

2 2

DETAIL

3 4

Detail "WHEEL BEARINGS" nuts

cover
securing tab
O−ring securing bolts
Shaft sealing ring
O−ring
Sealing ring

1 Type / identification plate 2 Wheel bearings

3 Wheel nuts M22 (Torque = 500−550 Nm) 4 Grease nippel

. NOTE !
For Service−Intervals see
SERVICE INTERVALS FOR AXLES" or
MAINTENANCE LIST".

L284 −7.58−
 MAINTENANCE
7.15.8. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

7.15.8.1. WORKING CONDITIONS AND TOOLS

An orderly repair is achieved if the place of work is adequately illuminated and clean. There should be also
adequate space allowed for laying out components and proup parts.
Furthermore, it is important to have available a complete set of high quality tools
(see list STANDARD TOOLS).

. NOTE !
IN ADDITION A CERTAIN AMOUNT OF TECHNICAL SKILL IS REQUIRED AND FOR CERTAIN RE

PAIRS, AQUIRE THE NECESSARY KNOWLEDGE FIRST OR YOU ASK FOR ASSISTANCE / AD

VISE FROM YOUR LOCAL LIEBHERR CUSTOMER SERVICE.

7.15.8.2. SERVICE INTERVALS

NAF Axles are constructed and manufactured as a result of many ears of experience and knowledge of ex

pectations and requirements of heavy machinery.

Smooth and reliable running of the equipment can however, only to be obtained if regular maintenance and
care is given. Adhering to regular service intervals and use of correct lubricants as per the lubricants chart
are also part of this. Special tools are not required for servicing.

7.15.8.3. INITIAL GEAR OIL FILLING

ATTENTION !
New axles are delivered without gear oil !

. NOTE !
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR, PLANET GEAR AND OUTER WHEEL BEARING SHARE THE SAME OIL
CHAMBER. THE OIL LEVEL MUST BE CHECKED AFTER 10 MINUTES AGAIN AND IF
NECESSARY REFILLED.

7.15.8.4. OIL CHANGE

. NOTE !
REMOVE DIRT AND GRIME FROM THE AREA AROUND BREATHER, OIL DRAIN PLUGS AND
THE DIPSTICK PRIOR COMMENCING WORK.

Change the oil only if the oil is on working temperature. Remove breather and then open the oil drain plug
and drain oil completely. refill new oil according to lubricants chart until it reahces the upper mark of the
dipstick.

ATTENTION !
FILLED UP AND LABELLED PACKING UNITS OF USED LUBRICANTS,
OLD PARTS, PAINTS, THINNERS AND CLEANING COMPONENTS TO BE
RETURNED UNDER MAXIMUM SAFETY AND IN COMPLIANCE TO
SPECIAL LOCAL RULES AND REGULATIONS TO YOUR NEXT DISPOSAL
DEPOSITION.

−7.59− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.15.8.5. CHECKING GEAR OIL CONTROL

. NOTE !
CLEAN SURROUNDING AREA OF DIPSTICK PRIOR COMMENCING WORK !

Differential, planetary gear and outer wheel bearing ( on driven axles only !) .
If necessary top up gear oil level to the upper control marking on the dipstick.

7.15.8.6. CHECKING ALL NUTS AND BOLTS

ALL VISIBLE NUTS AND BOLTS

Through strain and crane vibrations nuts and bolts can settle". In order to avoid unnecessary damage or
leakages preventative tightening is recommended.
WHEEL NUTS

Through strain and crane vibrations the wheel nuts can settle". Regular tightening will avoid possible dam

age to the bearing centralisation on the wheel. Tightening torque for wheel nuts is 500 − 550 Nm.

7.15.8.7. GREASE − PERMANENT FILLING RENEW

Every 4000 operating hours or latest after 4 years − whatever comes first − the permanent grease filling
on the wheel bearings must be renewed.

L284 −7.60−
 MAINTENANCE
7.15.9. CHECKING OF THE COMPENSATING CYLINDERS AT THE AXLE SETS

The compensating cylinders of the axle sets must be in a prescribed position to ensure a reliable function of
the travelling gear.

ATTENTION !
Following conditions have to be complied before checking the compen
sating cylinders:
−the ground must be sound and level
−the crane must be lowered onto the tyres
−the jib has to be within the indicated limits on travel operation picture
page 1 (indication of
load limit for travelling")

LAYOUT OF THE AXLE SETS (E. G. NON DRIVEN AXLE):

Detail ’I’:
1
’I’

100±10

2 3

H1 H3
H2

1 Compensating cylinder 2 Tyre

3 Axle 4 Colour margin (and groove) on piston rod

The distance between the compensating cylinder and the colour margin on the piston rod has to be within
100 ± 10 mm (3,93"±0,93"). This inspection has to be done for each cylinder group (3−4 groups, refer to
hydraulic schematic). When remaining under 90 mm, the cylinders have to be set to the correct value (100
± 10 mm)(3,93"±0,93").

. IMPORTANT !
The sum of the measurements (H1+H2+H3) at the driven out compensating cylinders must be
equal to the number of axle sets multiplied with 100 of the current cylinder group.
Example: number of axle sets = 3, that is 3 x 100±10 = 300±30. The sum of the measurements
(H1+H2+H3) must be between min. 270 mm (10,62") and max. 330 mm (12,99"), otherwise the
compensating cylinders of the current cylinder group must readjusted.

−7.61− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.15.10. ADJUSTMENT OF THE COMPENSATING CYLINDER AT THE AXLE SETS

The correct adjustment of the compensating cylinders is very important, since a wrong adjustment can
cause extremely high pressures in the hydraulic circuit of the cylinder group. This can lead to damage of
the cylinders, valves and hydraulic connections.
Overview:

Travelling direction
3 1

Z25B Z25D
Z25A Z25C

4 2 A

A... hand valves S10, S11 in open position

driven axle non driven axle

Detail ’I’:

’I’
’X’ 5

100±10

1 cylinder group 1
2 cylinder group 2
3 cylinder group 3
4 cylinder group 4
5 colour margin and groove on piston rod
Z25A, Z25B, Z25C, Z25D valve block for height adjustment of the cylinder groups
S10, S11 hand valves, not needed for adjustment of compensating cylinders

. IMPORTANT !
The hand valve (X) at the compensating cylinder of the driven axle set must stay in open position
and may not be operated!

L284 −7.62−
 MAINTENANCE
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE:
F Diesel engine running, travel operation preselected
F All propping plates are on safe / solid ground, the wheels are completely unloaded and lifted
from ground
F Remove safety bow (6) at handvalve (e.g. at valve block Z25A for cylindergroup 4)
F Operate hand lever (7) at valve block to drive in and out once the compensating cylinders of a
cylinder group completely.
F Drive in cylinder from the max. extended position.
F Check the measurement at the piston rods (H1, H2, H3) and drive in the compensating cylinder
until the average measurement (100 ± 10 mm) (3,93"±0,93") is reached.
F Fix safety bow (6) to the valve block in order to prevent inadvertently adjusting of the cylinder
group.
F Each cylinder group has to be adjusted seperately.

. NOTE !
At 3−point support the cylinder groups 1 and 2 are hydraulically connected together to one cylin

der group!

Î
− drive out cylinder:

6
Î a
move hand lever (7) in direction a"

Î − drive in cylinder:

Î
7 move hand lever (7) in direction b"

Î
Example:
Î b

Number of axle sets in a cylinder group: 3

H1 H3
H2

Sum of measurements of driven out piston rods: 300 mm

H1 + H2 + H3 = 300±30 mm

. IMPORTANT !
The sum of the measurements (H1+H2+H3) at the driven out compensating cylinders must be
equal to the number of axle sets multiplied with 100 of the current cylinder group.
Example: number of axle sets = 3, that is 3 x 100±10 = 300±30. The sum of the measurements
(H1+H2+H3) must be between min. 270 mm (10,62") and max. 330 mm (12,99"), otherwise the
compensating cylinders of the current cylinder group must readjusted.

−7.63− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.16. PUMPING UP THE TYRES

All tyres on the crane need to be pressurized with 10 bar of air pressure.
As an option following equipment can be purchased with the crane:
PERIODICALLY TYRE CHECK−UP:
− check for correct air pressure on all tyres ( 10 bar ) (145 psi)
− check tyres for any mechanical damages, replace
tyres if required
− if the profile on the running surface reads below 1mm,
have the tyre(s) replaced (for safety reasons)
− always install protection cap onto inflating valves

. NOTE !
PRIOR LOWERING UNDERCARRIAGE ONTO TYRES CKECK IF AREA IS CLEAN
( no steel−pins, broken glass, etc. ), TO AVOID MECHANICAL DAMAGES TO TYRES !

145 psi

L284 −7.64−
 MAINTENANCE

7.17. CENTRALIZED LUBRICATION SYSTEMS

7.17.1. DESCRIPTION CENTRALIZED GREASING PUMP

The crane is equippped with a so called centralized lubrication (greasing) system, by means of automatic
operated operated grease pumps installed on the crane. Each centralized greasing pump is an electrically
driven multi−grease−line−pump. Maximum designed operating pressure is 300 bar, the system is pro

tected against overpressure by an integrated pressure relieve valve.
TECHNICAL DATAS
Type: EP−2
Ambient temperature: −30°C up to +80°C (22°F−176°F)
Greasing medium: AVIALITH 2EP
Outputs: max. three outputs
Delivery amount per output: max. 0,12cm3 / Cycle = 1,8cm3 / min (
Drive: 24V DC, DC−motor n = 15rev/min
Power requirement at 300 bar: max. 1A

7.17.2. FUNCTIONAL PRINCIPLE PUMP

The DC−motor (10) drives continuously the eccentric gear (5) with the pressure ring (6). The eccentric gear
causes the suction− and compression stroke of the delivery piston (7), whereas the integrated non return
valve (8) does have the function that no grease can be drawn from the main line.
The stirrer bracket (2) forces the grease out from the storage tank (1) via filter plate (4) into the suction space
of the pump housing (3). The filter plate does brake up included air bubbles.
The wiper rubber on the stirrer bracket (2) ensures good visibility to check the content of grease in the stor

age tank (1). Refilling of the storage tank via built−in grease nippel in the pump housing. The pressure limita

tion valve is adjusted to 300 bar (factory adjusted).

ATTENTION !
Do not empty the storage tank of the pumps completely ! Ckeck the system
daily for correct operation. Inspect at least once per week for correct grease
content.

−7.65− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.17.3. FUNCTIONAL PRINCIPLE GREASING SYSTEM

The centralized greasing system ist a so called "PROGRESSIVE−DEVICE", which can deliver lubricants up
to viscosity class 2. We recommend to use the following grease:

AVIALITH 2EP

The progressive greasing device does ensure, that one greasing point after one is serviced by the pump,
the complete system is protected against overpressure by one built−in pressure limitation valve. Should
one greasing point not accept any grease supplied from the distribution block − that means the pressure
would increase in the system to appr. 350 bar − the built−in pressure limitation valve would be activated
and the pressure released imediately.
The ELECTRICALLY OPERATED PISTON PUMP delivers the grease first to the MAIN DISTRIBUTION
BLOCK. This main distribution block does have the task to share evenly the grease to the SECONDARY
DISTRIBUTION BLOCK(S). The secondary distribution block(s) share evenly the grease to each SINGLE
GREASING POINT(S).
1 Storage tank
2 Markings max. filling level
3 Blind plug (Distributor connection)
4 Refill connection (grease nippel)
1 5 Pump adjustments (see DETAIL "A")
6 Power supply cable
2 7 Grease nipple (manual greasing connection)
9 8 Dosing non return valve
8 9 Pressure limitation valve
10 Main distributor block
3
11 Secondary distributor block
12 Blind plug of last distributor block
4
11
5 ("A")
6
7

12

10

. NOTE !
IF GREASE IS RELEASED VIA PRESSURE LIMITATION VALVE (POS 9) CHECK THE INDIVIDUAL
GREASING CIRCUIT FOR CORRECT FUNCTION !

. NOTE !
CHECK SYSTEM DAILY FOR CORRECT OPERATION. INSPECT THE PUMP(S) AT LEAST EVERY
WEEK FOR CORRECT GREASE CONTENT.

. NOTE !
TO REFILL THE PUMP’S CONTAINER CONNECT A GREASE GUN TO THE PROVIDED
GREASE NIPPLE (POS 4) !

ATTENTION !
Do not empty the container of the pumps completely! If air is in the main
grease lines, the greasing system doesn’t work! In this case the system has
to be air bleeded after each distribution block!

L284 −7.66−
 MAINTENANCE
7.17.4. CONTROL AND ADJUSTMENTS TO THE CENTRALIZED GREASING PUMP

Whenever the CRANE IS OPERATED or TRAVELLING OPERATION is preselected on the crane and if the
crane remains in TRAVELLING OPERATION. The pump(s) are operated according to the adjusted GREAS

ING INTERVAL and GREASING TIME.

13 Greasing time in minutes (adjustm. range 2 − 32 min)

14 Greasing interval in h (adjustm. range 0,5 − 8 hours)
DETAIL "A" 15 Control LED (red)

13 14 15

7.17.5. PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS FOR GREASING PUMPS

GREASING PUMP UNDERCARRIAGE:

Greasing interval: 3 hour

Greasing time: 3 min.

GREASING PUMP SLEWING PLATFORM:

Greasing interval: 2 hour

Greasing time: 1 min.

GREASING PUMP TOWER :

Greasing interval: 2 hours

Greasing time: 4 min.

GREASING PUMP JIB−HEAD :

Greasing interval: 2 hours

Greasing time: 1 min.

−7.67− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.17.6. PROGRESSIVE PISTON DISTRIBUTOR BLOCKS

THE PROGRESSIVE PISTON DISTRIBUTORS (DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS) are devices with a so called FOL

LOW−UP CONTROL. The pistons are controlled in such way, that the lubricant egresses by force succes

sively through the output. Should failures occur (i.e. flow of lubricant, twisting of bushes internal of the
block itself or within the greasing circuit), the PROGRESSIVE PISTON DISTRIBUTORS will be
blocked. This ‘blocking‘ is used for controlling of correct function of the distributors.

. NOTE !
‘Blocking‘ in connection with manual operated grease pumps would mean an enormous re

sistance (pressure). ‘Blocking‘ with automatic grease pumps would mean release of grease
(pressure) via installed PRESSURE LIMITATION VALVE.
The PROGRESSIVE PISTON DISTRIBUTORS are manufactured in a variable block system, which can be
extended as required.
For correct, reliable function of the PROGRESSIVE PISTON DISTRIBUTORS − always three (3) pistons resp.
three (3) transfer elements are required.

COLLECTING OF OUTPUTS

2 Outputs per distribution block

(standard design) 1 Output per distribution block

threaded stud SW 2 locking screw SW 5

1 − fold 2 − fold

COLLECTING A NUMBER OF OUTPUTS

i.e. 3 OUTPUTS i.e. 4 OUTPUTS

3 − fold 4 − fold

1 − fold
threaded stud SW 2

NON RETURN VALVE operated with progressive−distributor blocks

NON RETURN VALVES are operated in

connection with main distribution blocks
and are required to resist an eventual
feed−back pressure by a complete
greasing circuit or single greasing point.

L284 −7.68−
 MAINTENANCE
7.17.7. ON THE UNDERCARRIAGE

There is one electrically operated piston pump for the centralized lubrication system on the undercarriage
of this crane.
The pump is operated for appr. 3 min., whenever TRAVELLING OPERATION is preselected on the crane and
if the crane remains (theoretically) in TRAVELLING OPERATION every 3 hours.

. NOTE !
CHECK SYSTEM DAILY FOR CORRECT OPERATION. INSPECT THE PUMP AT LEAST
EVERY WEEK FOR CORRECT GREASE CONTENT.

RECOMMENDED GREASE TO BE USED:

AVIALITH 2EP

PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS

Greasing interval: 3 hrs

Greasing time: 3 min.

−7.69− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.17.8. ON THE SLEWING PLATFORM

There is one electrically controlled and operated pump for the centralized lubrication system on the slewing
platform .
The pump on the slewing platform is operated for appr. 2 min. every 1 hour .

. NOTE !
CHECK SYSTEM DAILY FOR CORRECT OPERATION. INSPECT THE PUMP AT LEAST
EVERY WEEK FOR CORRECT GREASE CONTENT.

RECOMMENDED GREASE TO BE USED:

AVIALITH 2EP

PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS :

Greasing interval: 1h
Greasing time: 2 min.

L284 −7.70−
 MAINTENANCE
7.17.9. ON THE TOWER

The pump on the tower is operated for appr. 4 min. every 2 hours.

. NOTE !
CHECK SYSTEM DAILY FOR CORRECT OPERATION. INSPECT THE PUMP AT LEAST
EVERY WEEK FOR CORRECT GREASE CONTENT.

RECOMMENDED GREASE TO BE USED:

AVIALITH 2EP

PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS :

Greasing interval: 2 hrs

Greasing time: 4 min.

−7.71− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.17.10. ON THE JIB HEAD

The pump on the jib head is operated for appr. 1 min. every 2 hours.

. NOTE !
CHECK SYSTEM DAILY FOR CORRECT OPERATION. INSPECT THE PUMP AT LEAST
EVERY WEEK FOR CORRECT GREASE CONTENT.

RECOMMENDED GREASE TO BE USED:

AVIALITH 2EP

PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS :

Greasing interval: 2 hrs

Greasing time: 1 min.

L284 −7.72−
 MAINTENANCE
7.17.11. MAINTENANCE DRAWING BASIC EQUIPMENT

−7.73− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.18. THREE−ROW−ROLLER SLEWING RING

7.18.1. THREE−ROW−ROLLER SLEWING RING

The three−row−roller slewing ring (4) connects the undercarriage with the slewing platform and asorbs all
axial and vertical forces due to crane operation. The slewing ring is fastened with high tensile expansion
bolts (1). For mounting the same high tensile bolts are used.
Dimensions and initial stressing force: 1

1 Thread to be greased for protection ! 2

2 Outer bolt circle
Pretension load: 1511 NM (M30 10.9)
3 Corner to be sealed with SIKAFLEX
4 Slewing bearing (is greased via the greasing sys

tem).
5 Inner bolt circle 4
6 Gear rim of roller slewing ring. Keep greased at
all times !

ATTENTION !
Treat screws at thread (pos 2 and 5) and washers
5
(both sides) with never−sieze paste
BLUE MOLY".

6
ATTENTION !
Gear rim (pos 5) to be greased, we recommend to use
GREASE SP−F AVIA ALUPLEX 2RHY.

. NOTE !
TENSIONING OF BOLTS ACCORDING WORKING INSTRUCTION LWN 21−01−008 .
(VALID ONLY AT FIRST ASSEMBLY)
ALL OTHERS, WHICH ARE NOT SPECIALLY MARKED, HAVE TO BE TIGHTENED
ACCORDING TO DIN − REGULATIONS.

L284 −7.74−
 MAINTENANCE
7.18.2. CHECKING PRETENSION LOAD

GENERAL
The pretension load has to be checked after 2 years or 5000 working hours latest.
Precondition: Fixing of slewing ring with hexagon head bolt
Used pretension tool:
Plarad pretension tool Identnr.: 914683814
Insert for LHM 100:
Socket SW 46 HSX 550 H Identnr.: 550936114 (this socket is in the scope of delivery
of the Plarad pretension tool)
Insert for LHM 150, 250, 320, 400:
Socket IN−OUT für HSX 5556/55 Identnr.: 550937014 (this socket is in the scope of delivery
of the Plarad pretension tool)

. IMPORTANT !
Only one hydraulically pretension tool may be used !
The size of the socket is given through the bolt size.

7.18.2.1. CHECKING PRETENSION LOAD AT ROLLER− / BALL SLEWING RING

Minimum eight (8) bolts have to be checked under a division of 45° (see figure below) for the nevessary pre

tension load. The necessary pretension load can be found in the drawings or in the operation / maintenance
manual (volume 1, part 7).
At any further inspection eight different bolts must be checked. At the first inspection the bolts right−angled
to the tower have to be checked first. Afterwards check the following bolts clockwise (see figure below).
Try to tighten up the bolt with the necessary pretension load. The bolt should not turn as a result of tightening.
If all checked bolts have the necessary pretension load, the remainig bolts need not to be tightened up.
All bolts have to checked and pretensioned if it’s possible to pretension some bolts.
Example: LHM 400

8 5

position of jib
4 3

6 7

−7.75− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.18.2.2. CHECKING PRETENSION LOAD AT FRONT PLATE JOINT

SCREW JOINT TOWER − SLEWING PLATFORM (LHM 320, 400 only)

The checking of the pretension load at the screw joint tower − slewing platform is similar to checking preten

sion load at the roller− / ball slewing ring. Pretension load and dimensions see section 7.18.2 in this part.
Socket SW 36 HSX 550 H Identnr.: 550936014 (this socket is in the scope of delivery
of the Plarad pretension tool)
SCREW JOINT JIB SECTIONS (LHM 320, 400 only)
The checking of the pretension load at the screw joint jib sections is similar to checking pretension load at
the roller− / ball slewing ring. Minimum 2 − 3 bolts have to be checked for the necessary pretension load
at both sides of the screw joint (1, 2).
At any further inspection eight different bolts must be checked.
Try to tighten up the bolt with the necessary pretension load. The bolt should not turn as a result of tightening.
If all checked bolts have the necessary pretension load, the remainig bolts need not to be tightened up.
All bolts have to checked and pretensioned if it’s possible to pretension some bolts.
Socket IN−OUT for HSX 5556/55
Pretension load: 2330 Nm (M36 10.9)

. NOTE !
Treat thread of bolts and washers (both sides) with never−seez paste
BLUE MOLY" !

1
H

section H−H

. NOTE !
The connection of the jib section at the crane types LHM 100, 150, 250 is realized via bolts and there

fore no pretension load has to be checked !

L284 −7.76−
 MAINTENANCE

7.19. INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF CRANE ROPES

7.19.1. SELECTION OF WIRE ROPES

Rope constructions listed in this crane manual have been chosen after extensive testing. They provide the
best possible match between crane and rope characteristics. Based on many years of experience these
ropes guarantee an optimal crane performance. Characteristics of ropes, although of equal standard, may
vary considerably if rope construction, number of strands or tensile strength is modified − even if offering
equal rotation resistant properties.

IMPORTANT
If ropes are exchanged only use ropes of the same construction and tensile
strength as the original rope. Should it be necessary to use a different rope
crane manufacturer must be contacted for consent.

Max. actual rope diameter must be 4 %, in the case of hoist ropes for truck mounted cranes exceeding
25 mm (0,9 inches) dia. it should be max. 3 %, above the nominal diameter. A right−hand rope is to be
mounted on a left−hand drum and vice versa. If reeved in multi layers a Lang’s lay rope provides better wear
resistant properties than a regular lay rope.

7.19.2. ROPE INSTALLATION

Wire ropes are easily affected by external damage, i.e. they must be handled with utmost care during trans

port and unloading. All wire ropes should be stored clean, dry and cool, soil contact must be excluded.
Only an installation of an untwisted rope free of any outer damage will guarantee a trouble−free operation.
Ropes always must be uncoiled from the reel or the ring in the direction of winding (picture 1). Lateral uncoil

ing causes the rope to be twisted until its total destruction by kink formation.
It is recommended to use a frame−mounted reel for coiling the rope on the drum (picture 2). Coiling in the
direction of bend prevents additional tension build−up in the rope and results in an excellent fit of the rope
on the drum. Never drag ropes through soil or dirt.
For the installation the new rope is fixed to the old rope still mounted or it is to be fixed to a auxiliary rope.
Connection between the two ropes can be achieved either by a basket or two welded eyes. Any transmis

sion of torsion from either the old or the auxiliary rope to the new rope must be definitively excluded. Rota

tion−resistant ropes must be protected from torsion by inserted swivels.
Multi−layer reeving requires that even the lower layers must be tightly coiled with a pretension of 1 − 2 %
of minimum breaking load of the rope. This pretension is achieved by braking the reel.
For multi strand reeving hoisting rope and drum should have the same direction. If it is required to spread
out a limited rope length on the floor for mounting the rope into the crane block it is important to avoid any
twist or torsion in the rope.
Non−rotation free ropes may be used with fixed points at both ends only.
A test−run of several lifts under partial load and later with alternately loaded and unloaded crane block is
required. Thus a flexible adaptation of the rope to bending direction and bending radii of pulleys and drum
will be achieved.
PICTURE 1
RIGHT WRONG

PICTURE 2
RIGHT WRONG
REEL REEL
DRUM DRUM

−7.77− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.19.3. MAINTENANCE

Maintenance at regular intervals guarantees safe crane operation and considerably increases rope life. Wire
ropes must be regreased at regular intervals according to crane operation, this especially applies to the
bending zones at the drums and pulleys. When exposed to the same test condition a well−greased rope
has shown four times as many working cycles than an ungreased rope. Relubricants must be compatible
with the original lubricant used.
The following lubricants are recommended:
All standard lubricants recommended by the crane manufacturer for open gears
Special lubricants like e.g.:Texaco Novatex Grease EP2, Rocol RD 105, Aral Aralub LFZ1
For ropes being reeved in multiple layers and therefore being exposed to extreme wear use of graph
ite containing lubricants is recommended like e.g.: Reiner Ceplattyn KG 10, Texaco Novatex FK 10
Heavily soiled wire ropes have to be cleaned regularly with a brush. If the lower layers on the drum are sel

domly used or not used at all, ropes have to be unreeled from time to time and then have to be reinstalled
under prestress. A rope operates most economical when used in its whole length. Therefore it is recom

mended to always use the appropriate rope length according to crane operation; this is mainly true if crane
is operated continously for a long period of time.
If a rope is unequally loaded it may be reversed. The formerly free end is fixed in the drum by positioning
unworn zones at zones mostly exposed to wear thus rope life can be extended considerably.
If wear mainly occurs if rope is multi−layer reeved on the Lebus drum, rope life may be increased by cut

ting−off one length according to 1/3 of drum circumference. This procedure can be repeated up to three
times per rope.

7.19.4. INSPECTION

Wire ropes have been dimensioned to provide sufficient safety margins after the occurence of first signs of
a wire breakage before a replacement of the rope is required. The ropes have to be inspected in regular
intervals; especially in the time period following directly after its installation. In addition special attention is
required if a rope has been exposed to excessive wear, if non−visible damage is supected or if there are
other indications for rope damage.
The following criteria for a safe operation of the ropes can be applied:
− type and number of wire breakages (see table)
− position and time sequence of the wire breakages
− decrease of rope diameter
− corrosion, abrasion, deformation
− heat−effects
− length of period of running
First signs of a change in rope behaviour must be carefully monitored.
CAUTION: A twisting of strands above the crane block can be an indication for a severly damaged rope.
This twisting is caused always by an additional torsion in the rotation−resistant hoisting rope originating
from a number of adverse effects but may also be due to an overstretching of the hoisting rope during heavy
duty operation. A compensation of such a torsion requires extreme care and respective know−how. Unt

wisting of crane pulley block with rotation−stable rope fixed point:
− Set down of pulley block
− Determine direction of twist.
− Detach rope at fixed point
− Carefully lift pulley block, operate crane unloaded with pulley block and also with crane trolley if present
− Repeat if necessary
Important: Make sure that twist is distributed to a long free rope end. By operating the crane in unloaded
condition twist is to be distributed to the entire rope length. By operating the crane in unloaded condition
twist is to be distributed to the entire rope length. By no means forcefully twist a short length of rope; this
may permanently damage rope structure.
If the hoisting rope was operated with open swivel an untwisting can be achieved by operating the trolley
several times under no load conditions and with unloaded hook. If not successful, follow same procedure
given for ropes with fixed point, e.g. if crane does not provide of a swivel, if rope is predamaged or if causes
of twist can not be remedied otherwise. At the same time a regular check of all rope end terminations and
suspensions for proper function is required. Individual components of rope drive unit, drums and pulleys
must turn freely in their bearings. Grooves should not show any rope marks. Minimum groove radius on
drums and pulleys should be 0,53 x nominal rope diameter.

L284 −7.78−
 MAINTENANCE
7.19.5. INSTRUCTIONS FOR UNTWISTING OF HOIST ROPES

1) Twisting of a multi−reeved crane block may be due to a number of causes. Any faults in the rope drive
must be eliminated, the load/stretch torsion will "seat in" after some time of rope operation.
2) If a hoist rope is operated with open swivel an untwisting by several runs with unloaded hook will be suffi

cient in most cases. If this procedure prooves to be ineffective refer to the instructions given for compensa

tion of twist for ropes with rotation− stable fixed point, e.g. − if no swivel is provided
− if the rope is predamaged or
− if the causes of the twist can’t be eliminated.
3) Determination of direction of twist
At first the direction of the twist of the crane pulley block must be determined. Pictures 1 and 2 show a pos

sible twist of a right hand lay rope, on picture 3 + 4 of a left hand lay rope. In the right hand corner of each
picture a sketch shows the occurence of multiple twist. The respective direction of twist is indicated by a
continously drawn arrow printed in boldface. If it is difficult to identify the direction of twist for large hoisting
heights turn rope in direction of arrow with dashed line once thus eliminating "braid". For compensation turn
rope end shown separately in the direction of the continous arrow. It is important that the correct reference
point is selected i.e. the crane operator must hold the rope in front of himself.
The direction of untwist can be determined also by simulating this situation by simply using a string.

4) Untwisting of crane pulley block with rotation−stable rope fixed point:

− Set down of pulley block
− Determine direction of twist
− Detach rope at fixed point
− Carefully turn rope at free end of at least 15 m (50 feet) (length up to max. 180 − 360 degrees to compen

sate
pulley block twist
− Reattach rope at the fixed point
− Carefully lift pulley block and operate unloaded crane with pulley block and jib
− Repeat if necessary
Important: Make sure that twist is distributed to a long free rope end. By operating the crane in unloaded
condition twist is to be distributed to the entire rope length. By no means forcefully twist a short length of
rope; this may permanently damage rope structure.

−7.79− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.19.6. DISCARD CRITERIA

Warning for safety reasons crane ropes have

to be discarded if showing one of the following
criteria:
− Break of one strand
− Accumulation of wire breaks
− Number of wire breaks as defined in table
− Corkscrew−type deformations of more than
1/3 rope diameter (pict. 1)
− Basketlike distortions Picture 1
− Hair−pin type extrusion of wire or groups of
wire (pict. 3)
− Decrease of rope diameter by 15 % against
nominal diameter of rope or
− by 10 % if there are signs of corrosion and / or
abrasion (pict. 4)
− Loosening of rope structure (pict. 4)
− Local decrease of rope diameter (pict. 5) Picture 2
− Bends and local crushing (pict. 6 + 8)
− Kinks or resulting permanent deformations
(pict. 7)
If special rope damage is found, the cause has to
be determined and eliminated before a new rope
will be installed. Damage or stress markings at
crane components provide valuable information
for possible causes of rope damage. Picture 3

If in doubt discard rope or consult expert for fur

ther assistance.

Picture 4

Picture 5

Picture 6

Picture 8 Picture 7

L284 −7.80−
 MAINTENANCE

7.20. REPLACEMENT OF ROPES

7.20.1. HOLDING WINCH AND CLOSING WINCH

See also drawing ROPE REEVING PLAN in section DRAWINGS.

. NOTE !
PRIOR STARTING TO REPLACE THE ROPES READ CAREFULLY SECTION
INSTRUCTIONS
FOR USE OF CRANE ROPES" (INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, ETC.).
ALWAYS REPLACE ONE (1) PAIR OF ROPES) FOR SAFETY REASONS !

− always use adequate safety equipment

− it is advisable to discard the old rope first and install the new one afterwards
− disconnect auxiliary devices (grab, spreader, rotator, etc.) and lower jib head to ground
(see part 4 JIB DOWN / RAISING OPERATION")
− secure one rope first by using an auxiliary standard ’nylon rope’ of adequate strength and length
( Ø = 15mm (0,6 inches), l = appr. 200m (656 feet)) and disconnect the rope from rope fix point
− connect a cable pulling strap (chinese fingers) and pull off rope gently to the front side of the crane
(for operating the closing− and holding winch use key−switch PRESELECTION WINCHES FOR
SERVICE OPERATION" and push button SERVICE OPERATION")
− use the auxiliary rope (nylon rope) and the pulling strap to pull the new wire rope correctly into the
system. This method is often used with new wire ropes.
− any transmission of torsion from the auxiliary rope to the new rope must be definitively excluded.
Rotation−resistant ropes must be protected from torsion by inserted swivels.
− secure the rope next to the drum (consider that the second rope has to be replaced as well)
− start same procedure for the second rope (old rope pulling off − new wire pulling onto drum)
− connect the two new ropes to the rope fix points, pull the ropes onto the drum till
three (3) safety windings are on the drum, adjust (check) limit switches lowering"
− First a test−run of several lifts under unloaded load and partial load is required. Thus a flexible
adaptation of the rope to bending direction and bending radii of pulleys and drum will be achieved.
Check correct adjustments and function of all limit switches and all rope protection devices !
− proceed with the two ropes on the second drum in same way (always replace one pair of ropes !)

Rope LEFTHANDED Ø 26 mm TOP LIMIT SWITCH

(1,02 inches) l = 145,5 m
(477,35 feet)
Rope RIGHTHANDED
Ø 26 mm (1,02 inches)
l = 145,5 m (477,35 feet)

CAM LIMIT SWITCH

TAPE for
safety reasons

rope pulling strap

(chinese finger)

−7.81− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.20.1.1. ROPE FIX POINT AND DRIVE OF LIMIT SWITCH (HOISTING WINCHES)

DETAIL

1 2 3 Tightening torque 580 NM

1 Rope clamp
2 Rope
3 Screw M 20 10.9 A2E DIN 912

. NOTE !
EACH ROPE HAS TO BE PRETENSIONED IN DIRECTION OF THE ROPE LAY WITH 100 − 200
NM BEFORE MOUNTING ON THE LOAD LIFTING DEVICE !

. NOTE !
AFTER THE FIRST TEST−RUN OF SEVERAL LIFTS CHECK ROPE FIX POINTS, ROPE PULLEYS
AND ROPE PROTECTION DEVICES AGAIN !

. NOTE !
SHOULD YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS RELATING TO OPERATION, SERVICE, REPAIRS
OR PARTS OF THE HOISTING SYSTEM INSTALLED ON THE CRANE, PLEASE CONTACT
THE LIEBHERR CUSTOMER SERVICE.

L284 −7.82−
 MAINTENANCE

7.21. DIRECTIONS FOR USE OF QUICK RELEASE LINKS

7.21.1. TECHNICAL

Both, the C section and the locking piece are forged out of alloy steel resistant to ageing and refined to a
100 − 110 kg/sq.mm (1000 − 1100 N/sq.mm) tensile strength.
The bows of the C section are hardened, which improves the service life. The locking piece is accurately
machined, so that interchangeability is ensured. The securing device, well protected against mechanical
damage and fouling, is lodged in a closed housing.

1
1 C section
2 Locking piece
2 3 Securing device

ATTENTION !
CHECK ROPE PEAR SOCKETS AND QUICK RELEASE LINKS ON A DAILY
BASIS FOR ANY DAMAGES OR EXCESSIVE WEAR, PRIOR STARTING
LOADING / UNLOADING WITH THE CRANE

7.21.2. HANDLING OF QUICK RELEASE LINKS

Opening / Closing of the units is done with keys especially made for Quick Release Links or standard Alan
keys (supplied with the tool box) of adequate size with a hexagonal head fitting into the securing device.
Cleaning of fouled inner hexagons can be achieved with the pointed end of the key grip.

To detach the locking piece put the key into the

hexagonal screw and push it through, then turn
the key 90°.
Remove the locking piece.

−7.83− L284
MAINTENANCE

To secure, place locking piece in link. Turn the

key 90° until a "click" is heard.

7.21.3. MAINTENANCE

Rope Pear Sockets, Quick Release Links and similar fittings must be regularly cleaned by removing abrasive
contaminates. Also keep them well greased with e.g. used lubricating oil. The greasing interval for continu

ous service is daily (appr. every 8 hrs).
Grinding off of protrusions and sharp edges caused by wear, especially as regards Rope Pear Sockets, will
substantially improve the service life.

A reduction in any dimension by more than 15 % due to wear, must be considered impermissible, necessitat

ing immediate replacement.

WARNING !
IF A QUICK RELEASE LINK IS WORN OR DAMAGED, REPLACE IT BE

FORE OPERATING THE CRANE. REMEMBER, PARTS ARE CHEAPER
THAN PEOPLE.

L284 −7.84−
 MAINTENANCE

7.22. ROPE PULLEYS

7.22.1. GENERAL LAYOUT

Rope pulleys are constructed and manufactured as a result of many ears of experience and knowledge of
expectations and requirements of heavy machinery.

Smooth and reliable running of the equipment can however, only to be obtained if regular maintenance and
care is given. Adhering to regular service intervals and use of correct lubricants as per the lubricants chart
are also part of this. Special tools are not required for servicing.
All rope pulleys are designed with large diameters and with anti−friction bearings.

steel rope pulley / sheave LAMIGAMIDR rope pulley / sheave

grease nippel

1 1

3 2

2 3
lubrication lubrication
groove groove

1 Rope pulley / sheave

2 Anti−friction bearing
3 Circlip

7.22.2. STORAGE

Rope pulleys in storage should be kept away from steam or hot water pipes, heated air ducts or any other
source of heat, which can thin out lubricant and cause it to drain out of the rope.
When storing rope pulleys − the following rule should be applied: FIRST IN − FIRST OUT. That means the
rope pulleys should be used in the order of delivery. In this way it can be avoided that certain rope pulleys
are only put into service after being stored for many years.

7.22.3. TRANSPORT

Rope pulleys are easily affected by external damage, i.e. they must be handled with utmost care during
transport and unloading.

−7.85− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.22.4. DURING OPERATION

Rope pulleys are easily affected by external damage, i.e. they never should rub against the provided rope
guard device, never to be layed down to ground without propper protection device. Thus could cause exces

sive wear to the components or even damaging the pulleys.
Damaged pulleys must be replaced immediately.

inexpert resting of hook block ! inexpert resting of jib tip !

broken ! worn out cable groove !

7.22.5. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

The rope pulleys have to be inspected in regular intervals; especially in the time period following directly
after its installation. In addition special attention is required, if a rope has been exposed to excessive wear,
if non−visible damage is supected or if there are other indications for damage.

. NOTE !
HEAVILY DIRTY OR SOILED WIRE ROPES HAVE TO BE CLEANED REGULARLY !

The frequency of rope pulley inspection is influenced by:

− Statory requirements
− Type of appliance
− Operational environmental conditions
− Method and frequency of operation
− Manufacturer’s recommendations
− Results of previous inspections
− Experience with previous rope pulleys on the appliance or system

L284 −7.86−
 MAINTENANCE
Service intervals:

Smooth and reliable running of the equipment can however, only to be obtained if regular maintenance and
care is given. Adhering to regular service intervals and use of correct lubricants as per the lubricants chart
are also part of this. Special tools are not required for servicing.

ANTI −FRICTION BEARINGS OF the rope pulleys must be regreased at regular intervals according to crane
operation. Individual components of rope pulleys must turn freely in their bearings.

GROOVES should not show any rope marks.

At the same time a REGULAR CHECK OF THE ROPES for proper function, cleanless and sufficient lubrica

tion is required.

. NOTE !
AFTER FIRST 100 HRS ALL PULLEYS HAVE TO BE CHECKED FOR SMOOTH AND RELIABLE
RUNNING, CORRECT FIT OF ROPE PROTECTION AND OTHER SECURING DEVICES.

THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENT FOR MAINTENANCE / CHECK UP IS EVERY 750 HRS, IF THE
CRANE IS NOT OPERATED AT LEAST TWICE PER YEAR FOR ANY MECHANICAL DAMAGES,
LUBRICATION CONNECTIONS AND CONDITION.

. NOTE !
ENSURE THAT THE GREASE DOES ESCAPE FROM / BETWEEN THE ROPE PULLEYS AT LEAST
EVERY 500 WORKING HOURS.

. NOTE !
CHECK THE WEAR OF THE ROPE GROOVE, FIRST SIGNS OF A CHANGE IN THE ROPE’S
BEHAVIOUR OR THE PULLEY ITSELF MUST BE CAREFULLY MONITORED !
THE ROPE PULLEY MUST BE EXCHANGED IF THE ROPE GROOVE IS SHRINKED UP TO THE
HALF ROPE DIAMETER.
CHECK THE PULLEYS GROOVE PROFILE AT LEAST EVERY 750 WORKING HOURS.

At this point we also do recommend to study carefully the INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF CRANE ROPES".

7.22.6. RESISTANCE TO CHEMICAL PRODUCTS OF LAMIGAMIDR ROPE PULLEYS

For cleaning of LAMIGAMIDR rope pulleys various benzin my be used. However, the PULLEYS SHOULD
NOT BE CLEANED OR GET IN TOUCH WITH THE FOLLOWING CHEMICALS OR CHEMICAL COM
POUNDS:

RESISTANT FOR

− Petroleum, benzin, kerosin, diesel fuel

LIMITED RESISTANT

− alcohol except ethyl−, methyl− and propyl alcohol

− anorganic chlorides, such as calcium, lithium−, magnesium− and zincchloride

NOT RESISTANT AGAINST

− concentrated mineral acids (i.e. sulphuric acid, hydrochlorid acid, nitric acid)
− concentrated organic acids (i.e. formic acid)
− concentrated alkalines (i.e. sodium, potash lye or caustic potash)
− phenolic resin, phenolic plastic

−7.87− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.23. STEERING

As part of the daily routine maintenance work on the mobile harbour crane all threaded units and pipes on
the power steering should be checked for any leakages. If the steering was installed subsequently, make
this check after the first 25 working hours.

. NOTE !
SEE ALSO SECTION NAF AXLES"

7.24. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

7.24.1. MAINTENANCE TO THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Maintenance of the electrical system is largely restricted to changing fuses and bulbs, if blown and cleaning
the filters in the switch cabinets. The filters on the switch cabinet fans should be renewed or cleaned approxi

mately every 3000 working hours.

. NOTE !
CLEAN DUST FILTERS ON THE SWITCH CABINETS EVERY 3000 OPERATING HOURS.
REPLACE DAMAGED OR CONTAMINATED FILTERS IMMEDIATELY.

. NOTE !
BLOWN FUSES OR INDICATION LAMPS HAVE TO BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY.

All screws and bolts used for or with electrical equipment should be retightened in regular intervals. (see
MAINTENANCE LIST)

ATTENTION !
ALL ELECTRIC SAFETY EQUIPMENT (E.G LIMIT SWITCHES, EMER

i
GENCY STOP BUTTONS ETC.) SHOULD BE CHECKED IN REGULAR IN

TERVALS AS WELL TO ENSURE A SAFE
OPERATION OF THE CRANE. (SEE MAINTENANCE LIST)

ATTENTION !
Whenever WORKING ON THE CRANES ELECTRICAL SYSTEM or
WHEN WELDING REPAIR WORK HAS TO BE PERFORMED ON THE
CRANE − disconnect the batteries from the consumer circuits by oper
ating the BATTERY MAIN SWITCH.

WARNING !
BEFORE OPENING ANY ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT, it is essential to
SWITCH OFF THE POWER SUPPLY.

L284 −7.88−
 MAINTENANCE
7.24.2. WET CLEANING

Wet cleaning of the switch box or switch gear is not allowed !

When washing or steam cleaning the crane or components − close all terminal− and switch boxes in order
to prevent water from entering !

7.24.3. CLEANING SCREEN MONITORS

If required clean the screen monitors with a slightly dampened SOFT CLOTH. Use only mild houshold deter

gent or a common computer cleaner. Never use strong solvents such as thinner or benzene as they might
damage the monitor.

. NOTE !
AS A SAFETY PRECAUTION, UNPLUG THE UNITS OR SWITCH OFF THE POWER SUPPLY
PIOR CLEANING !

7.24.4. CHANGING CABLE OF CABLE REEL

In order to avoid any damages on the cable of the cable reel following instructions are to be observed when
exchanging the cable:

WARNING !
BEFORE OPENING ANY ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT, it is essential to
SWITCH OFF THE POWER SUPPLY.

−prior filling in the insulating compound, check if the TEFLON taping is removed (only if provided by cable
manufacturer) in order to improve better contact of each conductor cable with the insulating compound.
−when installing the new cable pay attention to get no twist to the new cable, therefore:
F Keep a distance of minimum 5m between the delivered drum with the new cable and the cable
reel
F Never use any guide pulleys when rewinding the cable
F The cable reels must have the same rotation direction when rewinding
F Never kink the cable. At flexible installation the minimum bending radius must be more than
10−12 x of the cable diameter.
F Never pull the cable over sharp edges or sharp objects
−prior connecting the cable the first time to the load lifting device, wind up/down slowly the cable for 2 to
3 times (cable not connected to load lifting device)
−let the cable hanging in unreeled condition approx. 1m above ground for minimum 30 minutes at min.
outreach of the crane. Do not use any further weight hanging on the cable.
−afterwords wind up/down slowly the cable for 2 to 3 times (cable not connected to load lifting device)
Now the cable can be connected to the load lifting device.

−7.89− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.25. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR SLIP RING UNIT

The slip ring is installed between SLEWING PLATFORM and the UNDERCARRIAGE − on top of the hydraulic
swivel connector.

. NOTE ! ONLY QUALIFIED AND AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSONS ARE ALLOWED

TO PERFORM MAINTENANCE OR SERVICE TO THE SYSTEM !

7.25.1. TERMINAL BOX

Every 500 hours a tightness test of a random sample of the terminal clamp screws should be carried out.

7.25.2. POWER SECTION

Due to the low turning speed and the hardness of carbon brushes, the brushes have a relatively long life.
They must be checked every 1500 hours or latest every 6 months, and must be changed in good time
so that it never happens that a metal part of the brush holder touches the slip ring.
During this check it is also necessary to clean any carbon dust from the insulating barriers between the slip

ring ways so as to avoid creeping current. Every 500 hours a random sample of the screw connections
of the copper bus bars should be checked for tightness.

B B signal section 6

2
power section

A A 7

4 3 5 WEIGHT appr. 80 kg

1 Stand−by heating element 2 Bearing ring

(between terminal box / power section)
3 Ball bearing 4 Brush holder
5 Trip lever 6 Signal section
7 Power section

L284 −7.90−
 MAINTENANCE
7.25.3. SIGNAL SECTION

The 16 Amp. circuits are fitted with nickel plated and gold plated copper−beryllium wire brushes and with
nickel plated and gold plated sliprings. About every 1000 hours or latest every 6 months the insulating
barriers between the slip−ring ways should be cleaned of metal particles.
To reduce wear the slip−ring ways should be lightly sprayed with a contact oil such as Cramolin B".
A random sample of the terminal screws for the terminals of the cables from the copper−beryllium wire
brushes should be checked for tightness.
The carbon brush blocks must be checked according to point 2 mentioned above.

SECTION A − A SECTION B − B

power section signal section

7.25.4. BEARINGS

The bearing between the terminal box and the power section is maintance free.

7.25.5. TRIP LEVER

The trip lever (POS 5) bolted to the steel structure of the undercarriage section should be checked for correct
fit every 100 operating hours.

7.25.6. CABLE INSULATION

When cables connected to the slipring or have to be replaced always asure that the insulation to be kept
as short as possible.

. NOTE !
SHOULD YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS RELATING TO OPERATION, SERVICE, REPAIRS
OR PARTS FOR THE SLIP RING INSTALLED ON THE CRANE, PLEASE CONTACT
THE LIEBHERR CUSTOMER SERVICE.

−7.91− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.26. MAINTENANCE OF THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

7.26.1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM IN THE UPPER CABIN

Proper function of the air conditioning system is only assured, if all maintenance work is performed com

pletely, properly and by qualified personnel.
Any work or repairs on the air conditioning system should only be done by specially trained personnel.

GENERAL INFORMATION
The front and rear side of the air conditioner must be free from obstructions. Any possible obstacles should
be least in a distance of minimum 1,5 − 2 m away (4,92−6,56 ft).

. NOTE !
MAKE SURE THAT THE FRONT GRILL, ESPECIALLY THE INTAKE GRILL ARE FREE AND NOT
OBSTRUCTED BY ANY ITEMS. REDUCED AIR INTAKE FROM THE ROOM MAY CAUSE THE
FROSTING OF THE EVAPORATOR WITH CONSEQUENTAL TOTAL BLOCKAGE OF THE AIR PAS

SAGE AND THEREFORE ELIMINATE THE EFFICIENCY OF THE UNIT.

7.26.1.1. Operation

operation mode temperature

a b c
Cooling Turn the thermostat knob (b) clockwise to adjust convenient temperature
(knob in left position for maximum, quick cooling effect).

Fan only There is only circulation of filtered air, without additional cooling or heating
of the cabin.

Heating Turn the thermostat knob (b) counter−clockwise. Switch the change over
(optional) knob (a) to ’heating’ position. In this way quick heating is obtained. Upon
reaching of desired temperature turn the thermostate knob clockwise until
heating is disconnected.

Air conditioning switched OFF

Fresh air intake

Air recycle

L284 −7.92−
 MAINTENANCE
7.26.1.2. Air flow regulation

The adjsutable fins of the outlet grill allow to

adjust an individual air flow direction.

The vertical fins, split into two sections, can be

adjusted independently by means of two lev

ers.

The universal adjustment of direction flow

does allow elemination of any stagnant zone
in the cabin.

7.26.1.3. MAINTENANCE

Check the filter at least once per month. A dirty

chocked filter will block the air flow and reduce
1 the efficiency of the complete unit.
To remove the air intake grille push down first
(1) and lift the grille off (2).
Remove the filter simply by lifting from recess
in unit.
Remove grease and dirt by washing the filter
carefully in a solution of household detergent
and warm water. Rinse filter thoroughly,
squeeze out water (do not wring).
2
Replace filter by tucking edges back into
place recess and install air intake grille again.

. NOTE !
CHECK AND CLEAN THE FILTER AT LEAST ONCE PER MONTH.

−7.93− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.27. WELDING INSPECTION

Inspect once a year visually all marked weldings on following drawings (item 1). If there are any kind of
cracks proceed as following:
−remove painting locally
−check crack either with magnetic partical examination or with liquid penetrant examination
−if the result of the test is a crack, contact your next LIEBHERR service department to get further information
/ instructions

WARNING !
Stop crane operation and contact your next LIEBHERR service depart
ment to get further information / instructions.

. IMPORTANT !
VISUAL INSPECTION OF ALL WELDS ALL 5 YEARS. IF YOU SEE A CRACK ON THE MARKED
WELDINGS ON THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS EXECUTE MAGNETIC PARTICAL EXAMINATION
OR LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION INDEPENDENT OF THE INSPECTION INTERVALS !

1 VISUAL INSPECTION YEARLY

2 AFTER 15000 WORKING HOURS ULTRASONIC TESTING
AFTER 20000 WORKING HOURS ULTRASONIC TESTING YEARLY

GENERAL:
VISUAL INSPECTION OF ALL WELDS ALL 5 YEARS

L284 −7.94−
 7.27.1.
UNDERCARRIAGE

−7.95−
1 . . . VISUAL INSPECTION YEARLY
VISUAL INSPECTION OF ALL WELDS ALL 5 YEARS

L284
MAINTENANCE
L284
7.27.2.
MAINTENANCE

SLEWING PLATFORM

−7.96−
1 . . . VISUAL INSPECTION YEARLY
VISUAL INSPECTION OF ALL WELDS ALL 5 YEARS
 7.27.3.
TOWER

−7.97−
1 . . . VISUAL INSPECTION YEARLY
VISUAL INSPECTION OF ALL WELDS ALL 5 YEARS

L284
MAINTENANCE
L284
7.27.4.
JIB
MAINTENANCE

−7.98−
1 . . . VISUAL INSPECTION YEARLY
VISUAL INSPECTION OF ALL WELDS ALL 5 YEARS
 MAINTENANCE

7.28. CORROSION PROTECTION

7.28.1. GENERAL

To ensure a long lifetime of the crane components, special care has to be taken when the crane is operated
under agressive environmental conditions (e.g. cargo−handling with agressive chemicals, fertilizer etc.).

. IMPORTANT !
The complete crane shall be periodically checked for proper corrosion protection latest every three
month.

7.28.2. GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION

ATTENTION !
−When not in use store containers on a dry and cool place (storage
temp. approx. 15 − 20°C.) (59−68°F)
−Keep containers away from open flames, sparks and ignition
sources.
−Ensure that enough fresh air is available when working with
corrosion inhibitors.
−Never eat, drink and smoke when working with corrosion inhibitors
−Wear proper working− and safety clothings (overall, safety glasses
and gloves, respirator). Change polluted clothes.
−Do not spray against open flames and hot components like turbo
chargers, exhaust parts etc.
−Switch off electrical system before spraying in switch cabinets,
terminal boxes
−Absorb spilled material with sand or similar absorbent material.
Remove remainder with suitable detergent.
−In case of fire use carbon dioxide, foam or extinguish powder.
Never use water as extinguishant !
In case of fire proper safety clothings and independent respirator
shall be used for fire−fighting.
−FIRST AID :
Skin contact: Rinse off with plenty of water and soap
Eye contact: Rinse off corrosion inhibitor in the eyes immediatly for
several minutes with clean water. Then consult a doctor
immediatly.
Consumption: If corrosion inhibitors are consumed drink plenty of
milk or water. Do not lead to vomit ! Then consult a
doctor.
If corrosion inhibitors are breathed in higher concentrations, get the
affected person in to the fresh air immediatly. Summon a doctor.

DISPOSAL !
USED MATERIALS MUST BE PROPERLY DISPOSED OF IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE RELEVANT STATE REGULATIONS !

−7.99− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.28.3. PROTECTING CRANE COMPONENTS

Check crane periodically for proper corrosion protection latest every three month. Clean unprotected sur

faces and treat with corrosion inhibitor.
PREPARATION AND PRESERVATION OF CRANE AND COMPONENTS
− Machined surfaces, (like pins, bearings, pivot,...) flange and slewring flange shall be protected by a layer
of wax−based corrosion preventative (LPS PRO−CYON)
− The complete aggregate and winch room shall be sprayed with MOLECULAR NATO FLUID
− Electrical items inside switch or control cabinets, all inner and outer terminalboxes, switch cabinets,
plug−and−socket connections are to be protected inside using vapour corrosion inhibitor LPS 1.
− All bright, galvanized and machined parts inside of the crane (e.g. flange facings, bolts, screws, joints,
tubings, contact surfaces, etc.) which are not varnished shall be sprayed with MOLECULAR NATO
FLUID.
− All screws at railings, platforms, stairs, movable parts (e.g. limit switches), flood lights and axle bearings
shall be sprayed with LPS 3.

. NOTE !
See additionally figure on next page for use of different corrosion inhibitors.

7.28.4. RECOMMENDED CORROSION INHIBITORS

We are pleased to offer these corrosion inhibitors as follows:

1 LPS PRO−CYON Id.No.: 861010214
2 LPS 3 in spray bottle Id.No.: 861009614
3 LPS 1 in buckets to 25l (6,6 gal) Id.No.: 861010014
4 MOLECULAR NATO FLUID in tins to 5l (1,32 gal) Id.No.: 861010114

L284 −7.100−
 2
2

2
2 3 1
1 2
3**
1
2

1
4* 3
2
1

−7.101−
2

2
2
1 LPS PRO−CYON
2 LPS 3
3 LPS 1
4 NATO−FLUID
1 2, 3 1 2 * inside complete
** electro parts

NOTE !
. All junction−boxes, socket connections, switches,
lightings, sliprings, sockets,... are to be preserved with

L284
MAINTENANCE

LPS 1 (pos. 3).

MAINTENANCE

L284 −7.102−
 MAINTENANCE

7.29. MAINTENANCE LISTS

7.29.1. GENERAL INFORMATION

The maintenance intervals mentioned in this section are guiding times and should be observed.

If due to extreme environmental conditions (i.e. dust, tropical conditions) or extreme operational conditions
(i.e. multiple shift operation) a deviation to the given maintenance interval(s) should become necessary, ask
your local LIEBHERR CUSTOMER SERVICE for advice and confirmation to do so.

. NOTE !
IT SHOULD BE NOTED THAT IN PARTICULAR THE MAINTENANCE TIME INTERVALS
INDICATED ARE APPROXIMATE. IN REALITY THESE INTERVALS SHOULD DEPEND
ON CRANE USAGE AND THEREFORE − MAY NEED TO BE UPDATED ACCORDINGLY.

. IMPORTANT !
The maintenance intervals indicated in the maintenance list are based on the ACTUAL OPER
ATING HOURS OF THE CRANE. Should the crane be standing for a period of more then four
( 4 ) weeks − the crane has to be operated ONCE A MONTH FOR AT LEAST TWO ( 2 ) HOURS.
In addition to that all the greasing, oil inspections and oil level checks have to be done as
well.

operating hours counter

(switch box X1)

7.29.1.1. DISPOSAL OF USED MATERIALS

. NOTE !
When changing oil, grease, filter elements, batteries, etc. − used materials must be properly dis

posed of in accordance with the relevant state regulations.
Contamination of soil, sewage and water systems must be avoided !

−7.103− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.29.1.2. QUALIFIED PERSONS

PERSONS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SAFETY OF THE CRANE MUST ENSURE THAT:
− qualified persons are only delegated to work on the machinery or apparatus,
− these persons must keep the Operating− and Maintenance Instructions provided, and other documents,
available when carrying out the operations to which they refer and to follow that documentation without fail,
− unauthorised persons are prohibited from working on, or approaching, the machinery or apparatus.
Qualified persons are persons who, as a result of their training, experience and the instruction they have
received, and of their knowledge of the relevant Standards, directives, accident prevention regulations and
operating conditions, have been authorised by those responsible for the safety of the machine to carry out
the particular task required and who are able to recognise and avoid the potential hazards. A knowledge
of first−aid and local rescue equipment is essential. According to regulations, unqualified personnel are
forbidden to work for example on power installations and apparatus.

7.29.2. FILLING QUANTITIES

2x5,28 gal

2x2,96 gal

2x2,24 gal
237,8 gal

18,49 gal
1188 gal

FILLING
6,73 gal

4,23 gal

2x11,2 l

2x8,5 l
QUANTITIES, appr.
4500 l

2x20 l
900 L

25,5 l

70 l

16 l

( liter)
− − −

TRAVELLING GEAR BOXES

DISTRIBUTION GEARBOX

SLEWING GEAR BOX

GEAR RIM SLEWING

DIESEL FUEL TANK

GREASING POINTS
COOLING SYSTEM

HOISTING WINCH
HYDR. OIL TANK

DIESEL ENGINE

SYSTEM

ROPES

Type of OIL
PANOLIN HLP
API CD/SE or
SHPD or Super S3
SAE, HDC or sim.
ISO−VG22

COOLANT
to MB specification

DIESEL−FUEL
DIN EN 590

GREASE

AVIALITH 2EP
SP−F AVIA
ALUPLEX 2
Ca.−grease EP

... OIL ...GREASE

. NOTE !
See also details provided in section MAINTENANCE for each individual function group,
section ADDITIONAL DEVICES and TABLE OF LUBRICANTS !

L284 −7.104−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.3. DAILY

Function group Work to be performed see section

CRANE COMPLETE Visual crane check −
DIESEL ENGINE Check oil level 7.7.10
WATER COOLER Check cooling water level 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Check oil level 7.3
SAFETY DEVICES Check crane safety features 3.3, 4.3
(slewing, luffing, hoist system, emergency stop,
LML system, load indication system, working ra

dius, travelling window, accoustic warning signals)

7.29.4. WEEKLY

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL FUEL TANK Drain water of fuel tank 7.4, 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Drain water of hydr. tank 7.3
DISTRIBUTION GEAR Check oil level 7.13.1
BOX 7.13.2
WINCH(ES) 7.13.3
SLEWING GEAR 7.15.3
BOX(ES)
TRAVELLING GEAR
BOX(ES)
AXLE SETS Check tires for correct pressure 7.16
UNDERCARRIAGE Check level system for correct adjustment 7.15.9
ROPES Check ropes for damage 7.19.3, 7.19.4
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.18.1
GREASING SYSTEM Check all greasing points for sufficient grease, func
7.17
tion test of central greasing system
GREASING PUMP(S) Check grease content, refill as required 7.17.3
DIESEL ENGINE Grease cardan shaft −
HYDRAULIC CYL Grease all pistons rods −
INDERS

−7.105− L284
MAINTENANCE

L284 −7.106−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.5. AT 500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

CRANE COMPLETE Visual crane check −
DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
DISTRIBUTION GEAR Exchange gear oil 7.13.1
BOX
WINCH(ES) 7.13.2
SLEWING GEAR 7.13.3
BOX(ES)
ROTATOR Exchange gear oil and filter, clean slip ring unit Vol. 2 / part 2
AXLE SETS Check for correct torque, grease bearings of travel 7.15
gear
SAFETY DEVICES Check crane safety features 3.3, 4.3
(slewing, luffing, hoist system, emergency stop,
LML system, load indication system, working ra

dius, travelling window, accoustic warning signals)
SLEWING RING Check greasing of gear rim, regrease as required 7.17.8, 7.18.1
GREASING SYSTEM Check all greasing points for sufficient grease, func
7.17
tion test of central greasing system
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.107− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.108−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.6. AT 1000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
AXLE SETS Grease bearings of travel gear 7.15
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.109− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.110−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.7. AT 1500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.111− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.112−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.8. AT 2000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

CRANE COMPLETE Visual crane check, control of weldings and bolted −
connections for rust, steel structure − no damage,
bends, ...
ROPE PULLEYS Check for damages / wear 7.22
DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
WATER COOLER Check cooler for dirt, check cooling water additive 7.10.6, 7.7.13
BATTERIES Check acid level and density, clean and grease ter
7.9.6
minals and cable connections
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
DISTRIBUTION GEAR Exchange gear oil 7.13.1
BOX
WINCH(ES) 7.13.2
SLEWING GEAR 7.13.3
BOX(ES)
TRAVELLING GEAR 7.15.3
BOX(ES)
ROTATOR Exchange gear oil and filter, clean slip ring unit Vol. 2 / part 2
AXLE SETS Check for correct torque, grease bearings of travel 7.15
gear
ROPES Check ropes for fatigue (*) 7.19.3
SLIPRING UNIT UNDER Clean slipring unit 7.25
CARRIAGE
SLIPRING UNIT CABLE Clean slipring unit, check air gap of brake (*) Vol. 2 / part 2
REEL
SAFETY DEVICES Check crane safety features 3.3, 4.3
(slewing, luffing, hoist system, emergency stop,
LML system, load indication system, working ra

dius, travelling window, accoustic warning signals)
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring, 7.17.8, 7.18.1
GREASING SYSTEM Check all greasing points for sufficient grease, func
7.17
tion test of central greasing system
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.113− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.114−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.9. AT 2500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
ROPES Grease ropes 7.19.3
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.115− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.116−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.10. AT 3000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
SWITCH CABINET Change air filter −
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter, oil ex
7.11.4, 7.11.7, 7.3
change depending on analyse, clean oil tank before
oil exchange (*)
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
AXLE SETS Grease bearings of travel gear 7.15
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.117− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.118−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.11. AT 3500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.119− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.120−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.12. AT 4000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

CRANE COMPLETE Visual crane check, control of weldings and bolted −
connections for rust, steel structure − no damage,
bends, ...
ROPE PULLEYS Check for damages / wear 7.22
DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
WATER COOLER Check cooler for dirt, check cooling water additive 7.10.6, 7.7.13
BATTERIES Check acid level and density, clean and grease ter
7.9.6
minals and cable connections
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check for leaktightness, exchange pressure accu
7.11.6, 7.12
multors, exchange all filters (*)
DISTRIBUTION GEAR Exchange gear oil 7.13.1
BOX
WINCH(ES) 7.13.2
SLEWING GEAR 7.13.3
BOX(ES)
TRAVELLING GEAR 7.15.3
BOX(ES)
ROTATOR Exchange gear oil and filter, clean slip ring unit Vol. 2 / part 2
AXLE SETS Check for correct torque, grease bearings of travel 7.15
gear
ROPES Check ropes for fatigue (*) 7.19.4
SLIPRING UNIT UNDER Clean slipring unit 7.25
CARRIAGE
SLIPRING UNIT CABLE Clean slipring unit, check air gap of brake Vol. 2 / part 2
REEL
SAFETY DEVICES Check crane safety features 3.3, 4.3
(slewing, luffing, hoist system, emergency stop,
LML system, load indication system, working ra

dius, travelling window, accoustic warning signals)
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring, 7.17.8, 7.18.1
GREASING SYSTEM Check all greasing points for sufficient grease, func
7.17
tion test of central greasing system
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

−7.121− L284
MAINTENANCE

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.122−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.13. AT 4500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.123− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.124−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.14. AT 5000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
AXLE SETS Grease bearings of travel gear 7.15
ROPES Grease ropes 7.19.3
SLEWING RING, Check bolt connections for correct torque (*) 7.18
TOWER, JIB
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring, check tilting clear
7.17.8, 7.18.1
ance (*)
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.125− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.126−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.15. AT 5500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.127− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.128−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.16. AT 6000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

CRANE COMPLETE Visual crane check, control of weldings and bolted −
connections for rust, steel structure − no damage,
bends, ...
ROPE PULLEYS Check for damages / wear 7.22
DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
WATER COOLER Check cooler for dirt, check cooling water additive 7.10.6, 7.7.13
SWITCH CABINET Change air filter −
BATTERIES Check acid level and density, clean and grease ter
7.9.6
minals and cable connections
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter, oil ex
7.11.4, 7.11.7, 7.3
change depending on analyse, clean oil tank before
oil exchange (*)
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
DRIVING MOTORS Check driving sleeve (*) −
HOISTING GEAR
DISTRIBUTION GEAR Exchange gear oil 7.13.1
BOX
WINCH(ES) 7.13.2
SLEWING GEAR 7.13.3
BOX(ES)
TRAVELLING GEAR 7.15.3
BOX(ES)
ROTATOR Exchange gear oil and filter, clean slip ring unit Vol. 2 / part 2
AXLE SETS Check for correct torque, grease bearings of travel 7.15
gear
ROPES Check ropes for fatigue (*) 7.19.4
SLIPRING UNIT UNDER Clean slipring unit 7.25
CARRIAGE
SLIPRING UNIT CABLE Clean slipring unit, check air gap of brake Vol. 2 / part 2
REEL
SAFETY DEVICES Check crane safety features 3.3, 4.3
(slewing, luffing, hoist system, emergency stop,
LML system, load indication system, working ra

dius, travelling window, accoustic warning signals)
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring, 7.17.8, 7.18.1
GREASING SYSTEM Check all greasing points for sufficient grease, func
7.17
tion test of central greasing system
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

−7.129− L284
MAINTENANCE

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.130−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.17. AT 6500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.131− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.132−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.18. AT 7000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
AXLE SETS Grease bearings of travel gear 7.15
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.133− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.134−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.19. AT 7500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
ROPES Grease ropes 7.19.3
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.135− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.136−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.20. AT 8000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

CRANE COMPLETE Visual crane check, control of weldings and bolted −
connections for rust, steel structure − no damage,
bends, ...
ROPE PULLEYS Check for damages / wear 7.22
DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
WATER COOLER Check cooler for dirt, check cooling water additive 7.10.6, 7.7.13
BATTERIES Check acid level and density, clean and grease ter
7.9.6
minals and cable connections
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check for leaktightness, exchange pressure accu
7.11.6, 7.12
multors, exchange all filters (*)
DISTRIBUTION GEAR Exchange gear oil 7.13.1
BOX
WINCH(ES) 7.13.2
SLEWING GEAR 7.13.3
BOX(ES)
TRAVELLING GEAR 7.15.3
BOX(ES)
ROTATOR Exchange gear oil and filter, clean slip ring unit Vol. 2 / part 2
AXLE SETS Check for correct torque, grease bearings of travel 7.15
gear
ROPES Check ropes for fatigue (*) 7.19.4
SLIPRING UNIT UNDER Clean slipring unit 7.25
CARRIAGE
SLIPRING UNIT CABLE Clean slipring unit, check air gap of brake Vol. 2 / part 2
REEL
SAFETY DEVICES Check crane safety features 3.3, 4.3
(slewing, luffing, hoist system, emergency stop,
LML system, load indication system, working ra

dius, travelling window, accoustic warning signals)
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring, 7.17.8, 7.18.1
GREASING SYSTEM Check all greasing points for sufficient grease, func
7.17
tion test of central greasing system
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

−7.137− L284
MAINTENANCE

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.138−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.21. AT 8500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.139− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.140−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.22. AT 9000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
SWITCH CABINET Change air filter −
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter, oil ex
7.11.4, 7.11.7, 7.3
change depending on analyse, clean oil tank before
oil exchange (*)
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
AXLE SETS Grease bearings of travel gear 7.15
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.141− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.142−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.23. AT 9500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.143− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.144−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.24. AT 10000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

CRANE COMPLETE Visual crane check, control of weldings and bolted −
connections for rust, steel structure − no damage,
bends, ...
ROPE PULLEYS Check for damages / wear 7.22
DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
WATER COOLER Check cooler for dirt, check cooling water additive 7.10.6, 7.7.13
BATTERIES Check acid level and density, clean and grease ter
7.9.6
minals and cable connections
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
DRIVING MOTORS Check driving sleeve (*) −
HOISTING GEAR
DISTRIBUTION GEAR Exchange gear oil 7.13.1
BOX
WINCH(ES) 7.13.2
SLEWING GEAR 7.13.3
BOX(ES)
TRAVELLING GEAR 7.15.3
BOX(ES)
CABLE REEL JIB HEAD Vol. 2 / part 2
ROTATOR Exchange gear oil and filter, clean slip ring unit Vol. 2 / part 2
AXLE SETS Check for correct torque, grease bearings of travel 7.15
gear
ROPES Check ropes for fatigue, Grease ropes (*) 7.19.3, 7.19.4
SLIPRING UNIT UNDER Clean slipring unit 7.25
CARRIAGE
SLIPRING UNIT CABLE Clean slipring unit, check air gap of brake Vol. 2 / part 2
REEL
SAFETY DEVICES Check crane safety features 3.3, 4.3
(slewing, luffing, hoist system, emergency stop,
LML system, load indication system, working ra

dius, travelling window, accoustic warning signals)
SLEWING RING, Check bolt connections for correct torque (*) 7.18
TOWER, JIB
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring, check tilting clear
7.17.8, 7.18.1
ance (*)
GREASING SYSTEM Check all greasing points for sufficient grease, func
7.17
tion test of central greasing system
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

−7.145− L284
MAINTENANCE

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.146−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.25. AT 10500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.147− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.148−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.26. AT 11000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
AXLE SETS Grease bearings of travel gear 7.15
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.149− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.150−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.27. AT 11500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.151− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.152−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.28. AT 12000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

CRANE COMPLETE Visual crane check, control of weldings and bolted −
connections for rust, steel structure − no damage,
bends, ...
ROPE PULLEYS Check for damages / wear 7.22
DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
WATER COOLER Check cooler for dirt, check cooling water additive 7.10.6, 7.7.13
SWITCH CABINET Change air filter −
BATTERIES Check acid level and density, clean and grease ter
7.9.6
minals and cable connections
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter, oil ex
7.11.4, 7.11.7, 7.3
change depending on analyse, clean oil tank before
oil exchange (*)
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check for leaktightness, exchange pressure accu
7.11.6, 7.12
multors, exchange all filters (*)
DISTRIBUTION GEAR Exchange gear oil 7.13.1
BOX
WINCH(ES) 7.13.2
SLEWING GEAR 7.13.3
BOX(ES)
TRAVELLING GEAR 7.15.3
BOX(ES)
ROTATOR Exchange gear oil and filter, clean slip ring unit Vol. 2 / part 2
AXLE SETS Check for correct torque, grease bearings of travel 7.15
gear
ROPES Check ropes for fatigue (*) 7.19.4
SLIPRING UNIT UNDER Clean slipring unit 7.25
CARRIAGE
SLIPRING UNIT CABLE Clean slipring unit, check air gap of brake Vol. 2 / part 2
REEL
SAFETY DEVICES Check crane safety features 3.3, 4.3
(slewing, luffing, hoist system, emergency stop,
LML system, load indication system, working ra

dius, travelling window, accoustic warning signals)
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring, 7.17.8, 7.18.1
GREASING SYSTEM Check all greasing points for sufficient grease, func
7.17
tion test of central greasing system
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

−7.153− L284
MAINTENANCE

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.154−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.29. AT 12500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
ROPES Grease ropes 7.19.3
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.155− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.156−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.30. AT 13000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
AXLE SETS Grease bearings of travel gear 7.15
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.157− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.158−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.31. AT 13500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.159− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.160−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.32. AT 14000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

CRANE COMPLETE Visual crane check, control of weldings and bolted −
connections for rust, steel structure − no damage,
bends, ...
ROPE PULLEYS Check for damages / wear 7.22
DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
WATER COOLER Check cooler for dirt, check cooling water additive 7.10.6, 7.7.13
BATTERIES Check acid level and density, clean and grease ter
7.9.6
minals and cable connections
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
DRIVING MOTORS Check driving sleeve (*) −
HOISTING GEAR
DISTRIBUTION GEAR Exchange gear oil 7.13.1
BOX
WINCH(ES) 7.13.2
SLEWING GEAR 7.13.3
BOX(ES)
TRAVELLING GEAR 7.15.3
BOX(ES)
ROTATOR Exchange gear oil and filter, clean slip ring unit Vol. 2 / part 2
AXLE SETS Check for correct torque, grease bearings of travel 7.15
gear
ROPES Check ropes for fatigue (*) 7.19.4
SLIPRING UNIT UNDER Clean slipring unit 7.25
CARRIAGE
SLIPRING UNIT CABLE Clean slipring unit, check air gap of brake Vol. 2 / part 2
REEL
SAFETY DEVICES Check crane safety features 3.3, 4.3
(slewing, luffing, hoist system, emergency stop,
LML system, load indication system, working ra

dius, travelling window, accoustic warning signals)
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring, 7.17.8, 7.18.1
GREASING SYSTEM Check all greasing points for sufficient grease, func
7.17
tion test of central greasing system
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

−7.161− L284
MAINTENANCE

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.162−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.33. AT 14500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.163− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.164−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.34. AT 15000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
SWITCH CABINET Change air filter −
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter, oil ex
7.11.4, 7.11.7, 7.3
change depending on analyse, clean oil tank before
oil exchange (*)
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
AXLE SETS Grease bearings of travel gear 7.15
ROPES Grease ropes 7.19.3
SLEWING RING, Check bolt connections for correct torque (*) 7.18
TOWER, JIB
LUFFING CYLINDER Check weld seams (*) 7.27
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring, check tilting cler
7.17.8, 7.18.1
ance
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.165− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.166−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.35. AT 15500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.167− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.168−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.36. AT 16000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

CRANE COMPLETE Visual crane check, control of weldings and bolted −
connections for rust, steel structure − no damage,
bends, ...
ROPE PULLEYS Check for damages / wear 7.22
DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
WATER COOLER Check cooler for dirt, check cooling water additive 7.10.6, 7.7.13
BATTERIES Check acid level and density, clean and grease ter
7.9.6
minals and cable connections
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check for leaktightness, exchange pressure accu
7.11.6, 7.12
multors, exchange all filters (*)
DISTRIBUTION GEAR Exchange gear oil 7.13.1
BOX
WINCH(ES) 7.13.2
SLEWING GEAR 7.13.3
BOX(ES)
TRAVELLING GEAR 7.15.3
BOX(ES)
ROTATOR Exchange gear oil and filter, clean slip ring unit Vol. 2 / part 2
AXLE SETS Check for correct torque, grease bearings of travel 7.15
gear
ROPES Check ropes for fatigue (*) 7.19.4
SLIPRING UNIT UNDER Clean slipring unit 7.25
CARRIAGE
SLIPRING UNIT CABLE Clean slipring unit, check air gap of brake Vol. 2 / part 2
REEL
SAFETY DEVICES Check crane safety features 3.3, 4.3
(slewing, luffing, hoist system, emergency stop,
LML system, load indication system, working ra

dius, travelling window, accoustic warning signals)
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring, 7.17.8, 7.18.1
GREASING SYSTEM Check all greasing points for sufficient grease, func
7.17
tion test of central greasing system
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

−7.169− L284
MAINTENANCE

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.170−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.37. AT 16500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.171− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.172−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.38. AT 17000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
AXLE SETS Grease bearings of travel gear 7.15
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.173− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.174−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.39. AT 17500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
ROPES Grease ropes 7.19.3
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.175− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.176−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.40. AT 18000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

CRANE COMPLETE Visual crane check, control of weldings and bolted −
connections for rust, steel structure − no damage,
bends, ...
ROPE PULLEYS Check for damages / wear 7.22
DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
WATER COOLER Check cooler for dirt, check cooling water additive 7.10.6, 7.7.13
SWITCH CABINET Change air filter −
BATTERIES Check acid level and density, clean and grease ter
7.9.6
minals and cable connections
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter, oil ex
7.11.4, 7.11.7, 7.3
change depending on analyse, clean oil tank before
oil exchange (*)
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check for leaktightness, exchange pressure accu
7.11.6, 7.12
multors, exchange all filters (*)
DRIVING MOTORS Check driving sleeve (*) −
HOISTING GEAR
DISTRIBUTION GEAR Exchange gear oil 7.13.1
BOX
WINCH(ES) 7.13.2
SLEWING GEAR 7.13.3
BOX(ES)
TRAVELLING GEAR 7.15.3
BOX(ES)
CABLE REEL JIB HEAD Vol. 2 / part 2
ROTATOR Exchange gear oil and filter, clean slip ring unit Vol. 2 / part 2
AXLE SETS Check for correct torque, grease bearings of travel 7.15
gear
ROPES Check ropes for fatigue (*) 7.19.4
SLIPRING UNIT UNDER Clean slipring unit 7.25
CARRIAGE
SLIPRING UNIT CABLE Clean slipring unit, check air gap of brake Vol. 2 / part 2
REEL
SAFETY DEVICES Check crane safety features 3.3, 4.3
(slewing, luffing, hoist system, emergency stop,
LML system, load indication system, working ra

dius, travelling window, accoustic warning signals)
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring, 7.17.8, 7.18.1
GREASING SYSTEM Check all greasing points for sufficient grease, func
7.17
tion test of central greasing system
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

−7.177− L284
MAINTENANCE

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.178−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.41. AT 18500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.179− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.180−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.42. AT 19000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
AXLE SETS Grease bearings of travel gear 7.15
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.181− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.182−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.43. AT 19500 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

DIESEL ENGINE Engine service acc. to manufacturer’s manual (*) 7.7.10
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check leaktightness, exchange all filters 7.11.6
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

−7.183− L284
MAINTENANCE

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.184−
 MAINTENANCE
7.29.44. AT 20000 OPERATION HOURS

Function group Work to be performed see section

CRANE COMPLETE Visual crane check, control of weldings and bolted −
connections for rust, steel structure − no damage,
bends, ...
ROPE PULLEYS Check for damages / wear 7.22
DIESEL ENGINE Engine service and extended engine service acc. to 7.7.10
manufacturer’s manual (*)
GENERATOR Change air filter of generator Vol. 2 / part 2
WATER COOLER Check cooler for dirt, check cooling water additive 7.10.6, 7.7.13
BATTERIES Check acid level and density, clean and grease ter
7.9.6
minals and cable connections
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK Take oil sample, exchange return flow filter 7.11.4, 7.11.7
HYDRAULIC COMPLETE Check for leaktightness, exchange pressure accu
7.11.6, 7.12
multors, exchange all filters (*)
DISTRIBUTION GEAR Exchange gear oil 7.13.1
BOX
WINCH(ES) 7.13.2
SLEWING GEAR 7.13.3
BOX(ES)
TRAVELLING GEAR 7.15.3
BOX(ES)
CABLE REEL JIB HEAD Vol. 2 / part 2
ROTATOR Exchange gear oil and filter, clean slip ring unit Vol. 2 / part 2
AXLE SETS Check for correct torque, grease bearings of travel 7.15
gear
ROPES Check ropes for fatigue, Grease ropes (*) 7.19
SLIPRING UNIT UNDER Clean slipring unit 7.25
CARRIAGE
SLIPRING UNIT CABLE Clean slipring unit, check air gap of brake Vol. 2 / part 2
REEL
SAFETY DEVICES Check crane safety features 3.3, 4.3
(slewing, luffing, hoist system, emergency stop,
LML system, load indication system, working ra

dius, travelling window, accoustic warning signals)
SLEWING RING, Check bolt connections for correct torque (*) 7.18
TOWER, JIB
SLEWING RING Grease gear rim of slewing ring 7.17.8, 7.18.1
GREASING SYSTEM Check all greasing points for sufficient grease, func
7.17
tion test of central greasing system
CONTROL STAND Crane function test: drive all functions 4.3
ROPES Turn off ropes with 100 − 200 NM −

. IMPORTANT !
The marked items (*) shall be supervised respectively carried out by a LIEBHERR SERVICE−
TECHNICIAN.

−7.185− L284
MAINTENANCE

CRANE SERIAL NUMBER: _________________________

OPERATION HOURS: _________________________

DATE: _________________________

NAME: _________________________

SIGNATURE: _________________________

NOTES / OPEN ITEMS:

L284 −7.186−
 MAINTENANCE

7.30. SERVICE SPARE−PARTS AND STANDARD TOOLS

A comprehensive spare part list is provided for reference when ordering spare parts or replacements. The
drawings reproduced in the spare part manual are for the purpose to assist in identifying spare parts, they
need not necessarily agree exactly with the actual constructional details of the parts involved. In order to
avoid mistakes, it is advisable to use only the terms and expressions used in the these instructions.

It is particularly important that spare part orders should include the following information:

−CRANE TYPE and CRANE SERIAL NUMBER

−LIEBHERR IDENT−NUMBER of each single spare part
−QUANTITY of parts required
−BRIEF DESCRIPTION of parts required
Careful attention to correct ordering is always important as omission of essential information will inevitably
cause delay and may even lead to incorrect parts being supplied.
In order to avoid any delay we kindly ask to provide additionally following details:

−YOUR PURCHASE ORDER− OR REFERENCE NUMBER

−DELIVERY ADDRESS
−DELIVERY MODE
−YOUR CONTACTS (Address, Telephone No., Fax No.)

7.30.1. HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS SLEWING PLATFORM

QTY IDENT−No. DESCRIPTION NOTE

1 510661414 Filter element (A2 − feed pressure circuit)

1 510661414 Filter element (L2 − steering circuits)

7.30.2. HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

QTY IDENT−No. DESCRIPTION NOTE

1 736877003 Filter element (A7 − return flow filter)

1 510713814 Filter element for air breather

7.30.3. DIESEL−FUEL TANK

QTY IDENT−No. DESCRIPTION NOTE

1 511708114 Filter element for air breather

−7.187− L284
MAINTENANCE

7.30.4. DIESEL ENGINE OM 444 LA

QTY IDENT−No. DESCRIPTION NOTE

1 700291503 Filter element (engine oil) *

2 510619114 Filter cartridge (air filter) *
2 510659308 Safety cartridge (air filter) *
1 550928514 Filter element (diesel fuel pre−filter on engine) *
2 550817714 Filter element (diesel fuel double filter on engine) *
1 511707814 Fuel water seperator *

* for maintenance procedures and intervals see section "DIESEL ENGINE"

7.30.5. ROTATOR

QTY IDENT−No. DESCRIPTION NOTE

1 511708914 Filter element

7.30.6. SPREADER

QTY IDENT−No. DESCRIPTION NOTE

2 511711314 Filter element

7.30.7. GENERATOR

QTY IDENT−No. DESCRIPTION NOTE

2 611124814 Dust filter (m2)

7.30.8. SWITCH CABINET

QTY IDENT−No. DESCRIPTION NOTE

2 611123114 Dust filter 204x204

. NOTE !
ALL STANDARD TOOLS SUPPLIED WITH THE CRANE ARE QUALITY TOOLS ACCORDING TO
DIN−STANDARDS.

A COMPLETE LIST UP OF STANDARD SUPPLIED TOOLS, ADDITIONAL SAFETY DEVICES, etc.

IS PROVIDED IN THE SPARE PART MANUAL.

. NOTE !
ALL SPARE PARTS SEE SPARE PART BOOK

L284 −7.188−
Schiffs- und Containerkrane
Offshorekrane
Seilbagger
Hafen-Mobilkrane

Ship- and Container-Cranes

Offshore-Cranes
Cable Excavators
Harbour Mobile Cranes

1/6
LIEBHERR - Werk Nenzing GmbH

A-6710 Nenzing / Austria

Telefon 0043 - (0) 5525 - 606-0
Telefax 0043 - (0) 5525 - 606-20

LIEBHERR Sunderland Works

Ayres Quay, Deptford Terrace

Sunderland
Tyne and Wear, SR4 6DD
England / UK
Telefon 0044 - (0)191 - 514-3001
Telefax 0044 - (0)191 - 514-4191

2/6
Schmierstoffanforderungen / requirements of lubricants

Nummer Schmierstellen
Außentemperatur Typ / Type Spezifikation
Number Lubrication Points
Outside-temperature ISO VG / SAE Specification

1. Motor / Engine1) ganzjährig / all the year SAE 15W-40 ACEA E2 / E3

bis / to - 10 °C API CD / CE / CF-4
2. Ölbadluftfilter bis / to - 20 °C SAE 10W-40 MIL-L-2104 C/D
Oilbath air cleaner (SHPD)
3. Mechan. Getriebe und Winden bis / to - 20 °C SAE 90 API GL-5
Mechan. gearboxes and winches MIL-L-2105 B

4. Antriebsachsen bis / to - 25 °C SAE 80W-90

Axles SAE 80W-140
5. Hydrostatischer Antrieb bis / to - 25 °C ATF3) 1. Typ A, Suffix A
Hydrostatic transmission 2. DEXRON II D/E
3. DEXRON III
6. Hydrolenkung ganzjährig / all the year ACEA E2 / E3
Power steering bis / to -20 °C2) SAE 10W-40 API CD / CE / CF-4
MIL-L-2104 C/D
bis / to -10 °C2) SAE 15W-40
7. bis / to - 15 °C2) ISO VG 46 DIN 51 524/2
Typ HLP / HLPD
8. bis / to -25 °C2) ISO VG 46 VDMA 24 568 / Typ HEES
schnell biologisch abbaubar
quickly biodegradable
9. Wälzlager - Anti-friction bearings, alle Bereiche Mehrzweckfett DIN 51 825, NLGI 2
Gleitlager - Plain bearings all sections Lithium verseift KP 2 K-30
Kugel- bzw. Rollendrehkränze Multipurposegrease KPE 2 K-30
Ball resp. Roller shewing rings, Lithium based
Kardangelenke - cardan shafts,
sonstige Fettschmierung
other greasing points
10. Offene Zahnräder und Zahnkränze alle Bereiche Schmier- und Konservierungsmittel DIN 51 502
Open gears and geared rims all sections Lubricant and preservative OGPF 0, -1, -2
11. Seile5) alle Bereiche Schmierfett + EP (Calzium) DIN 51825, NLGI 2
Ropes5) all sections Lubricating grease + EP (Calcium) KP 2 G-30
12. Schmierstellen ü. Schmierleitungen alle Bereiche Spezialfett (Lithium) DIN 51 502, NLGI 00
Points greased through pipes all sections Special grease (Lithium) MPE 00 E-40

1) Die Vorschriften des Motorenherstellers ( siehe Betriebsanleitung ) sind verbindlich! / The instructions of the manufacturer are obligatory ( pay attention to the manual )!
2) Bei laufender Stillstandsheizung können die Außentemperaturen um ca. 15 °C tiefer liegen. / With heating of crane in operation outside temperatures could be appr. 15 °C
lower.
3) Für Seilbaggerhydraulik zwingend vorgeschrieben / For cable excavator hydraulics strictly applied
4) Schnell biologisch abbaubar / quickly biodegradable
5) Siehe auch Betriebsanleitung ! / See also the operating manual!

3/6
LIEBHERR Für die Schmierung unserer Schiffs- und Containerkrane, Offshorekrane, Seilbagger und Hafen-Mobilkrane empfehlen wir die
nachstehend aufgeführten oder nachweislich gleichwertigen Betriebsstoffe.

We recommend the following products or those of proven equivalent quality for use when lubricating our Ship- and Container-
Cranes, Offshore-Cranes, Cable Excavators and Harbour Mobile Cranes.
Nummer
Number

Agip BLITUM T Aral Multi Turboral SAE AVIA MULTI HDC PLUS Vanellus C 3 Extra Castrol Turbomax Chevron RPM Heavy Duty ELF PERFORMANCE
1. Agip SIGMA TURBO 15W-40 AVIA MULTI HDC EXTRA Vanellus Multigrad Castrol RX Super Plus Motor Oil SAE 15W-40 TROPHY 15W-40
Aral Plus Turboral SAE 15W/40 *) Chevron Delo 400 PERFORMANCE 3 D
Agip MULTIFLEET AVIA MULTI HDC 15W-40
15W-40 Multigrade SAE 15W-40 15W-40
Agip PROFI
PERFORMANCE XR
15W-40
Agip SIGMA TFE Aral Extra Turboral SAE AVIA TURBOSYNTH HT-E Vanellus HT Extra Castrol RX Super 15W/40 Chevron RPM Heavy Duty ELF ECOMAX FE PLUS
2. Agip SIGMA SUPER TFE 10W-40 10W-40 Vanellus HT Motor Oil SAE 15W-40 10W-40
Aral High Turboral SAE AVIA TURBOSYNTH *) Chevron Delo 400 ELF ECOMAX FE 10W-
Agip SIGMA ULTRA TFE Vanellus FE Extra
10W-40 10W-40 Multigrade SAE 15W-40 40
Vanellus FE
Aral Mega Turboral SAE AVIA MULTI CFE PLUS ELF PERFORMANCE
10W-40 10W-40 EXPERTY 7,5W-40
AVIA MULTI CFE 10W-40

Agip ROTRA MP DB Aral Getriebeöl HYP SAE AVIA HYPOID 90 EP Energear Hypo 90 Castrol EPX 90 TRANSELF TYP B SAE
3. 85W-90 Castrol Hypoy B EP 90 90

Agip ROTRA MP 80W-90 Aral Getriebeöl HYP AVIA SYNTOGEAR FE Energear HT Castrol EPX 80W/90 *) Chevron Delo Gear TRANSELF TYP B SAE
4. Agip ROTRA MP 85W-140 SAE 85W-90 80W-90 Energear FE Castrol Hypoy B EP Lubricant SAE 80W-90 80W-90
Aral Getriebeöl HYP AVIA HYPOID FE 80W-140 80W/90 *) Chevron Delo Gear TRANSELF TYP B SAE
SAE 85W-140 Lubricant SAE 85W-140 85W-140
Castrol Hypoy B
EP 80W/140

1. Agip ROTRA ATF 1. Aral Getriebeöl ATF 22 1. AVIA FLUID ATF 66 M 1. Autran ATF 1. - 1. - 1. ELF TRANS-O-MATIC
5. 2. Agip ATF D 2. Aral Getriebeöl ATF E-S 2. AVIA FLUID ATF 92 S 2. Autran DX II 2. Castrol TQ Dexron II 2. - 2. ELFMATIC G 2
Agip ATF D 309 3. Aral Getriebeöl ATF 55 AVIA FLUID ATF 86 3. Autran DX III 3. - 3. Chevron Automatic 3. ELFMATIC G 3
Transmission Fluid
Agip ATF II E 3. -
3. Agip ATF III D
Agip SIGMA TFE Aral Extra Turboral SAE AVIA MULTI CFE 10W-40 Vanellus FE Castrol RX Super 10W/40 Chevron RPM Heavy Duty ELF ECOMAX FE PLUS
6. Agip SIGMA SUPER TFE 10W-40 AVIA MULTI HDC 15W-40 Vanellus C 3 Extra Castrol Turbomax Motor Oil SAE 15W-40 10W-40
Aral Multi Turboral SAE *) Chevron Delo 400
Agip BLITUM T Castrol RX Super Plus
15W-40 Multigrade SAE 15W-40
15W/40
Agip SIGMA TURBO
Agip MULTIFLEET
Agip OSO 46 Aral Vitam GF 46 AVIA FLUID RSL 46 Energol HLP 46 Castrol Hyspin AWS 46 Chevron Mechanism LPS ELFOLNA 46
7. Agip ARNICA 46 Aral Vitam DE 46 AVIA FLUID HLPD 46 Energol HLP-D 46 Castrol Hyspin AWH-M 46 46 ELFOLNA DS 46
Agip OSO D 46 Castrol Hyspin SP 46 Chevron Hydraulic Oil AW ELFOLNA HLPD 46
MV 46
Castrol Hydrauliköl
HLPD 46 SF

8. Auf Anfrage bei Liebherr

Only on request at Liebherr
Agip GR MU EP 2 Aral Langzeitfett H AVIALITH 2 Energrease LS-EP 2 Castrol Spheerol AP 2 Chevron Dura-Lith Grease EPEXELF 2
9. Agip Longtime - Grease 2 Aralub HLP 2 AVIALITH 2 EP Biogrease EP 2 Castrol LZV-EP EP 2
Chevron Ulti-Plex Synthetic
Agip GREASE 30 Aralub BAB EP 2 AVIA SYNTOGREASE 2 4) Castrol Spheerol EPL 2
Grease EP
Grease
AUTOL TOP 2000

Agip FIN 332 F Aralub MK-Z 1 AVIA SYNTOTAC Open Gear Grease No. 2 Castrol Spheerol LMM Chevron Open Gear ELF CARDREXA GR
10. AUTOL Hochleistungs- AVIA ALUPLEX 0 RHS Grease Lubricant 250 NC 1 - AL
Zahnradspray AVIA ALUPLEX 2 RHY
AVIA ALUPLEX RHS
FLUID

Agip GR PV 2 Aralub MKC 2 AVIACAL 2 LD Castrol Spheerol SX2 *) Chevron RPM ELF PALISSA 2
11. AUTOL TOP 2000 Grease Automotive Grease EP 2

AUTOL ZSA synth. Aral Fließfett N AVIALITH 000 Bio Biogrease EP 00 Castrol CLS-Grease *) Chevron Dura-Lith ELF MULTI BT 000
12. AUTOL ZSA Aral Fließfett BAB 000 Grease EP 00

Die Schmierstoff- bzw. Betriebsstoffmengen sowie die Wartungsfristen sind aus der Betriebsanleitung ersichtlich!
For lubricant and fuel quantities and maintenance intervals, see operating manual!
*) Unter dieser Bezeichnung in den USA erhältlich / Under this brandname obtainable in the USA

4/6
LIEBHERR Für die Schmierung unserer Schiffs- und Containerkrane, Offshorekrane, Seilbagger und Hafen-Mobilkrane empfehlen wir die
nachstehend aufgeführten oder nachweislich gleichwertigen Betriebsstoffe.

We recommend the following products or those of proven equivalent quality for use when lubricating our Ship- and Container-
Cranes, Offshore-Cranes, Cable Excavators and Harbour Mobile Cranes.
Nummer
Number

ESSOLUBE TDS FINA KAPPA EXTRA TITAN SUPER 1540 Mobil Delvac 1 SHC Shell Myrina X URSA SUPER LA 15W-40 VERKOPLUS 15W40
1. ESSOLUBE MHX FINA KAPPA SUPRA TITAN UNIVERSAL (5W-40) Shell Rimula TX *) URSA PREMIUM TDX SHPD
HD 1540 Mobil Delvac XHP 15W-40 VERKOL TURBO SHPD
ESSOLUBE XD-3+
(10W-40) 15W40
Multigrade TITAN TRUCK 1540

ESSO HD 156 FINA KAPPA ULTRA TITAN UNIVERSAL Mobil Delvac 1400 Super Shell Myrina TX 10W-40 URSA SUPER TDX 10W-
2. ESSOLUBE TDX FINA KAPPA FE 1040 MC 40
TITAN CARGO MC
ESSOLUBE LDX
SAE 10W-40
TITAN CFE 1040 MC

ESSO GEAR OIL GX-D FINA PONTONIC MP TITAN SUPER GEAR Mobilube HD 85W-90-A Shell Spirax MB 90 GEARTEX EP-B 90 MYSTIK JT-7 SAE 90 EP
3. 85W-90 80W-90, 85W-90 8090 MC
FINA PONTONIC FDL TITAN GEAR HYP
75W-90, 80W-90 SAE 85W-90

ESSO GEAR OIL TDL FINA PONTONIC MP TITAN SUPER GEAR Mobilube HD 85W-90-A Shell Spirax AX 80W-90 GEARTEX EP-C MYSTIK JT-7 80W90
4. 80W-90 80W-90 SAE 80W-90 Mobilube SHC 75W-90 LS Shell Spirax HD 85W-140 80W-90 / 80W-140
MYSTIK JT-7 85W140
ESSO GETRIEBEOEL FINA PONTONIC FDL TITAN SUPER GEAR *) MULTIGEAR EP
Mobilube HD 85W-140
GX 85W-140 75W-90, 80W-90 SAE 85W-140 80W-90 / 85W-140

1. ESSO ATF TYPE 1. FINA PURFIMATIC 1. RENOFLUID TF 20 1. Mobil ATF 200 1. Shell Donax TM 1. TEXAMATIC 1585 1. VESTA AS-A
5. SUFFIX A FLUID 2. RENOFLUID 3000 2. Mobil ATF 220 2. Shell Donax TA 2. TEXAMATIC 4261 2. VESTA TD-2
2. ESSO ATF D (21611) 2. FINAMATIC II D-22233 3. TITAN ATF 4000 3. Mobil ATF 3. Shell Donax TX TEXAMATIC 4011 3. -
ESSO ATF LDS FINAMATIC II D-22307 ( F - 30366 ) 3. TEXAMATIC 7045
3. ESSO ATF F-30320 FINAMATIC S 6726 *) HAVOLINE ATF
3. FINAMATIC HP DEXRON III
ESSO HD 156 FINA KAPPA FE 10W-40 TITAN UNIVERSAL Mobil Delvac XHP Shell Myrina TX URSA SUPER TDX 10W- VERKOPLUS 15W40
6. ESSOLUBE TDX FINA KAPPA SUPRA 1040 MC
Mobil Delvac 1400 Super Shell Myrina X 40 SHPD
15W-40 TITAN UNIVERSAL URSA SUPER LA 15W-40 VERKOL TURBO SHPD
ESSOLUBE LDX Shell Rimula TX
HD 1540 15W40
*) URSA PREMIUM TDX
ESSOLUBE TDS
15W-40
ESSOLUBE MHX

NUTO H 46 FINA HYDRAN TS 46 RENOLIN B 15 Mobil DTE 25 Shell Tellus Oil 46 *) RANDO HD 46 VESTA HLP-46
7. HLPD-OEL 46 FINA HYDRAN HLP-D 46 RENOLIN MR 15 Hydraulikoel HLPD 46 Shell Tellus Oil DO 46 ALCOR DD 46 VESTA HLPD-46
Shell Tellus Oil TD 46 *) RANDO HDZ 46

8. Auf Anfrage bei Liebherr

Only on request at Liebherr
BEACON EP 2 FINA MARSON EPL 2 LAGERMEISTER EP 2 Mobilgrease HP 222 Shell Retinax EP2 *) MULTIFAK EP 2 VERKOL RS-2
9. RONEX MP-D FINA LICAL EP 2 STABYL ECO EP 2 Mobilux EP 2 Shell Alvania EP(LF)2 MULTIFAK 20 VERKOL EPX-2
RONEX MP *) 4 MULTIFAK T EP 2 ATLANTA
FINA BIOLICAL EPS 2 )
*) MULTIFAK ALL
PURPOSE 2

CAZAR K 1 FINA CERAN AD â Mobiltac 81 Shell Fett S.8327 *) CRATER PREMIUM COBERTONE-00
10. FINA CERAN WR 2
CEPLATTYN 300
Mobiltemp 78 0 und 2 COBERTONE-0
â
CEPLATTYN KG 10 HMF
COBERTONE-1

NEBULA EP 2 FINA CERAN WR 2 â Mobilplex 47 Shell Rhodina EP(LF)2 *) CRATER PREMIUM 2 MYSTIK JT-6
11. FINA CERAN AD
CEDRACON 95/100 N
MYSTIK JT-6-E
â
CEPLATTYN ECO 300
( NLGI-0 )

FINA MARSON ZS STABYL ECO 00 Shell Retinax CSB00 MULTIFAK 6833 EP 00 VERKOL EPX-00
12. STARFAK EP 00 CENTRALUB GR-00

Die Schmierstoff-bzw. Betreibsstoffmengen sowie die Wartungsfristen sind aus der Betriebsanleitung ersichtlich!
For lubricant and fuel quantities and maintenance intervals, see operating manual!
*) Unter dieser Bezeichnung in den USA erhältlich / Under this brandname obtainable in the USA

5/6
Diese Gesellschaften unterhalten einen Schmiertechnischen Dienst, dessen Ingenieure auf Anforderungen in allen
Schmierungsfragen zur Verfügung stehen.

These companies maintain a Technical Service whose engineers shall be glad to render assistance on all problems
connected with proper lubrication of all machine parts.
Agip Schmiertechnik GmbH, Würzburg
und Agip - Vertriebspartner
Im Ausland: Die Agip - Gesellschaften in der ganzen Welt
Agip Companies all over the world
Aral Lubricants GmbH, Bochum
Im Ausland Aral - Vertriebsgesellschaften in der ganzen Welt
Agencies of Aral all over the world

AVIA Mineralöl-AG, München

AVIA - Gesellschaften in Europa
AVIA Companies in European countries

BP OIL Deutschland GmbH, Hamburg

und ihre Niederlassungen
Im Ausland: Die BP - Gesellschaften in der ganzen Welt
BP Companies all over the world
THE BURMAH OIL (DEUTSCHLAND) GmbH
Castrol Marine Division
Im Ausland: Die BURMAH - CASTROL Gesellschaften in der ganzen Welt
Overseas: THE BURMAH - CASTROL Companies all over the world
CHEVRON GERMANY INC., Hamburg, MARINE ABTEILUNG
Die Chevron - Gesellschaften in der ganzen Welt
Chevron Companies all over the world

ELF Mineralölwerk Osnabrück GmbH, Osnabrück

Im Ausland: Die ELF - Gesellschaften in der ganzen Welt
ELF Companies all over the world

ESSO A.G., Hamburg

und ihre Vertretungen
Im Ausland: Die ESSO / EXXON Gesellschaften in der ganzen Welt
ESSO / EXXON Companies all over the world
FINA Deutschland GmbH, Frankfurt am Main
Im Ausland: PETROFINA - und FINA - Gesellschaften in der ganzen Welt
PETROFINA - und FINA - Companies all over the world

FUCHS LUBRITECH GMBH, Weilerbach

FUCHS AUSTRIA SCHMIERMITTEL Ges. m. b. H., A - Bergheim bei Salzburg
Vertretungen und Lizenzfertigungen in Europa und Übersee auf Anfrage
Addresses of representatives and licencees in Europe and overseas upon request
Mobil Oil AG, Hamburg
Im Ausland: Die Mobil Oil Gesellschaften in der ganzen Welt
Mobil Oil Companies all over the world

Deutsche Shell Aktiengesellschaft, Hamburg

Im Ausland: Die Shell Gesellschaften in der ganzen Welt
Shell Companies all over the world

TEXACO Deutschland GmbH, Düsseldorf

Im Ausland: TEXACO - und CALTEX - Gesellschaften in der ganzen Welt
TEXACO and CALTEX Companies all over the world

VERKOL Spain, Vera de Bidasoa ( Navarra)

VERKOL - Gesellschaften in Europa
VERKOL Companies in European countries

6/6